Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
38B-008 (3)
3.07 TESTING A. Balancing Loads: 1. Circuits shall be connected to the panelboards so that the total load is distributed equally between each line and neutral to within ten percent. Branch circuits shall be balanced on their own panelboards, and feeder loads balanced on the main distribution panel. Reasonable load testing shall be arranged for verification if requested by the Public Works Department. ..r BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-26 US 847 aww ew they must be in first-class operating order and in perfect condition as to finish, etc. Check for proper operation and appearance, alignment of fixtures and proper placement of lenses, louvers, lamps and other light controlling or modifying appurtenances. 3.05 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 18" above finished floor, aligned above or below closest block course, except at locations where wall mounted equipment precludes this mounting height. At such locations, receptacle height shall be as directed by the Architect:. Switch outlets shall be 48" above finished floor, unless aligned above or below closest block course. The Electrical Contractor shall check with the Architectural and Structural Plans for interference's. B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be of the threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein without excessive bending of the conductors, which would damage the conductor insulation. D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1/4" back of finished surface. E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture. F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used, shall be provided with covers. 3.06 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor and be included in his bid. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-25 L&S 847 llls necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall provide suitable pull boxes. B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction. C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to junction boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using insulated bushings on conduit 1-1/4" or larger. Grounding bushings shall be provided at all panel connections. D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of flexible steel conduit to eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with cable jumper across greenfield and fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at ceiling mounted lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures. 3.04 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Installation of all lighting fixtures shall be done by experienced mechanics. Lighting fixtures shall not be installed where finished coat of paint has been applied to ceiling and walls until paint is thoroughly dry. B. Lighting fixtures in equipment rooms shall not be installed until after all piping and duct work is in place. Lighting fixture layout shown on the Drawings is typical layout, but may be modified to provide adequate lighting of the equipment space according to final construction conditions. Any relocation of fixtures due to duct or piping interference shall be as directed by the Architect, at no expense to the Owner. C. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for proper co-ordination of all lighting .. fixture locations. Provide support for all fixtures mounted on or recessed in hung ceiling. He shall confer with Ceiling Contractor and Heating and Ventilating Contractor to co-ordinate lighting system with other trades. D. Provide and install suitable cover plate or canopy for each fixture outlet box where the fixture does not provide a suitable cover. E. Fixtures located on exterior of building shall be installed with cadmium-plated brass screws and gasketed. F. All pendant type fixtures in the same room shall be installed at a uniform height from the floor and shall hang plumb. G. Upon completion of the installation of the lighting fixtures and lighting equipment, BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-24 US 847 .s C. If, in laying out his work, the Electrical Contractor finds that the work of other trades might interfere with his, the Architect shall be notified. D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of feeders, mains, and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans. The exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has been given to work of other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire installation shall conform to the latest issue of the Massachusetts Electrical Code and local inspection authorities. E. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, control, and apparatus, shall be made accessible. F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces, except as otherwise specified. 3.02 GROUNDING A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in non-metallic raceways and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment. B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding and/or bonding in the building of all equipment, power and lighting ,,,,, systems installed under this Contract. C. The Electrical Contractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and equipment to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of connections. Provide and install bonding and grounding conductors with approved termination where required, conforming with the latest Massachusetts Electrical Code and other applicable specification standards. D. A#12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length +! of flexible metallic conduit connection to motors, recessed lighting fixtures and other equipment components for continuity. Positive ground connections with the ground wire shall be made at each outlet box, lighting fixture, motor and other equipment components by means of positively secured ground clamp in each. 3.03 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more than the equivalent of three 90°bends in a single run. Where more bends are BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-23 L&S 847 no f. Noise: Less than 100 mv. g. TDR testing will be performed with 10 ft. Category V patch cables; one at TDR, and one at signal injector. h. Document all data obtained in cable certification process for each drop,including Outlet IO and Pass/Fail status. S. System Documentation: 1. Prepare and submit four (4) copies of operation and maintenance manuals, neatly bound as outlined in this Specification. 2. Manual to include: a. A system block diagram with all input/output terminations and patch points identified. b. A listing of the As-built cabling and components installed. C. A record of the dynamic test results, both data communication simulation and the real time photographs showing the Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR) measurements of the individual cable , segments. d. Formalized As-built Drawings indicating the physical cable plant, component and node locations. e. A topology diagram depicting the network configuration for Owner's reference when additions, changes, or modifications are made to the original design. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as to cause no delay in the construction by other trades. B. The Electrical Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements and those shown on plans. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-22 L&S 847 ■rr on ap cation. Tie as required using T&B "Ty-Raps" of appropriate size and type. Limit spacing between ties to 6", and provide circuit and conductor go identification at least once in each enclosure. 9. Provide ample service loops at each termination so that plates, panels, and equipment can be un-mounted for service and inspection. Q. Acceptance Testing 1. Acceptance testing shall be performed by the Architect/Engineer and Owner during a period designated by the Owner. The period of time required for acceptance testing is two (2) working days. Contractor shall furnish a minimum of one (1) technician for the acceptance testing period. This area shall be completed with all furnishings ready for occupancy. 2. Make additional mechanical and electrical adjustments within the scope of the work and which are deemed necessary by the Architect or Owner as a result of the acceptance tests. R. Testing and Inspection 1. Test and inspect all parts of the work provided under this Section and as 4" required by codes, standard or authorities having jurisdiction, and conduct all tests and inspections to the complete satisfaction of the Architect and all authorities. Notify the Architect and all involved authorities at least one (1) week prior to testing or inspection. Do not cover work prior to testing or inspection. 2. The Contractor shall certify all twisted pair cable drops with a time domain reflectometer (TDR) device in order to verify compliance with IEEE Specifications. The test results for all cable drops must meet or exceed the following Specifications when tested from each end. a. Compliance with EIA/TIA T569B wiring sequence. b. Distance: Less than 90 meters. C. Attenuation at 10.0 MHz: Less than 6.95 dB. d. Near end crosstalk(NEXT) at 10.0 Mhz: Greater than 44.1)Db. e. Cable Resistance: Less than 9.4 OHMS (18.8 loopback). BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-21 L&S 847 2. Secure equipment firmly in place, including boxes, conduit, and cables. Provide fastenings and supports adequate to support loads. 3. Install work neatly, with boxes, equipment, etc., plumb and square. Adjust layout as necessary to preserve symmetry and aesthetics. Install equipment to provide maximum safety to future operators. 4. Clearly, logically, and permanently mark connectors, jacks, cables, and cable terminations. " P. Wiring 1. Provide wire, conduits, and raceways according to standard broadcast practices. Do not exceed 30% fill in conduit. 2. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to cables and equipment. 3. Wiring shall not rest on ceiling material nor touch any heat sources. .. Conduits exposed to physical abuse shall be run in RSC, 3/4"minimum. 4. Install all data wire and cable. Ensure proper. . a. Pulling tensions. b. Quantities. C. Types. d. Lengths. e. Routing. f. Wire group separation. g. Identification. 5. The interconnection of all equipment requiring shielded cable shall be by Belden type 9451, or equivalent,unless otherwise specified. 6. All wires shall be permanently identified at each wire end by marking with "E-Z" tape markers or equivalent. .�. 7. Splicing of cables is not permitted between terminations at specified equipment. 8. Form, in a neat and orderly manner, all conductors in enclosures and boxes, wireways and wiring troughs,providing circuit and conductor identifi BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-20 US 847 .w L. Grounding 1. All equipment racks,housings, and raceways shall be grounded. 2. Data system shall contain a single point ground. All cabinets, racks, etc. shall be connected to a single point ground which, in turn, will be connected to the grounding systems conductors in that area. 3. All manufacturers grounding requirements shall be adhered to as a minimum. M. Labeling 1. Each cable shall be labeled: a. Where it enters a termination or patch panel. b. On the front of the patch panel or punch block. 2. Cables shall be labeled using pre-printed or write-on markers with a clear overwrap to protect the labeling. If pre-printed markers are utilized, the clear overwrap shall cover the entire legend. 3. All cables will be labeled at both ends,with room number and floor. N. Field Quality Control 1. Employ a Job Superintendent or Project Manager during the course of the installation to provide co-ordination of the work of the Division and of other trades and to provide technical information when requested by other trades. This person shall be responsible for all quality control during installation, equipment set-up and testing. O. General Co-ordination(Date and Telephone Wiring) 1. Entire system shall conform completely with pertinent codes, laws, ordinances, regulations, standards, criteria, or other requirements, including, but not limited to, structural support, fire rating and health/safety requirements regarding all items. Such conformity shall have precedence over this Specification. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-19 L&S 847 CIA J. Installation of Data and Telephone Cabling 1. Install materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions to comply with governing regulations and industry standards applicable to the work and as shown on approved Shop Drawings. a. Contractor shall rigidly adhere to manufacturer's published .. specifications for pulling tension, minimum bend radii, and sidewall pressure when installing all cables. 2. Arrange and mount all equipment and materials in a manner acceptable to the Architect/Engineer and Owner. 3. Installation shall conform to the following basic guidelines: a. Use of approved wire, cable, and wiring devices. b. Neat and uncluttered wire termination. C. Cable marking materials shall be employed throughout the length of each cable run. The Contractor shall label each cable at the ends and at each splice/junction point. Contractor shall label cables in accordance with 2.13.M, "Labeling" of this section. 4. Provide fire stopping for electrical penetrations through fire rated floors, walls, and other partitions of building construction. 5. Where existing cables (outlets) are being relocated to an adjacent wall, Contractor shall cut off connector and pull cable to new outlet box location. Pull and label as specified. K. Testing of Data Cables 1. Each pair and the shield of each cable shall be tested for opens, shorts, grounds, and pair reversal. Grounded and reversed pairs shall be corrected by the Contractor. Open and shorted pairs shall be examined to determine if the problem is caused by faulty termination. If the termination is proper, the bad pairs shall be tapped at both ends and noted on the punch down sheets. 2. If any data cable contains any bad conductors or pairs, the entire cable shall be replaced at no charge to the Owner. 3. All terminated UTP cables shall conform to the Specifications for Category 5 cable. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-18 L&S 847 d. Nominal Delay: 1.5 NS/FT. e. Nominal Condr/D.C.R. at 20 C: 27 OHMS/1000 FT. f. Characteristic Impedance: 100 OHMS -+-/- 15%. 2. Frequency Max. Attenuation Min. Crosstalk 1 MHz 6.3 dB/1,000 Ft. 62 dB/1,000 Ft. 4 MHz 13 dB/1,000 Ft. 53 dB/1,000 Ft. 10 MHz 20 dB/1,000 Ft. 47 dB/1,000 Ft. 16 MHz 25 dB/1,000 Ft. 44 dB/1,000 Ft. 20 MHz 28 dB/1,000 Ft. 42 dB/1,000 Ft. 100 MHz 67 dB/1,000 Ft. 32 dB/1,000 Ft. 3. Physical Characteristics a. Maximum pulling tension: 41 lbs. b. Minimum bend radius: 2.00 in. C. Nominal diameter: .217 in. d. Cable shall be Belden No. 1583A or approved equal. 4. Wall Plates and Connectors a. Furnish and install faceplates, boxes and inserts based on equipment as manufactured by Hubbell. i. Date- Category 5 5110 Type. ii. Voice-FTJ Type b. Data runs will be punched down(8 wires)to Category V RJ45 patch panels using EIA/TIA 568B standard. C. Voice station wires will be punched down to 110 Type blocks. d. Provide two (2) port faceplates for "Data Only" locations and three (3)port faceplates for combined voice/data locations. 5. Voice cable to be Category 3. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-17 L&S 847 M OW D. The building shall be wired on a "zone" per floor basis unless otherwise indicated by the Owner. 2.12 TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEM A. The building's internal telephone/data system is existing, and will be modified to accommodate the new building layout as shown on the Drawings and directed by the Owner. B. Existing service end equipment, including fiber optic data and telephone equipment shall remain. Relocate to accommodate new walls where applicable. C. New outlet locations, as shown on Drawings, shall consist of standard size outlet box, and cover plates (smooth phenolic ivory), with 3 ports; (1) for data, (1) for telephone, and(1)for future expansion. D. The work in this Section shall be performed by a Contractor who has been pre- qualified by the College. Acceptable Contractor is Hogan. E. Work of this Section shall include the installation, termination, and testing of all data and telephone wiring from the outlets indicated on the Contract Drawings to the Data and Telephone Equipment as directed by the Owner. F. Each Telephone/Data outlet drop shall consist of one (1) data and one (1) voice drop,run from each outlet location to the existing equipment. G. All data runs must be installed without cross-connects between wall jack and patch panel terminations. H. Voice runs may be cross connected on 110 blocks. I. Data cabling shall be Category V,unshielded twisted pair, (UTP),with a blue sheath as manufactured by IBM,Belden, or AT&T. 1. The installed cabling must meet or exceed the following specifications: �+ a. UTP (unshielded twisted pair), Category V rated, 24 AWG solid bare CU, PVC jacket,4 pairs. b. Nominal capacitance at 1 KHZ: 4 PF/FT. C. Nominal velocity of progragation: 67% BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-16 US 847 00 B. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip indicating, and have common trip on all multi-pole breakers. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking position between "On" and "Off' when the breaker is tripped. Connections to the bus shall be bolt-on. C. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breaker shall be the "distributed phase" or "phase sequence" type. All current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated. D. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. Terminals for branch circuit wiring, both breaker and neutral, shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. E. Panelboard circuit numbering shall be such that starting at the top, odd numbers shall be used in sequence down the left-hand side and even numbers shall be used in sequence down the right-hand side. F. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1/4" high by 3" long or equivalent for each circuit. The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit. G. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than 10,000 amps. H. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and bear the UL label. Panelboards shall be Square D, "NQOD" series for 120/208 volts. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.11 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (Furnished by Owner; Installed by Electrical Contractor) A. The Electrical Contractor shall install new fire alarm system indicating and initiating devices as shown on Drawings and determined in the field in coordination with all existing to remain and new equipment of all trades. B. All fire alarm equipment shall be furnished by the Owner and shall be as manufactured by Simplex to match existing. C. All wiring in conduit, junction boxes and supporting hardware shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. eA BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-15 L&S 847 w eAA� general purpose enclosures unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. 1. Across-the-line magnetic starters shall be equipped with double break silver .� alloy contacts. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing starter from panel. 2. Coils shall be of molded construction, replaceable from the front without removing the starter from the panel. 3. Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit module. Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction and inter- changeable. The starter shall be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed. a. All three phase magnetic starters shall have "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch, three-pole, three-phase of NEMA size applicable, with three melting alloy overload relays and three-position H-O-A switch in cover of general purpose enclosure. To be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 522. No substitutions will be allowed. b. All single phase magnetic starters shall be single pole magnetic contactors without overload protection, with "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch in cover of general purpose enclosure. To be Allen- Bradley Bulletin 509. No substitutions will be allowed. C. A control transformer shall be furnished and installed in each starter, fused,with 24 volt secondary. Starter coils shall be 24 volt. d. Furnish a minimum of one auxiliary contact in each starter for use by others for interlocking purposes. „ E. Equivalent equipment by Cutler-Hammer, General Electric will be considered. 2.09 SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT A. The building service is existing to remain. New panel boards, as shown on plans, will be fed from this source. 2.10 PANELBOARDS A. Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting and receptacle panelboards as required and where shown on the Plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal- magnetic molded case circuit breakers with frame and trip ratings as required. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-14 L&S 847 wr C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and size. T-8 lamps shall be 3500 K. Compact fluorescent PL lamps shall be 3,500 K. D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure. *" E. Fixtures are identified by letter on the Fixture Schedule and by corresponding letter on Drawings. Manufacturers' names and catalogue numbers are listed to show type and standard of quality. Complete schedule of lighting fixtures shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect and Owner. 2.08 MOTOR STARTERS AND SWITCHES A. Furnish and install motor starting,protecting, and controlling devices for motors. B. Furnish and install heavy duty fused safety switches as required. 1. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the "Off' position with the door open. All current-carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion and promote cool operation. 2. Switches shall be quick-made and quick-break such that, during normal operation of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. The handle and mechanism shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover, with positive pad-locking provisions in the "Off' position. 3. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general-purpose enclosures unless NEMA 3R (rainproof) is required. Enclosures shall have gray enamel, electro-deposited on cleaned phosphatized steel. 4. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 volts AC. 5. Fuses shall be as required. 6. Switches shall be Square D, heavy-duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosures,or equal. C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt, single phase motors shall be single or double pole toggle switches as specified, or required. D. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance with NEMA Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be mounted in BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-13 L&S 847 8. Switch and Pilot Light - 20 amp, 120 volt, side and back wired, red handle, Leviton Cat. No. 1221-PLR, or equal. 9. Power receptacles shall be flush type, of NEMA configuration shown, with matching cord and cap, Leviton, or equal, as follows: a. Type "R" - 50 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat. No. 279. b. Type "D" - 30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat. No. 278. 10. Clock hanger outlet with single receptacle and strong hook for hanging heavy clocks, Leviton Cat. No. 688-I, ivory finish, or equal. Clocks shall be provided by the Owner. 11. Wall plates shall be smooth molded urea or phenolic plastic, ivory with matching screws. To be Leviton Cat. No. 86000 series,or equal. 12. Occupancy sensors shall consist of wall mounted passive infrared sensors mounted in standard size switch box at standard switch height. Sensor to include integral manual auto/off bypass switch, time delay adjustment from 30 seconds to 30 minutes, and daylight level sensor adjustable from 2.4 to 300 f.c. Provide decorator style ivory phenolic plastic cover. To be Watt Stopper Cat.No. WS-120,or equal for 120 volt operation. 2.07 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets shown on plans. All lighting fixtures to have label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures to be complete in all respects with all required glassware and lamps. All lamps to be new. Furnish • and install all required hardware to fit in all type ceilings. Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and diffusers are installed. Any chipped, cracked or otherwise defective material shall be replaced. ..� B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state electronic type, approvable for use on their system by the Massachusetts Electric Co. Fixture/lamp combinations for which electronic ballasts are not available shall be high power factor, energy efficient magnetic type, complete with automatic reset thermal protector, and shall be CBM certified. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-12 US 847 F. Pull and junction boxes,whether surface or flush, shall be galvanized code gauge. G. Pull boxes and wireways shall be standard NEMA-1 enclosures with cover plates and screws,bonderized paint finished. H. Pull and splice boxes not indicated on the Drawings shall be provided as required by the National and the Massachusetts Electrical Codes. I. Outlet boxes and covers shall be as manufactured by Steel City electrical Company, General Electric Company, Raco,or approved equal. 2.05 NAMEPLATES A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls, panels and safety switches. The nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal, screw attached. Submit schedule of nameplate lettering for approval. W 2.06 WIRING DEVICES A. The Electrical Contractor shall install devices where shown on the plans. Where two or more devices occur at one location, they shall be provided with a gang plate. All unused boxes to be furnished with blank plates. 1. Duplex Receptacles - 20 amp, 125 volt with grounding screw, side and back wired. To be Leviton Cat.No. 5352-1,or equal. 2. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be Leviton Cat.No. 6898-HGI,or equal. 3. Weatherproof cover for receptacles shall be lockable, vertical, UL Listed, with Lexan base and lid, 4-screw attachment,Tay Mac Cat. No. 20-3-5-0, or equal. 4. Duplex receptacles, isolated ground - 20 A, 125 V, side and back wired, Leviton Cat.No. 5362-IG,or equal. 5. Light Switches, Single Pole - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat.No. 1221-2,or equal. 6. Light Switches, 3 Way-20 amp, 120/277 volt,back and side wired, Leviton Cat.No. 1223-2, or equal. 7. Light Switches, 4 Way-20 amp, 120/277 volt,back and side wired,Leviton Cat.No. 1224-2, or equal. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-11 L&S 847 ow so 2.03 CONDUCTORS A. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity copper, with 600-volt insulation, and shall be 4M of types indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans. Aluminum conductors shall not be used. B. Conductors#10 AWG and smaller, Type THWN, solid. C. Conductors#4 AWG through#8 AWG,Type THWN, stranded. D. Conductors#3 AWG and larger, Type THW, stranded. E. Branch circuit wiring located above lay in tile ceilings or fished in stud partitions may be Type MC cable; single and multi-circuit home runs shall be raceway and wire as specified. F. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those specification sections. " G. Wire and Cable to be by Cerro, Southwire,Triangle/PWC,or equal. 2.04 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel unless otherwise noted or required by the National Electrical Code, and shall be as required for their use. B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to weather and wet locations shall be of the cast aluminum, threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. C. Outlet boxes shall be of sizes and types to accommodate: .� 1. Structural conditions. 2. Size and number of raceways and conductors or cables entering. 3. Device of fixture for which required. ■* D. Boxes occurring at plastered surfaces shall have a suitable plaster ring installed. E. Where multiple devices are located at one point, gang type boxes shall be used. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-10 , US 847 aw and reasonably incidental to providing all Electrical work specified and shown on the Drawings, less the cost of all extra work described in the Alternates. C. Alternate Bid Item No. 1 1. Price above the base bid for furnishing all labor, materials, and other cost in connection with furnishing and installing electrical equipment in the five(5) new offices located on the second floor. See Drawings for full extent of Scope. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 RACEWAYS A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all raceway runs concealed in concrete,run under slabs,run in trenches or pits, exposed below 6' M above floor, and for service entrance conductor sweeps. Conduit shall comply with the latest applicable Federal Specifications. B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all homerun raceways run in walls or partitions, raceways run exposed inside the building, or run concealed in or above furred spaces unless otherwise specified above. Electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the latest applicable requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. Couplings, connectors, and fittings for electrical metallic tubing may be of the set screw type. C. Electrical metallic tubing shall be used for all homeruns. Or D. Flexible Steel Conduit (Type MC) shall be used for final connections to motors, (Type MC),or other movable equipment to facilitate removal and connections. E. Flexible steel conduit (Type MC) shall be used from homerun point (EMT) to remaining portions of circuits (between receptacles, lights, switch legs, etc.), as shown on Plans. 2.02 MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLY A. Multi-outlet assembly shall be Wiremold Series 4,000, or equal, complete with wire clips, couplings, cover, divider, duplex receptacles and blank data ports 24"o.c. (use !** No. V4049/G4049 device mounting plate cover with No. 5507D/5507D-G and No. 5507RS/5507RJ-G), and all other accessories required to complete the installation. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-9 L&S 847 on on shall be considered as being defective. 1.17 CUTTING AND PATCHING •m A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of electrical apparatus in the building, shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (i.e. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for conduit and equipment where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Electrical Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1. 1.19 ALTERNATES . A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the Electrical Subcontractor is more specifically described below. �* B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-8 L&S 847 rA, instructions shall be legible and easily read,with large sheets of Drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The manual shall include the following information: 1 Description of systems. 2. Description of start up,operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment. 3. Winter/summer changeover procedures. 4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 5. Lubrication chart. 6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. �w 7. Valve chart, if applicable. 8. List of recommended spare parts. 9. Copies of all service contracts. 10. Performance curves for pumps, fans, etc. 11. Lists of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. 1.16 GUARANTEE A. The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in r all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-7 L&S 847 Ra .. as shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the individual Contractor. B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be w. removed by the individual Contractor. 1.14 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping, duct work, cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms. B. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level, parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building. 1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each Section. The BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-6 L&S 847 Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Electrical Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 1.08 PERMITS, FEES,AND INSPECTIONS A. The Electrical Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Electrical Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.09 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. 1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER A. The General Contractor will furnish and install temporary light and power as specified in Division 1. 1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications,or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Electrical Contractor shall not scale the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Electrical Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-5 L&S 847 No we J. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. "" 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE so A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or am equal" appear in product specifications and as approved by the Architect and Owner. .. B. The Electrical Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 4M 1.06 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted other-wise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Under- writers Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Electrical Contractor shall submit .. to the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for ** review,making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-4 L&S 847 ■o MW C. The Electrical Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work result- ing from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the 40 Electrical Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Electrical Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the 00 work in question. D. The Electrical Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades Ila in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Electrical Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Electrical Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Electrical Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes,conduit, and 'OR cable runs shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor installing such items. G. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work w and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating 40 apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials W installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. Before submitting his bid, the Electrical Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since the Electrical Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-3 L&S 847 r. 9. Wiring devices and plates. 10. Power wiring to motors and equipment furnished by other trades or Owner including final connections. 11. Arrange for inspections and perform tests. 12. Guarantee and instructions. 13. Disconnect and remove existing electrical equipment made obsolete by new construction. All removed equipment shall be the property of the Owner and delivered to such places as designated by the Owner. 14. All existing electrical systems and equipment, which are to remain in operation, and which interfere with new construction shall be relocated and reconnected as required. 1.03 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Massachusetts Electrical Code, and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Electrical Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' ,.. instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ..R A. The Electrical Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Electrical Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Electrical Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-2 L&S 847 + ► SECTION 16100-ELECTRICAL 40 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 1, as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all electrical work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Branch Circuit Wiring and Conduit. 2. Feeders. 3. Panelboards. 4. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps. 5. Telephone/Data System. 6. Fire Alarm System Modifications. 7. Intrusion Detection System. 8. Emergency Call For Aid System. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 16100-1 L&S 847 �1 Lindgren&Sharpies,P.C.Consulting Engineers INDEX SECTION 16100-ELECTRICAL 40 PART 1-GENERAL PART 3-INSTALLATION 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK INSTALLATION 1.03 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3.02 GROUNDING 1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.03 CONDUIT&FITTINGS �w 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.04 LIGHTING FIX'T'URES 1.06 PRODUCTS 3.05 OUTLET JUNCTION BOXES 1.07 SUBMITTALS 3.06 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION �w 1.08 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS 3.07 TESTING 1.09 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER 1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1.14 WORK CONCEALED 1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTION 1.16 GUARANTEE 1.17 CUTTING&PATCHING 1.18 RECORD DRAWING 1.19 ALTERNATES eke PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAYS 2.02 MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLY 2.03 CONDUCTORS 2.04 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES 2.05 NAMEPLATES 2.06 WIRING DEVICES 2.07 LIGHTING FIXTURES 2.08 MOTOR STARTERS AND SWITCHES 2.09 SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT 2.10 PANELBOARDS 2.11 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 2.12 TELEPHONE/DAT SYSTEM 40 no BOOK STORAGE ELECTRICAL 16100 no Smith College Book Storage Facility �w DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL designated location to which the spare parts have been delivered. Delivery of parts shall be confirmed by the Owner's representative, who shall countersign the Certificate. END OF SECTION BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-59 L&S 847 so D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced so with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas. 3.10 IDENTIFICATION "' A. All piping, valves, controls and equipment on the project shall be identified as specified herein. All marks of identification shall be easily visible from the floor or "" usual point of vision. B. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal direction of OR flow. The letters shall be 1" high and the flow arrows shall be at least 6" long. The letters and flow arrows shall be made by precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can or snap-on, pre-printed plastic labels. Install identification in each room and additionally so that markers are not over 50 feet on center. C. Each valve, except runout valves, but including control valves, shall be tagged with a brass disc 1-1/2" in diameter. The disc shall contain a number, and a valve list shall be provided under glass in the Boiler Room showing the location of the valve, the service and the valve and any pertinent remarks regarding the operation of the valve. Securely fasten the discs to the valves with brass "S" hooks or chains. D. All panel mounted controls and instruments, and all equipment shall be identified by engraved nameplates mounted just under the control or instrument. The engraved nameplates shall be engraved on "Lamacoid", or approved equal plastic which will be black and show white letters when engraved. Letters shall be 1/2"high. E. No identification shall be done until all painting required under the Architectural section of these Specifications has been accomplished. 3.11 SPARE PARTS A. Filters: Each air handling unit, fan coil unit, and cabinet type unit heaters shall be provided with three (3) extra sets of filters for each unit. One (1) set shall be �** installed by this Contractor after substantial completion is issued and the two (2) remaining sets shall be delivered to the Owner. B. Fan Coil Unit Motors: This Contractor shall provide one (1) spare fan coil unit motor for each size installed on the project. Spare motors shall be delivered to the Owner. C. Fan Belts: This Contractor shall provide one (1) spare fan belt of each size furnished. D. Furnish a typewritten certificate confirming the above and stating the Owner BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-58 L&S 847 aeA contractor regularly engaged in that business. B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls nor on branches running through radiator covers. Longitudinal seams on jackets shall be located so that they are not visible from the floor. Remove all stickers from covering. C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed with butt strips. Insulation shall run through all hangers, sleeves, and have an 18 gauge sheet metal saddle equal to three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes over 2" in diameter shall be supported through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to the thickness of the insulation inside the vapor barrier jacket. on D. All fittings, valves, etc. shall be insulated with the proper factory pre-cut insulation. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edge adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked into fully insulated pipe go fitting. The one piece PVC fitting cover shall then be secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe covering. we 3.08 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its on manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the HVAC Contractor and be included in his bid. on 3.09 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP A. The entire Heating and Ventilating system shall be tested at completion of the building, and it shall be established that all controls are calibrated accurately and performing satisfactorily and that all units are heating and ventilating satisfactorily. * The systems shall be checked for vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected. B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and thoroughly cleaned including coils, plenums, under equipment and any and all other areas around or in equipment provided under this Section. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced with new filters during final clean-up. C. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked for "' painting damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. N. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-57 L&S 847 ON w before. 3.05 CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. All water circulating systems for the project shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in operation to rid the system of dirt, piping compound, mill scale, oil, and any and all other material foreign to the water being circulated. Clean all strainers. B. Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent all dirt and other foreign matter from entering the pipe or other parts of the system. Pipe stored on the project shall have the open ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before erection, each piece of pipe, fitting, or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed. .. C. After system is complete, the Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall add trisodium phosphate in an aqueous solution to the system at the proportion of one pound per fifty gallons of water in the system. After the system is filled with this solution, the system shall be brought up to temperature and allowed to circulate for two hours. The system shall then be drained completely and refilled with fresh water. The Engineer shall be given notice of this cleaning operation and he or his representative shall be present to observe the cleaning operation, and, if he deems it necessary, the cleaning operation shall be repeated. D. After the system has been completely cleaned as specified herein, it shall be tested by litmus paper or other dependable method and shall be left on the slightly alkaline side (ph= 7.5 plus or minus). If the system is found to be still on the acid side, the cleaning by the use of trisodium phosphate shall be repeated. E. The HVAC Contractor shall not add any water treatment chemicals, or at any time "stop-leak" compounds to the system. .. 3.06 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS A. After completion of the installation of the heating, ventilating, and exhaust systems, and prior to acceptance by the Owner, all systems and appurtenances applicable to the above systems shall be adjusted and balanced to deliver the water and air quantities as specified, indicated on the Drawings, or as directed. B. Balancing shall be performed by an independent contractor hired directly by the Owner. 3.07 INSULATION A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an independent insulation BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-56 L&S 847 w as MR G. Vent all high points and drain all low points throughout the system. H. Connections and tie-ins to existing piping systems shall be coordinated with the so Owner. The HVAC Contractor is responsible for draining, flushing, re-filling (adding glycol if required) and air removal of the existing system. System shall be fully restored and operational. 3.04 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS A. All piping installed on the project, unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be hydraulically tested as specified herein. The HVAC Contractor shall provide all equipment required to make the tests specified herein. Piping may be tested a section at a time in order to facilitate the construction. 'o B. The HVAC Contractor shall fill the section of pipe to be tested with water and bring the section up to pressure with a test pump. These tests shall be conducted before �. any insulation is installed and any insulation installed prior to these tests shall be removed. Gauges used in the tests shall have been recently calibrated with a dead weight tester. C. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90% of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping. D. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening,repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. E. After system has been determined to be leak-free, the Engineer shall be notified and !! the test shall be repeated in his or his representative's presence. F. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they shall be removed during the tests to prevent shock damage. This does not apply to control valves. G. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic or other temporary means. All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the valve, fitting,joint, or section that is leaking and reinstalling new material with joints as specified herein BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-55 L&S 847 NM pipes where sleeves and inserts were not installed, or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment shall be performed by the General Contractor. C. As the work nears completion, all pipe cutting and threading, etc. shall be done in a location approved by the Engineer. D. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain as finished or be painted later. Should use of such an area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor shall cover the working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. .. 3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION OR A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and shall be firmly supported throughout. Provision for expansion and contraction shall be made with offsets or expansion loops. All pipe shall be cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies,reamed and burrs removed. B. Where screwed fittings are used, bushings shall not be used from branch connections or reducers. Connections to equipment shall be full size of tappings. Reductions in the run of pipe shall be made with eccentric or concentric reducers as required for draining and venting. ., C. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in furred spaces, shafts, chases, or above hung ceilings. + D. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms, vertical pipe shafts, above hung ceilings, and elsewhere throughout all floors to maintain maximum headroom and clearances for access to other equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits, lighting fixtures, other piping, ducts, and equipment of other trades. * E. Connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit future replacement, removal and servicing of equipment. Flexible connections where required to isolate movement of equipment from piping system or of piping system from equipment, shall be as specified. F. Before any part of the various piping systems is placed in operation,blow out piping with compressed air and/or water to remove all chips and scale and flush and drain until all traces of dirt, scale and other foreign matter have disappeared. Refer to other sections for additional requirements. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-54 L&S 847 OR so an an 5. Control and management systems shall neither be considered complete nor acceptable until all conditions of the Sequence of Operation have been at- """ tained, all temperatures are maintained within specified limits of all operating conditions, and all systems damper leakage of controlled within specified limits. J. Service and Guarantee: 1. The complete installation, including all equipment, shall be guaranteed free from defects in workmanship and material for a period of 12 months from date of acceptance in writing by the Owner. Provide at no cost to the Owner, all necessary service, adjusting, and checking during the 12 month guarantee period. 2. During warranty period, the ATC Contractor shall update and implement all latest revisions of software offered by the Contractor that applies to this ..s Project. PART 3 -INSTALLATION 3.01 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM A. No air handling units shall be run for temporary heating, ventilating, testing, or otherwise without filters in place and permission from the Owner. B. Upon completion of construction and before testing, the interior of all air handling units and plenums shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all construction dirt, dust, etc. before the units are turned on, and clean filters shall be installed. 3.02 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING A. Drilling of all holes 2" diameter and smaller required for the installation of heating and ventilating piping and equipment shall be performed by the HVAC Contractor. Cutting and patching shall be performed by the General Contractor in accordance with the General Conditions. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Location for chases, openings, etc. shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other Divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor,who shall make the corrections as his own expense. "■ B. Work shall include furnishing and locating inserts required before the floors and walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for BOOK STORAGE FACILITY ! 15600-53 L&S 847 6. Campus Chilled Water a. Chilled water availability shall be subject to a 2-way electric activated isolation valve located in the mechanical room. The valve shall be controlled from the central site. I. Adjustment and Calibration: "1A 1. On completion of the job, the ATC Contractor shall completely calibrate, test, and adjust, ready for use, all electronic controls, thermostats, valves, damper motors, and relays provided under his contract and be present for functional tests on systems. The Building Management System shall be completely checked,test run, and adjusted. 2. Before the Engineer is asked to witness the functional tests, the entire control and management system must be complete, controls calibrated. The .� controlled devices will be physically inspected and checked to assure that these terminal devices are, in fact, under proper control and working smoothly over their entire range of operation. 3. The adjustment procedure shall include the following steps: a. Preliminary set up and calibration per Specifications and Shop Drawings. b. Physical checkout of all components for completeness and accuracy, simultaneously with mechanical system balancing. C. Review of system with Engineer. d. Functional test for Owner's benefit,instruction, and acceptance. e. Not less than 30 or more than 60 days after systems have been in full operation, review problems with Owner, recheck all adjustments, and recalibrate as required. 4. The Control Manufacturer shall provide a complete instructional manual covering the function and operation of all control and management system components on the job,which shall include a trouble-shooting and operating procedure. This manual shall be furnished to the Owner's operating personnel and shall show the total integrated control system. Competent technicians shall be provided for instruction purposes. The Control Manu- facturer shall furnish schematic systems control diagrams to be delivered to the Owner on AutoCAD disks. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-52 US 847 w am g! air handling units and fan coil units. (5) The hot/chilled water pump P-1 (P-2 spare) shall be energized. 4. Cooling to Heating a. The steam valve shall be placed under automatic control and open. b. Start hot water loop pumps. C. De-activate one main circulator pump with most run time to automatic standby basis. d. Hot water pumps P-3 (P-4 spare) shall be energized. 5. Fan Coil Control: a. Winter Occupied Cycle: (1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate the coil valve in a direct acting fashion to maintain heating requirement for room. Fan shall be under control of three speed manual switch furnished on the fan coil unit. b. Winter Unoccupied Cycle: (1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate the coil valve in a direct acting fashion to maintain lowered set point of room. Fan shall be de-energized. c. Summer Occupied Cycle: (1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate the coil valve in a reverse acting fashion to add chilled water on a rise in space demand. Fan shall be under control of three speed manual switch furnished on the fan coil unit. d. Summer Unoccupied Cycle: (1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate the coil valve in a reverse acting fashion, however, no chiller water will be available. Fan shall be de-activated. Should room temperature exceed 80 degrees. The coil valve shall open in the fan run. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-51 L&S 847 C. Occupied Pump Control: The temperature control system shall control pumps in the following manner. (1) In the occupied mode, only one(1)pump shall run unless the energy management system decides both pumps are necessary in order to maintain temperature. (2) Only one (1) pump shall run during the heating cycle for all hot water/chilled water systems. �. d. Unoccupied Pump Control: (1) The hot water and hot water/chilled water pumps shall remain off(both pumps) when outside temperature is above 58 degrees. When outside temperature falls below 58 degrees, one pump shall cycle on/off subject to the night sensor. When outside temperature falls below 40 degrees, one pump shall run continuously and the second pump shall cycle subject to the night sensor. In the cooling mode, one pump shall cycle on/off to maintain higher setting. 3. Control System Changeover: a. Provide and install all the materials and devices necessary to �. accomplish the following automatic changeover from heating to cooling for the dual water systems. (1) Heating to Cooling: (a) A heat/cool key, located at the console when activated to the cooling mode shall change all AHU controls tot he cooling mode of operation. (2) The steam control valve to heat exchanger HX-1 shall be turned off and valves shall close. (3) A temperature sensor located in the system water return line shall indicate return water temperature at console and if tem- perature is above 90 degrees a heat dissipation sequence shall open the motorized valves at all air handling units and fan coil units. (4) When the return water temperature is less than 90 degrees the heat dissipation loop shall be de-energized, the valves for all BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-50 L&S 847 we MW .�w d. For systems AHU-1 and AHU-2, a space humidity sensor set between 35% and 50% relative humidity shall energize ventilation cycle of outdoor damper and exhaust fan to introduce 100% outdoor air and exhaust high humidity air. Increased space heating load as sensed by space temperature sensor shall automatically reset zone discharge temperature through microprocessor controller to open heating coil valve, and open steam valve on steam injection humidifier. Space humidity requirements shall be maintained as described above. Injection humidifiers shall be interlocked with an airflow-proving switch and high limit discharge sensor. e. Occupied Cycle(Summer Mode) Fans shall run continuously with outdoor air and exhaust air dampers open to minimum position. Percentage of outdoor air shall be displayed set and adjusted at console. Room temperature sensors shall automatically reset discharge temperature to control the coil valve through microprocessor controller to satisfy occupied cycle summer mode setpoints. 2. Pump Control a. The building shall be divided into two zone areas for heat/cool distribution and one zone for heating only. b. Heat/Cool distribution shall be supplied by pumps P-1 and P-2 (one spare). Heating only distribution shall be supplied by pumps P-3 and P-4 (one spare). C. The steam to water heat exchanger shall be controlled as follows: (1) (HX-1)Sensors located in the water supply and water return shall have its set point automatically and inversely reset from outdoor temperature by modulating each steam control valve to maintain the following schedule: Hot Water/Chilled Water: 0 degrees= 160 degrees HCS 65 degrees= 90 degrees HCS (2) (HX-2)Sensors located in the hot water supply and hot water return shall modulate the steam control valve to maintain 180° leaving water temperature. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 1560049 L&S 847 1 remain off during the warm-up cycle with the return air exhaust damper closed. The outside air damper shall remain closed, the coil face and bypass dampers shall operate in 'occupied" mode, and the exhaust fan shall remain off. The unit shall remain in the warm-up ' cycle until the return air temperature reaches 68T at which time it shall revert to the occupied cycle. b. Occupied Cycle(Winter Mode): Supply and return fans shall run continuously with outdoor air and exhaust air dampers open to minimum position. Room sensor shall automatically reset discharge setpoint to control heating coil valve through microprocessor controller. Where face and bypass dampers are called for, the integrated controls shall be as follows: above 40 degrees F., the face and bypass dampers are wide open and the valve shall modulate; below 40 degrees F., the valve shall be wide open and the face and bypass dampers shall modulate. Note: Apply PID control to these sequences to provide closer control when spaces go through rapid occupancy changes. As space is demanded for heating drops, the coil valve shall be modulated closed to finally a closed position. When space demands for ventilation increases, the outdoor and exhaust dampers shall be modulated open past the minimum percentage and the return damper shall close correspondingly. The low temperature sensor shall open the face damper full to the coil and close the outside air damper if it senses a temperature below its set point. A duct type smoke detector (furnished by the Electrical Subcontractor)located downstream of the unit filters shall shut down the unit fans on sensing smoke. System AHU-1, through its microprocessor, shall energize the roof mounted condensing unit (CU-1)to provide Dx cooling when chilled water is not available. A duct mounted hot water reheat coil shall be used for the dehumidification cycle. The heating coil valve shall modulate to the discharge air setpoint. C. Unoccupied Cycle: The AHU-2 system shall remain off, except that space sensor shall cycle unit fans with outside air damper closed, and shall cycle zone hot water pump to maintain reduced temperature. AHU-1 and its respective fan shall run continuously as described in the occupied cycle. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 1560048 US 847 ew Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a range of colors which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective setpoints. The colors shall be updated dynamically as zones' comfort condition change. Locations of space sensors shall also be shown for each zone. Setpoint adjustment and color band displays shall be provided. Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. It shall also provide a current status of all 1/0 points being controlled and applicable to each piece of equipment including analog read- outs in appropriate engineering units at appropriate locations on the graphic representation. 2. Each category of software shall consist of interactive software modules. Each module shall have an associated priority level and shall execute as determined by the program controller as defined in the real time operating system. 3. The central site shall allow receipt of alarms and messages while in a functional mode other than energy management, i.e., incoming alarms shall be displayed while the operator is in a word processing, spreadsheet, or other operating mode. The system must automatically switch from a non-energy management mode, respond to an alarm, and return to the exact position left in the previous functional mode. 4. The building operator shall be able to communicate and direct all control functions through the use of a 2-button "mouse" operator interface to monitor and control all functions and sequences within the system. H. Sequences of Operation: Following are the typical sequences of operation for HVAC equipment provided by Automated Logic's System 20/20. Within each section, each paragraph describes a specific control sequence for a component of the equipment; start/stop, status, etc. Each specific control sequence will require appropriate 1/0 points, which are scheduled on the Drawings. 1. Air Handling Units: The systems shall be indexed between occupied, warm- up, and unoccupied cycles of operation by the Energy Management System. a. Warm-up Cycle: The unit supply fan shall be started from the time clock and shall run continuously. Units AHU-1 (Book Storage) and AHU-2 (Office )shall run continuously. The return air fans shall BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 1560047 L&S 847 k. Control valves shall be DDC modulating type. All two-way valves shall be Spartan two position valves. All three-way valves shall be Barber Colman with Belimo Actuators, Model AF24-S. 1. All control dampers shall be opposed blade type with edge and jam seals and internal linkage. Damper operators shall be provided for all dampers equal to Belimo AF24-S with AV10-18 or 2G-JSA shaft extensions where required. 5. Local Site Communication Network a. The modules shall communicate within their respective network with a token passing technique. This network shall be consistent with the IEEE RS-485 standard, including a minimum baud rate of 9,600 BPS maintained at a minimum of 10,000 feet. The Contractor shall provide all wiring required for the local site network. F. Software 1. The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the functions required by this specification. Software shall be modular in design for flexibility in expansion or revision of the system. The software shall, as a minimum, include: a. Complete database entry b. Configuration of all application programs to provide the sequence of operation indicated C. Graphics of each system as shown on the 1/0 Summary Tables d. Alarm limits and alarm messages for all critical and non-critical alarms W e. Configuration of all reports and point summaries indicated do G. Systems Software 1. The central site shall display graphically, in up to 256 different colors, the following system information: General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local landmarks. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-46 US 847 .n� .nr over the operating flow range. Switches shall have snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the specific electrical application. 00 d. Watt-hour Transducers: Watt-hour transducers shall have an accuracy of+0.25% for kW and kWh outputs from full lag to full lead power factor. Input ranges for kW and kWh transducers shall be selectable without requiring the changing of current or potential transformers, and shall have dry contact pulse accumulation. e. Voltage-to-Digital Alarm Relays: Relays shall monitor status of boiler or chiller safeties and overloads and shall be sized and connected so as not to impede the function of the monitored contacts. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application, equal to Veris Industries, Inc. Hawkeye 735. £ Humidity Sensors: Sensors shall have an accuracy of+5% over a range of 20%to 95%RE, Visala Mod. HMW-40U. g. Current Sensing Relays: Relays shall monitor status of motor loads. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application. The setpoint of the contact operation shall be field adjustable. h. Control Relays: Control relay contacts shall be rated for 150% of the loading application, with self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts, enclosed in dustproof enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium contacts with a minimum life span rating of one million operations. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices. i. Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than 10 billion ohms with a breakdown voltage of 15 V root mean square, or greater, at 60 Hz. The contact operating life shall be 10 million operations or greater. The ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be 20°F-140°F. Input impedance shall be greater than 500 ohms. Relays shall be rated for the application. Operating and release time shall be 10 milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall be provided as an integral part of the relays. j. Freezestat shall be capillary type equal to Johnson Control, Model OR A70HA-1 C. P• BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-45 L&S 847 shall permit accuracy rating of within I%of the temperature range of their intended use. 1) Sensors used for mixed air application shall be the averaging " type and have an accuracy of +1°F. Kele Precon Model ST-FZ. 2) OA temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of -52°F to 152°F and an accuracy of within +1°F in this temperature range. Kele Precon Model ST-O. 3) Room temperature sensors shall have an accuracy, of + 0.25°F in the range of 45°F to 96°F, ALC Model BA-1 OK-2- RSO-RLC Type 3 with network connector, warm/cool adjustment, override switch and LED Occupied/Unoccupied indicator. 4) Chilled water sensors shall have an accuracy of+0.25°F in their range of application. 5) Hot water temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of+ ••• 0.75°F over the range of their application. b. Pressure Instruments 1) Differential Pressure and Pressure Sensors. Sensors shall have a 4-20 MA output proportional signal with provisions ' for field checking. Sensors shall withstand up to 150% of rated pressure, without damaging the device. Accuracy shall be within +2% of full scale. Sensors shall be manufactured by MANIAC No. PR-272-2-XX-B-1-2-2. 2) Pressure Switches. Pressure switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of+2%of range and withstand up to 150% of rated pressure. Sensors shall be diaphragm or bourdon tube design. Switch operation shall be adjustable over the operating pressure range. The switch shall have an application rated Form C, snap-acting, self-wiping contact of platinum alloy, silver alloy, or gold plating. Switches shall " be manufactured by Johnson Controls, Model P-74FA-5-C. C. Flow Switches: Flow switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of+ 1% of their operating ra.pge. Switch actuation shall be adjustable BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-44 L&S 847 w k temperature until communication with the TNI is restored. d. Each TNI shall execute application programs, calculations, and commands via a microcomputer resident in the TNI. The database and all application programs for each T-Line shall be stored in read/writable non-volatile memory within the TNI. All non-volatile ` memory shall have a battery backup of at least five years. e. The TNI shall contain both software and hardware to perform full DDC/PID control loops. T-Line shall be able to provide normal binary type output. f. Each T-Line shall be able to support various type of zone temperature sensors, such as: temperature sensor only, temperature sensor with built-in local override switch, with setpoint adjustment switch. g. Each T-Line for VAV application shall have a built-in air flow transducer for accurate air flow measurement in order to provide the Pressure Independent VAV operation. h. Each T-Line and TNI shall have LED indication for visual status of communication,power, and all outputs. i. Each TNI shall be software programmable for communicating at 9600 baud to 38.4 Kbps. Circuits shall be optically isolated. 3. Terminal Control Devices-T-Line a. Digital outputs: These outputs shall be 24VAC or VDC maximum, 3 amp maximum current. Each configurable as normally open or normally closed, and either dry contact or bussed. b. Universal inputs: Thermistor, dry contacts or 0-5VDC with 0-100K Ohm input impedance. C. Enhanced Zone Sensor Input: The input shall provide one thermistor input, one local setpoint adjustment, one timed local override switch and an occupancy LED indicator. 4. Instrumentation and Control a. Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy ratings as indicated and/or required for the application and BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-43 L&S 847 authority. C. Each LANgate shall support a Cmnet on which may reside any combination of up to 100 zone controllers, rooftop unit controllers, and/or Control Modules. d. The LANgate shall be responsible for routing global information from the various Cmnets which may be installed throughout a building. e. The Lgnet may configure as RS485 (38.4 Kbps), ARCnet (2.5 w Mbps),or Ethernet(10 Mbps), or Token Ring(16Mbps) all of which may be implemented over fiber optic, twisted pair,or coaxial cable. f. Each Cmnet shall support up to 100 controllers. g. Multiple LANgates can be added to the Lgnet if the projects require more than 100 controllers. h. Up to a total of 60 LANgates can be added to the Lgnet, each supporting up to 100 controllers (total capacity exceeds 500,000 points per Lgnet). i. The LANgate shall provide two RS232 ports which can be connected to Central Site Workstations, portable computers, or .�. modems. j. LANgate shall provide full arbitration between multiple users, whether they are communicating through the same LANgate or different ones. 2. Terminal Control Modules-T-Line a. Terminal Control Modules shall be capable of providing the Direct ' Digital Control of single zone terminal HVAC units; air handling units, fan coil units, exhaust fans,unit ventilators, etc. b. Each T-Line controller shall communicate with the Cmnet through the Tnet Interface Module(TNI). The TNI shall provide one RS485 port for a Cmnet connection and one RS485 port for the Tnet connection. In addition, a direct connect RS485 port shall also be provided for connection of a laptop computer. C. In the event of a loss of communication with the TNI, each T-Line controller shall store a default algorithm which maintains the space BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 1560042 L&S 847 w ! 3. All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field wiring from terminal strips to field mounted devices. 4. All wiring to the "Auto" side of hand-off auto switches on units being controlled by the ATC Contractor. 5. Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in temperature control panels. 6. All wiring to the temperature control panels shall be by the ATC subcontractor from sources provided by the Electrical Contractor specifically for that purpose. 7. All wiring shall comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. All 40 power wiring will be installed and terminated by the Electrical Contractor. Power wiring shall be defined as follows: 00 a. Wiring of all devices and circuits carrying voltages greater than 120 volt(except for power to the temperature control panels). 0 b. Wiring of power feeds to disconnects, starters, and electric motors. C. Wiring of 120V AC power feeds to all temperature control panels where required. d. Installation of and wiring of line power to fused disconnects for each air compressor. e. Power wiring to 120V single phase motors. f. Wiring from disconnects to compressor motor starters and from compressor motor starters to compressor motor. E. Field Hardware: Field hardware must be of a modular design to ensure reliability and system performance. 1. Global Network Controller- LANgate a. The LANgate shall be a microprocessor-based communications device which acts as a gateway between the System Control Module Network(CMnet) and the Global Network(Lgnet). b. Both the Cmnet and the Lgnet shall be "peer-to-peer" networks which allow all control modules to communicate with equal MW BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-41 L&S 847 3. All Drawings shall be reviewed after the final system checkout and updated or corrected to provide "as-built" Drawings to show exact installation. The system will not be considered complete until the "as-built" Drawings have received their final approval. The Contractor shall deliver three (3) sets of "as-built" Drawings, and one(1) CADD disk of these Drawings. 4. Before final configuration, the Contractor shall provide 1/0 Summary forms that include: a. Description of all points. b. Listing of binary and analog hardware required to interface to the equipment for each function. C. Listing of all application programs associated with each piece of equipment. d. Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case of failure 5. Provide an accurate graphic flow diagram for each software program proposed to be used on the project as part of the submittal process. Revisions made as a result of the submittal process, during the installation, start-up or acceptance portion of the project, shall be accurately reflected in „ the "as-built" graphic software flow diagrams herein required by this specification. 6. The Contractor shall be able to simulate the operation of all software application programs to ensure they are free from design errors and that they accurately accomplish the application sequence of operations. The simulation must show each output value and how it varies in relation to an artificial time clock. The time clock may run at normal time increments, increased increments (fast motion) or decreased increments (slow motion). D. Wiring: All temperature control wiring will be installed and terminated by the ATC Contractor. Control wiring shall be as follows: 1. All circuits which are activated or deactivated by temperature control system components, such as, but not limited to, PE's and high and low limit protec- tive devices. 2. All circuits which activate or deactivate temperature control system components, such as solenoid air valve. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 1560040 L&S 847 cur d. All monitoring and control wiring and air tubing. e. All modems and accessories. 7. Provide all software identified in Part 3 of this Specification. The database required for implementation of these specification shall be provided by the Contractor, including: point descriptor, alarm limits, calibration variables, graphics,reports and point summaries. 8. The system as specified shall monitor, control, and calculate all of the points and perform all the function as listed in 1/0 Summary Tables attached to the end of this specification. 9. Codes and Regulations. All electrical equipment and material and its installation shall conform to the current requirements of the following authorities: a. Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA) b. National Electric Code(NEC) C. National Fire Code d. Uniform Building Code e. Uniform Mechanical Code f. Uniform Plumbing Code g. UL916 h. Note: Where two or more codes conflict, the most restrictive shall apply. Nothing in these plans and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to applicable codes. C. Submittals, Documentation and Acceptance 1. Shop Drawings. A minimum of six (6) copies of Shop Drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Shop Drawings shall also contain complete wiring, routing, schematic diagrams, tag number of devices, software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system will function properly. Drawings shall show proposed layout and 00 installation of all equipment and the relationship to other parts of the work. 2. Shop Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer and the College before 40 any equipment is installed. Therefore, Shop Drawings must be submitted in time for review so that all installations can be completed per the project's completion schedule. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-39 L&S 847 NM ON 6. All wiring, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, etc., necessary for the temperature control system shall be furnished and installed by the ATC Contractor and shall conform to all standards and codes as described under "' Section 16000 - Electrical Work. Wiring shall be in metal raceways where required by prevailing codes. oft 7. Provide nameplates for all control devices. Devices on panels to have "Lamicoid" nameplates, isolated control valves, relays, etc. to be marked with stamped tape. "'4 B. Scope of Work an 1. All temperature control work shall be performed by Yankee Technology, Inc. of Ludlow, MA. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to co-ordinate ON all HVAC work with the Temperature Control Contractor prior to submit- ting a bid. 2. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary hardware, wiring, pneumatic tubing, computing equipment and software as defined in this specification. .w 3. All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured and available and not custom designed especially for this pro- ject. All systems and components, except site specific software, shall have previously been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use prior to installa- tion on this project. d, 4. The system architecture shall be fully modular permitting expansion of application software, system peripherals, and field hardware. 5. The system, upon completion of the installation and prior to acceptance of the project, shall perform all operating functions as detailed in this Specifi- cation. 6. Provide the following system hardware: * a. Central Site(s) and Control Modules b. All sensing devices and necessary transducers to perform the functions listed in 1/0 Summary Tables. C. All relays, switches, indicating devices, and transducers required to perform the functions listed in 1/0 Summary Tables. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-38 US 847 ow 00 G. Condensing unit shall be Trane Model TTA site as indicated on the Contract Drawings. H. Furnish and install a refrigerant piping system sized as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.29 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. General Requirements I. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic. 2. The controls shall be a direct expansion of the Campus' existing energy management system as manufactured by automated Logic System 20/20, and shall be extended from the existing communication lines located in The Physical Plant. It is mandatory that the installed system be properly inter- faced with the existing central site (CS) computer hardware ALC 20/20 configuration and the existing master central site software library, located at the HVAC Department Building. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to develop site specific operating parameters, building name, general area maps, floor plans, mechanical system graphics, thermal graphs, all to be displayed graphically at the central site (CS) via the existing software programs. 3. All components of the direct digital controllers shall be manufactured by Automated Logic, or equal,with peripheral electric/electronic devices manu- factured by Barber Colman. 4. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic, i.e. Yankee Technology, Inc., of Ludlow, MA. The system shall be a properly integrated system installed by competent mechanics regularly employed in the profession of temperature control. Unless specified to the contrary, all equipment shall be fully proportioning. The control system 00 shall be complete in all respects, including room thermostats, immersion thermostats, switches, relays, valves, cabinets and other accessory equip- ment, and a complete system of control wiring for integration into existing remaining reused controls where specified, all connected and properly integrated to the control system. 5. The temperature control system shall be DDC and shall utilize electric/electronic power for the control dampers and valves. The control systems Lans connection shall be extended from the existing system. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-37 L&S 847 allowed. 2.27 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish and install access panels at all valves, volume dampers, tee. installed above plastered ceilings, in walls, and all other non-accessible spaces. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12" x 12"); access panels in walls shall be Karp type DSC-211 "Universal" (12" x 12"). 2.28 CONDENSING UNIT A. The air cooled condensing unit shall have all operating components assembled on one common base. These shall include: compressor, condenser coil, condenser fan and motor, charging valves, moisture indicating sight glass, back seating refrigerant valves, hot gas muffler, all controls, and a holding charge of R-22. The units shall be designed for outdoor installation. The unit as a whole shall be listed with an EER of not less than 10.0. B. Casing shall be of 18 gage zinc coated steel with all exterior surfaces painted with enamel for weather protection. Drain holes shall be provided for elimination of rain. Provide removable panels for access to components. C. Condenser Fan shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings, direct drive and driven by permanently lubricated ball bearing heavy-duty motors with built-in thermal overload protection. D. Condenser Coil shall have copper tubing with heavy-duty aluminum fins. The coil shall be factory tested at 425 psi and dehydrated. A factory or field installed sub- cooling circuit shall be provided to sub-cool refrigerant a minimum of 20°F below saturation temperatures. , E. Compressors shall have two (2) separate and independent hermetic compressors designed for R-22 operation. Compressors shall be mounted on vibration isolators and have forced feed lubrication, hot gas muffler in the discharge line, and immersion type crankcase heaters. The compressors shall have also spring loaded valve heads for protection against liquid "slugging" and automatic oil pressure actuated internal cylinder un-loaders. Un-loaders shall be arranged for unloaded start and shall allow unloading down to 33% capacity. Compressors shall be enclosed in a sound attenuating compartment. O F. Controls shall consist of an interface panel in the main unit control box and a remote mounted control ox to be field installed. The remote mounted control box consists am of a Honeywell Model W7100G controller. Unit controller to have built-in fixed- off timers and chiller freeze protection. no BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-36 US 847 the inlet side of each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. Strainers 2" and smaller shall have screwed ends; 2-1/2" and larger shall have flanged ends. B. Strainers for steam and condensate systems over 50 psig. shall be 250 lb. class. Strainers for other systems shall be 125 lb. class. Strainers shall be Illinois, Barnes and Jones, Armstrong, or equal, and shall be so installed as to permit ready removal of basket. Each strainer 2-1/2" and larger shall be provided with hose end globe valve on blow-off. 2.26 FAN COIL UNITS A. General: Unit shall include chassis, coil, fan board, fan wheel(s), housing(s), motor, and insulation. Chassis shall be galvanized steel wrap-around structural frame with all edges flanged. Insulation shall be faced,heavy density glass fiber. B. Water Coils: Water coils shall be 5/8 in. O.D. seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to configurated aluminum fins with continuous fin collars and sleeved coil end supports. Maximum working pressure 300 psig, factory burst test 450 psig (air), and leak test 300 psig(air under water). Maximum entering water temperature 275 degrees F. Supply and return connections on side of units as designated on the Contract Drawings. C. Fans: Fan wheels centrifugal, forward-curved, double width of non-corrosive, molded, fiberglass-reinforced thermo-plastic material on all units. Fan houses of formed sheet metal. All units shall be complete with three speed fan switch tappings for multi-speed control from a central processor. D. Motors: All motors shall have integral thermal overload protection and start at 78 percent of rated voltage. Motors operate satisfactorily at 90 percent of rated voltage on all speed settings and at 10 percent over voltage without undue magnetic noise. Temperature rise by winding resistance method does not exceed 50 C. (PSC motors) + on high speed. All motors factory run tested assembled in unit prior to shipping. All motors shall be complete with motor cords, which are quickly detachable at junction box by locking prong connector. E. Filters: Filters shall be removable from cabinet without removing front panel; filters shall be 1" throw away type. Two extra sets of filters shall be provided for each unit. F. Electrical Performance: All cataloged model wires in accordance with National Electric Code and UL listed. G. Fan coil unit shall be Trane, McQuay or International. No substitutions will be #; BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-35 L&S 847 ■o as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with SFA-5.8, Section 11, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials. 20. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for steel flanges,unless otherwise indicated. 21. Note: Grooved piping will NOT be allowed. 2.24 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Provide packless expansion joints where indicated for piping systems, with materials and pressure/temperature ratings selected by Installer to suit intended ` service. Select packless expansion joints to provide 200% absorption capacity of piping expansion between anchors. B. Expansion Compensators: Pressure rated for 60 psi for low pressure systems, 2-ply phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds and end fittings for copper piping systems, or 2-ply stainless steel bellows, carbon steel shrouds and end fittings for steel piping systems. Provide internal guides and anti-torque devices, and removable end clip for proper positioning. C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide expansion compensators of one of the following: , Flexonics Div.; UOP, Inc. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. Keflex, Inc. Metraflex Co. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc. D. Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated. Construct with 4-finger spider traveling inside guiding sleeve, with provision for anchoring to building substrate. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe " alignment guides of the following: Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. Metraflex Co. 2.25 STRAINERS A. Pipeline strainers shall be full size, iron body, "Y" pattern and shall be installed on BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-34 L&S 847 w 40 b. End Connections: Buttwelding C. Facings: Raised-face W 5. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B 16.9, except ANSI B 16.28 for short-radius elbows and returns;rated to match connected pipe. 6. Yoloy Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ASTM A714. 7. Forged Branch Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide 00 type as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, Bonney"Weldolets" or"Threadolets",or equal. 8. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2" and where pipe size is less than 1-1/2", and do not thread nipples full length(no close-nipples). 9. Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type as indicated for each service; hard-drawn temper for water piping; soft temper for oil piping. 10. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306. 11. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B280. 12. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B 16.22. 13. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23. 14. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B 16.29. 15. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43. 16. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI B 16.15. 17. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation require- ments. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials. 18. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation require- """ ments. 19. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-33 L&S 847 w 2. All piping shall have manufacturer's name or trademark rolled into each and every length of pipe. 3. All threads for screwed joints shall be National Taper Pipe Thread conforming to ANSI B2.1-1968. 4. Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work. B. Application 1. Hot and Dual Temperature Water Supply and Return and Steam Supply and Condensate Return: Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, size 2" and smaller threaded, 2-1/2" and larger welded, or Type "L" copper for hot and dual temperature water. 2. Boiler Trim: Brass Pipe, Schedule 40,threaded, cast bronze fittings. 3. Refrigerant: Type ACR copper, wrought copper fittings, AWS class BAgl silver solder. 4. Condensate Drain (from cooling coils): Type M or DWV copper tube with cast or wrought drainage fittings in lieu of copper PVC drains may be used in fan room equipment and connection to existing lines. C. Materials 1. Black Steel Pipe : ASTM A53, A106 or A120; except comply with ASTM A53 or A106 where close coiling or bending is required. 2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B 16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated. Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80. 3. Yoloy Steel Pipe: ASTM A714; Class 4; Grade IV. 4. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the following material group, end connection and facing except as otherwise indicated, Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80. a. Material Group: Group 1.1 BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-32 US 847 on w a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1 in. b. Mains and Branches 1 in. and less: 1 in. C. Mains and Branches 1-1/4 in. to 2 in.: 1-1/2 in. 2. Hot Water/Chilled Water: 00 a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1-1/2 in. b. Runouts 1 in. and less: 1-1/2 in. C. Runouts 1-1/4 in. to 2 in.: 2 in. d. Runouts 2-1/2 in. to 4 in.: 2 in. 3. Condensate Drains: a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 3/4 in. b. Runouts I in. and less: 3/4 in. C. Runouts 1-1/4 in. to 2 in.: 1 in. d. Runouts 2-1/2 in. to 4 in.: 1 in. 4. Equipment: a. Hot/Chilled water pumps and chilled barrel: 3/4 in. armaflex. b. Hot/Chilled water expansion tanks: 3/4 in. armaflex. C. Air separator: 3/4 in. armaflex. 2.23 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General 1. Reference is made to specifications of recognized authorities to establish quality. Latest editions of their publications at time of bidding shall be in force. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-31 L&S 847 not exceeding 50, all complying with NFPA 225 and/or U.L. 723. Adhesives used for applying and sealing jackets shall also conform to these same fire retardant and smoke ratings. 2. On exposed insulation, all longitudinal seams shall be kept at the top of the pipe and circumferential joints shall be kept to a minimum. Raw ends of insulation shall be concealed by neatly folding in the ends of the jackets. Fittings, valve bodies, and flanges shall be furnished with the same jacket materials used on adjoining insulation. 3. Covering shall not be applied until all parts of the work have been tested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. 4. A vapor barrier shall be installed on all new hot water/chilled water piping. It shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to maintain the integrity of the vapor barrier. .� 5. Attention is called for to the fact that on all hot water/chilled water, refrigerant, and condensate drain piping, oversized pipe hangers shall be fur- nished and pipe insulation shall be applied continuous along the pipe passing inside the hanger. 6. Pipe insulation shall be closed cell Armaflex insulation as manufactured by Gustin-Bacon,Manville, or other approved equal. 7. All hot water, chilled water, condensate drains, refrigerant piping, and make up water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex, closed cell pipe insulation, ,. or approved equal. The insulation shall have an average thermal conductivi- ty not to exceed .25 BTU in. per sq. ft. per F. per hour at a mean temperature of 75 degrees F. Thickness of the insulation shall be as scheduled below. The insulation shall be applied over clean dry pipe with all joints firmly together. Longitudinal jacket laps and the butt strips shall be smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. Note: All refrigerant piping run outdoors shall be covered with an aluminum jacket and secured with stainless steel bands. 8. Insulation of all steam and condensate piping shall be fiberglass with jacketed cover,thickness to be as listed below. am G. Insulation thickness shall be as follows: Minimum Pipe Insulation Required: MW 1. Refrigerant Piping: +. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-30 L&S 847 .o Im or plastic coated. E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within 1' of each horizontal elbow. Vertical A* runs of pipe not over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. 40 F. Install Figure 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation on all piping; hangers to be installed outside pipe insulation. as G. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT-121C plastic coated riser clamp; to be installed immediately below a coupling: 2.22 INSULATION A. All air supply,return, and fresh air ducts shall be insulated. Insulation for concealed ducts shall be 1-1/2 in. thick, 1-pound density glass fiber (flexible) duct insulation with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket equal to Manville Type FSK. Oft Secure to duct with Benjamin Foster No. 85-20 adhesive. Lap jacket 2 in. at all seams and secure flaps with staples and adhesive to provide complete vapor barrier. In addition, this concealed duct insulation shall be tied 18 in. o.c. with 18 gauge aluminum or copper wire where ducts exceed 24 in. in width. B. All concealed air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units shall be insulated in the same manner as for the ductwork for concealed supply ducts. C. All exposed fresh air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units and all exposed supply and return air ducts, or where so noted, shall be insulated with 1 in. thick, 6 pound density, rigid glass fiberboard with Manville Type EAF vaporseal facing. Attach board to ducts with double prong stick clips. Seal at joints to 0 maintain vapor barrier. All edges and angles shall be reinforced with corner beads. Finish shall consist of tackboard of Benjamin Foster No. 30-36 Sealfas, embedded Manville Duramesh 205, and a heavy finish coat of Benjamin Foster No. 30-35 Sealfas, all applied according to manufacturer's recommendations. D. Acoustical Insulation: Duct lining acoustical insulation shall be shop installed by the Sheet Metal Contractor. Liner shall be 1-in. thick, 3-pound density, non-combustible glass fiber with U.L. approved neoprene coating on air side. Acoustical lining shall be installed where shown on Drawings. All lined ductwork shall be insulated as listed above unless otherwise noted. F. Pipe Insulation 1. All insulation including covering shall be fire resistant and fire retardant and shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25, smoke developed rating BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-29 L&S 847 a. E. Factory Insulation: Humidifier shall be covered with 3/ " thick, rigid, foil face so fiberglass insulation. Insulation shall be covered with reinforced aluminum foil. All surfaces except front panel shall be covered. M. F. Support Legs: Four support legs, of length to provide 24" between underside of humidifier and floor, shall be provided. so G. RAPID-SORBTM Dispersion Tube System: Furnish and install where indicated and of component sizes noted on the Drawings, RAPID-SORBTM Dispersion Tube System. Tube bank shall consist of a horizontal header/separator and designated quantity of vertical dispersion tubes necessary to achieve the required steam capacity and absorption distance. Header/Separator shall span the width of , the duct, be constructed of stainless steel and be fitted with nipples for dispersion tube connections. The dispersion tubes shall extend the height of the duct and shall be fitted with two rows of tublets centered on the diametric lime and spaced 1-1/2" apart. These tublets shall be made of non-metallic material designed for steam temperature. Each tublet shall extend through the wall of and into the center of the dispersion tube and incorporate a properly sized calibrated orifice. 2.20 STEAM TRAPS A. Furnish and install float and thermostatic steam traps where indicated on the Drawings. B. The trap shall be of the mechanical lever ball float type having a ductile iron body with horizontal inline screwed connections and shall incorporate a balanced pressure thermostatic air vent. Valve mechanism shall be stainless steel and attached to a removable cover for easy maintenance. The cover shall be 180 degrees reversible to permit flow in either direction. C. Steam traps shall be as manufactured by Tunstall Associates. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.21 HANGERS A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter& Paterson, Fee & Mason, or equal. B. For all pipe 2-1/2" and larger- Grinnell Figure No. 20, at 10' intervals. C. For all other suspended piping - Grinnell Figure 70 at 6' intervals for tubing 1-1/4" or less, 10'intervals for piping at 1-1/2" and larger. D. All hangers directly in contact with non-ferrous pipe or tubing shall be copper plated BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-28 L&S 847 ewe sw 2. The alphanumeric digital display portion shall continuously scroll all system functions including: a. Actual room or space R.H. b. Humidistat set point R.H. 40 C. Duct R.H. (invariable air volume applications). 40 d. High limit humidistat set point R.H. e. Heater demand %. 00 f. "Time until service"message of g. High limit and air flow proving circuit condition. 3. The keypad portion shall enable the user to reset or adjust the following functions: a. Humidistat R.H. setpoint. b. Humidistat R.H. high limit set point(used with VAV package). C. Auto drain/flush frequency interval. d. Auto drain duration. e. Auto flush duration. f. Throttling range adjustment. g. Time to go until next auto drain/flush sequence. B. Modulating Electronic Control Valve: Valve shall be a normally closed modulating type with an electronic actuator. 0• C. Air Flow Proving Switch Static Pressure Type: Model RH-3 diaphragm operated, air flow proving switch shall be provided for field installation. Switch shall have go an adjustable control range of 0.05"W.C. to 12"W.C. D. Duct High Limit Humidistat: Compatible high limit modulating humidistat shall so be shipped loose for field installation. Humidistat shall sense humidity level within the duct and protect against saturation of air stream. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-27 L&S 847 .w 6. Steam Trap and Strainer: Humidifier shall be provided with a float and `" thermostatic trap and a steam supply line strainer. 7. Electronic Water Level Control: System shall provide for automatic refill and skimmer bleed-off functions. System shall consist of: a. A water level sensing unit comprised of three metallic probed no screwed into a threaded probe head. Probe head shall incorporate isolation skirts to eliminate short-circuiting between probes caused .m by mineral coating of probe head. b. Probe head shall be mounted on the front of the vaporizing me chamber. C. A solenoid operated fill valve shall be factory mounted on the front 00 of the humidifier. 8. Surface Skimmer: Surface Skimmer shall be provided which is field adjustable to provide for optimum mineral removal with minimum water waste. 9. Control Cabinet: Shall be UL/CSA listed JIC enclosure. Control devices shall be mounted on a sub-panel within the enclosure. 10. The Cabinet will be shipped loose and all interconnecting wiring between cabinet and humidifier shall be field supplied. B. Provide the following accessories: 1. Vapor-Logic® 2 Microprocessor Control System. Shall be factory "*^ mounted and wired in the humidifier control panel with humidity sensors to be shipped loose for field installation. Mounting instructions and a wiring diagram shall be included and provide the following features and "' functions: a. Water make-up valve control and low water safety shutdown. b. Auto drain/flush sequence whereby microprocessor accumulates actual humidifying "ON" time, and activates auto drain/flush sequence. C. End of season drain function, which activates when there has been no demand for humidification over a 72-hour period. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-26 US 847 w am ,W B. HX-1 — Shall be capable of heating 81 gpm from 162° to 180° with 5-psi steam pressure. Total heat load is 700,000 Btuh, 729 pounds per hour capacity. Velocity shall not exceed 4 ft/sec. with a pressure drop of 1 foot of water. The shell and tube shall be rated for 150-psi design pressure and 375 ° design temperature. Bell & Gossett Model No. SU 102-4. C. HX-2 — Shall be capable of heating 32 gpm from 160° to 180° with 5-psi steam pressure. Total heat load is 303,000 Btuh, 315 pounds per hour capacity. Velocity shall not exceed 5 ft.sec. with a pressure drop of.5 feet of water. The shell and tube shall be rated for 150-psi design pressure and 375 ° design pressure. Bell & Gossett Model No. SU 62-4. D. Heat exchanger shall be as manufactured by ITT Bell& Gossett or approved equal. 2.19 STEAM HUMIDIFIER (H-1) A. Humidifier shall be a UL listed CSA approved model STS, steam fired evaporative humidifier as manufactured by DRI-STEEM humidifier Company, Nortec, or approved equal as scheduled on the Drawings having the following features and devices: 1. Stainless Steel Construction: Vaporizing chamber, cover, and fittings shall be constructed of stainless steel with heli-arch welded seams. 2. Quick Removal Cover: The cover shall be secured by quick removal threaded knobs. The gasket shall be held in place by flanges that are formed as part of the cover and as part of the evaporating chamber. These flanges shall interlock in such a way that the sealing gasket is locked ,u► between them. 3. Cleanable Design: Vaporizing chamber cover and/or front cleanout plate shall be easily removable for access to the vaporizing chamber for removal of loose scale. 4. Heat Exchanger STS 100S be constructed of stainless steel tubes and headers with welded joints and shall be TEFLON® coated to allow continuous shedding of scale. Model STS 100C is constructed of a special scale shedding copper. 5. Steam Valve: Valve shall be a normally closed modulating type with modified linear flow characteristics, stainless steel trim, and actuator. Valve shall be furnished by humidifier manufacturer. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-25 L.&S 847 installation and operation instructions. Unit shall be Domestic Series CC as manufactured by Bell & Gossett or approved equal. am 2.17 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES A. Expansion tanks shall be ASME pre-charged diaphragm tanks, stamped 125 psi working pressure. Tanks shall be supplied with a heavy-duty butyl diaphragm, ring base, lifting rings, and an NPT system connection. An air charging valve connection shall be provided to facilitate adjusting pre-charged pressure to meet system conditions. B. Air removal fitting shall be in-line type, welded steel, with internal circuiting causing entrained air to be separated from the water. To be Spiro Vent "Air Separa- tor", line size,with drain valve and strainer. No substitutions will be allowed. C. Equivalent products for items A through B as manufactured by Bell & Gossett, Armstrong,Amtrol, or equal will be approved. D. Air Vents: Air vents shall be provided where shown and at all other high points, where shown or not. Vents shall be of the manual type and shall be full line size, but in no case shall they be less than 2 in, steel pipe. Chambers shall be a minimum of 12 in. high. Drain tubing shall be extended in such a manner that the globe valve and end of drain line are readily accessible. Air vents for radiation shall be installed in the return side of each loop of radiation before piping drops down to return main. These vents to be key or screw type equal to Dole or Taco. E. Automatic Make-Up Water Valve: Provide with three valve bypass for water system shall be Bell & Gossett, Cash, Taco, or Watts equal to Bell & Gossett No. B-3 Reducing Valve set for approximately 60 psig inlet and 21 psig outlet, field * adjustable. Install backflow preventer piped to drain in inlet to automatic valve. Bypass to be 1 in. size with globe valve and one check valve in series. Strainers shall be as specified in other paragraphs of this Section of the Specifications. F. Furnish and install all temperature - pressure relief valves for all hot water heater systems. All to be ASME rated and similar to that manufactured by WATTS. 2.18 STEAM TO WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Furnish and install where shown on the Drawings, steam to water, shell and tube U- bend removable tube bundle, steam in shell, water in tube exchangers. The heat exchanger shall include a cast iron bonnet, copper tubes, steel shell and baffles and be ASME stamped. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-24 L&S 847 am " ! thermometer, (2) pressure gauges for pump discharge, (2) bronze fitted isolation valves between pumps and recover, and(2)lifting eye bolts. A cast iron inlet strainer with vertical self-cleaning bronze screen and large dirt pocket shall be mounted on the receiver. The screen shall be easily removable for cleaning,requiring no additional floor space for servicing. B. The centrifugal water pumps shall be flange mounted on the receiver. Pumps shall be close coupled vertical design,permanently aligned,bronze fitted and be equipped with stainless steel shaft, enclosed bronze impeller, and renewable bronze case ring. Carbon/ceramic mechanical seals shall be rated for 250T for maximum life. Each pump shall be close coupled to a vertical drip proof motor. Pump capacities, motor ' HP and RPM, electrical characteristics, and receiver shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. C. The unit manufacturer shall furnish, mount on the unit, and wire a NEMA 2 control cabinet with drip lip and piano hinged door enclosing the following: • (2) Combination magnetic starters (each having 3 overload relays) with fused disconnect and cover interlock for each motor. • (1) Electrical alternator. • (2)"Auto-Off Hand"selector switches. • (1)Numbered terminal strip. No • (1) Fused control circuit transformer for each motor when the motor voltage exceeds 230 volts. All control cabinet components shall be UL listed or recognized and NEMA rated. The control panel assembly shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Each pump control circuit shall be completely independent of the other. The electrical alternator shall change the operating sequence automatically after each cycle. Simultaneous operation under peak load conditions, and operating of the second pump, should the first pump or its control fail, shall be provided by the lag float switch. D. All factory installed wiring shall be numbered for easy identification and the numbers shall coincide with those shown on the wiring diagrams. All interconnecting wiring between the pump, control panel shall be enclosed in liquid tight flexible conduit. The unit shall be factory tested as a complete unit. The pump manufacture shall furnish complete elementary and connection wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-23 L&S 847 no pulsation damper(Ashcroft#110613) and a brass lever handle gauge cock (Ashcroft a° #1095). B. Model number, size and range to be as follows: 40 1. Ashcroft - #1018, 3-1/2" dial, red tipped pointer with scale range such that normal operating pressure is approximately at mid-scale. am 2.14 UNIONS so A. Unions shall be of the same class and material as the pipe and fittings of the system in which they are installed. In black steel piping systems,they shall be 200 lb. black malleable iron with brass ground joint equal to Dart Figures 0832, 0834, 0835, 0836 or 0838. In copper and brass piping, they shall be 125 lb. bronze or brass with ground joint. B. Flanged unions for welded pipe shall be weld neck, 150 lb. raised face. Flanged joints shall be packed with impregnated asbestos gaskets placed inside the bolt circle with graphite applied to both faces. .. C. Dielectric unions shall be provided between ferrous and non-ferrous piping to prevent galvanic corrosion. The dielectric unions shall meet the requirements for tensile strength of pipe fittings in accordance with Federal Specification WW-U-531 and shall be suitable for temperatures and pressures encountered. The ends shall be threaded, flanged, brazed, or soldered to match adjacent piping. The metal parts of the union shall be separated so that the electrical current is below 1 percent of the galvanic current, which would exist with metal to metal contact. „ 2.15 PIPE SLEEVES A. Standard IPS steel or wrought iron sleeves shall be provided wherever exposed pipes pass through masonry walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves are to be two pipe sizes larger than line size. Insulated piping sleeves shall be sized to allow insulation to �. pass through the sleeve without gouging. 2.16 DUPLEX CONDENSATE PUMP �+ A. Furnish and install according to plans and manufacture's instructions a duplex condensate unit as shown on the Drawings. The unit shall consist of(1) cast iron receiver, (2) water pumps, (2) float switches and all accessories as hereafter specified. The condensate receiver shall be of close grained cast iron construction and shall be equipped with(2) externally adjustable 2-pole float switches, water level gauge, dial BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-22 L&S 847 wA when used as balance valves. G. Balance and/or shut-off valves 4 in. and larger - Tour & Anderson Series STAF, ► neoprene seat, semi-steel body, with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, 125 pound ANSI flanges, Figure 10117 or 118F, G6-HI2. Provide open position stop on all valves. Provide hand operators for all valves which are 6 ft. or more above the floor. H. Balance and/or shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and 3 in. sizes - Tour & Anderson Series STAF, lever operated, faced plug,neoprene seat, semi-steel body with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, Figure 118. Provide open position stops for all valves. I. For 2 in. and smaller- Balancing valves shall be Tour& Anderson Figure STAD or STA-D, semi-steel body, bronze plug with neoprene or Teflon resilient face,bronze ' top and bottom bushings, complete with lever. Provide open position stop and plastic cap on all valves, which are labeled "Balance Valves" on the Drawings. All valves at fan coil unit shall be furnished with drain kit. J. Pump discharge check valves shall be Muessco, Williams & Hager, or Smolensky equal to Muessco 105-DT silent type, steel body, stainless steel trim and spring, renewable seat, 150 psig ASME rated. 2.12 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice or Weiss, equal to Taylor 30EJ31009 with aluminum case, industrial glass, red reading mercury, 9" scale length, 2°F subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response but in no case less than 3-1/2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or w stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extension when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position. B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following: NO 1. Hot water heating system: 25-240°F 2.13 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Gauges shall be Ashcroft,Marsh,U.S. Gauge Company or Trerice equal to Ashcroft "Quality" line gauges, Grade A, 1% accuracy. Each gauge shall be installed with a BOOK STORAGE FACILITY ' 15600-21 L&S 847 2.11 VALVES A. All valves shall be of the same make except as noted below for special valves and shall be Crane, Watts, Walworth, or Tour & Anderson manufacture based on the following Stockham valves. All ball valves shall be Watts, and all balancing valves shall be Tour and Anderson. No substitutions will be allowed. B. All water valves installed in copper tube piping shall be, in general, solder end pattern, all bronze with iron hand wheel, rated for not less than 200 pounds non-shock water pressure. In general, all line service valves are to be gate valves, manual vents are to be globe type. Ms C. Solder end valves are as follows: 1. Gate Valves- Stockham Figure B-109. "~ 2. Globe Valves - Stockham B-14T. ON 3. Check Valves- Stockham B-309. 4. Drain Valves - Watts No. B-6000 ball valve with hose adapter, cap and chain. 5. Ball Valves-Watts Series B-6001-SS-XH. D. Screw end and flanged valves shall be as follows: 1. Gate: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-620 or G-623. 2. Globe: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120 or 752; 3 in. and larger- Stockham Figure G-609 or G-613. *�• 3. Check: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-319; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-931. • 4. Ball Valves: Watts Series 600-SS-SH. E. All shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and larger shall be Watts Series G-4000, cast iron body, 316, steel disc and shaft,Nordel EPT seat, designed for bubbletight shutoff. Valves to be fitted with lever operator for two position operation. Am F. Gate and/or globe valves shall not be used as substitutes for the following valves .. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-20 L&S 847 s,� 4s *�* shall be used in the casing. Capacities, pressure drops and selection proce- dure shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410-72. 1. Water coils shall be pitched for proper drainage and venting. 2. Coils shall have a supply header to ensure distribution to each 5/8" o.d. tube. 3. Coils shall be leak tested with (315 psig) air pressure under water. 4. Coils shall have fully flanged frames, with capacities as shown on the Drawings. 5. Furnish with stainless steel double wall insulated drain pan, all in an enclosed fully flanged frame. 2.10 CIRCULATING PUMPS (In Line Type) A. The pumps shall be of the centrifugal in-line coupled type, especially designed and constructed for quiet operation. Capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. Pump end shall be of the in-line, single stage design with close-coupled motor. The pump models shall be furnished as shown on the plans and installed in accordance with the manufacture's recommendations. The pump shall be capable of operating continuously at temperatures from 5°F to 250° (-15°C to 121°C) and working pressures of 175 PSI (12 Bars). Pump flanges shall be ANSI B16.1, 125-1b. flat face. C. The pump housing, motor stool, and shaft coupling shall be constructed of close- grained cast iron. The impeller, impeller seal ring, and pump shaft shall be ON constructed of stainless steel. The impeller shall be secured to the splined pump shaft end by means of a stainless steel lock nut and locking washer. The seal faces shall be if tungsten carbide/carbon with other mechanical seal parts constructed of stainless steel. D. Motor shall be nominal integrated variable frequency drive totally enclosed fan cooled 1750 rpm and shall be especially selected for quit operation. The horse power of the motor shall be of such size as to insure non-overloading of the motor throughout the pump curve without the use of motor service factor. Pump motors shall be premium efficiency. Provide steel base. E. Pumps shall be Grundfos Series L. No substitutions will be allowed. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-19 L&S 847 im front panel of all units' 36" or longer. D. The convectors shall be securely attached to the building structure and shall be set dead level in both directions. All convectors shall be mounted one block course (8") above finished floor. E. The convectors shall be finished with factory baked enamel finish in color to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. All fasteners shall be tamper-proof. F. Convector A - Type SW-A: Type SW-A cabinets shall be constructed from not less than 14 gauge CRS front and top and No. 16 gauge CRS back and sides. The front shall wrap around the sides of the cabinet and shall fasten at sides with vandal proof screws. Air outlet louvers of venetian type shall be in slope top. Type SW-A air inlet shall be through open bottom. Back shall be provided with holes for mounting on wall. .. WX G. Dampers: Provide factory installed Allen Head operated dampers for all convectors. The damper operator shall have two free wheeling clutches for automatic engagement at the beginning (closing or opening)position and shall go, position the damper blade at any intermediate point between full closed and full open; at the full open and full closed position, the clutch shall disengage allowing the die-formed, unbreakable nylon damper knob to be turned beyond the full on closed or open position without jamming or distorting the damper assembly. The operator is to be 5/8 in. machined aluminum screw and zinc die-cast iron and escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall be fastened through the enclosure to a 3/32 in. back-up plate with countersunk sheet metal screws. H. Access Doors: Convectors shall be provided with one access door. Access door •. shall be 5-1/8 in. by 4-1/8 in. and shall be located in the inlet louver area. Access doors shall be hinged on side with straight shaft type hinge and shall fasten with cam-type locking device with Allen Head operator. * I. End Pockets: Where noted, convectors shall be provided with 4 in. end pockets, both ends. End pocket shall consist of the cabinet extended in length as noted with No. 20 gauge CRS baffle spot welded to back of cabinet extruding from heating element to air outlet louvers. 2.09 WATER COILS A. Provide duct mounted hot water coils as scheduled on the drawings. Coils shall be designed seamless 1-1/8" o.d. copper tubes. Fins shall have collars drawn, belled and firmly bonded to tubes. No soldering or tinning BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-18 US 847 w ON 4W spot welded type construction will not be acceptable. Provide access door and drain connection on unit KE-11 A. D. The fan wheels shall be of the backwardly inclined non-overloading type. E. The shaft shall be constructed of C1040 ground and polished steel. F. The bearings shall be of the ball bearing type and shall be especially constructed for quiet operation. Bearings shall be of the self-aligning grease pack,pillow block type, selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours. G. Motor and drive shall be belt drive with adjustable motor sheave. Motor nameplate horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of 5%. Belts shall be of the oil resistant type. Motor shall be especially designed for quiet operation. Aw H. A factory wired non-fused disconnect switch shall be located under the housing of the unit. Provide spring vibration isolators for each fan. I. Fan shall be Greenheck Model SWB or equal by Loren-Cook or Jenn Air. 2.08 CONVECTORS A. Convectors shall be of the wall mounted or semi-recessed type as shown on Drawings for heating with hot water. Unit shall have a capacity as shown on the drawings and shall be rated in accordance with Code CS 140-47 of the National Bureau of Standards. B. Convector elements shall be of suitable type for use with hot water and shall consist of round seamless copper tubes,non-ferrous fins, cast iron headers, steel element end supports and fin tube supports all suitably protected against M• corrosion. All tubes shall be mechanically expanded into fin collars. Tubes shall be expanded and rolled into headers with contact strengthened by tapered brass bushings so inserted as to prevent tubes from loosening or pulling out by continued expansion. No soldered or welded joints or compression couplings shall be permitted. C. All cabinets shall be reinforced where necessary to provide stiffness. Cabinets shall be constructed of 16 gage quality steel. Fronts shall be secured in place by quick opening fasteners with vandal proof heads. Cabinets and fronts shall be phosphatized and painted inside and outside with one coat of grey primer. Complete cabinets and convector elements are to be manufactured by the same company. A horizontal channel stiffener shall be installed on the inside of the BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-17 L&S 847 M .M G. Provide, where noted on schedules, internal face and bypass dampers with full size coils. H. High capacity mixing section shall be furnished with properly located access doors equipped with handles. Internal slides shall be provided for filter racks. Filters shall be removable from either end of Section. I. Bag filter and pre-filter sections shall be provided with all units. Each unit shall be furnished with three(3) sets of pre and final filters. 2.06 GRAVITY VENTILATORS A. Furnish and install where indicated on the Drawings and where scheduled, extruded aluminum "tiered" intake ventilation penthouse. The penthouse louvers are to be constructed of .080" extruded aluminum welded to the structural supports. The hood shall be constructed of .060" aluminum and provided with a layer of anti- condensate coating. The corners of the unit shall be mitered and continuously welded aling the miter. The ventilator shall be provided with bird screen. The intake performance shall be based on actual test data in accordance with AMCA test guidelines. .. B. The ventilator shall be provided with 12"high fully welded insulated roof curb with wood nailers and a motorized back draft damper. C. Gravity ventilators shall be manufactured by Greenheck, Loren-Cook or approved equal. w, 2.07 UTILITY FAN A. The utility vent set shall be of the centrifugal fan type completely assembled with fan, fan scroll, motor, belt drive,motor mount and motor housing. The capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings and certified performance tests by AMCA ** shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings. B. The fan shall be mounted and supported as shown by the detail on the Drawings. The mounting shall be complete with vibration isolators as recommended by the manufacturer. The unit shall be provided with weather protection. C. Fan housing shall be constructed of steel sheet and all parts shall be bonderized and then coated with baked primer-finisher especially formulated to meet stringent corrosion resistance standards. The fan scroll shall be attached to the side plates by means of continuous lock seam or welded seam construction. Intermittent BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-16 L&S 847 was an units of the types, sizes, and capacities as scheduled on the Drawings. All units shall be factory-assembled and tested and shall be as manufactured by the Trane Company,York International or McQuay. No substitutions will be allowed. B. Units shall consist of modular fan and coil sections, filter section, internal face and bypass sections where called for, adjustable motor bases for high efficiency, totally enclosed NEMA frame motors, and OSHA approved belt guards. Casing shall be of complete frame with removable panels, modular, flush mounted into the unit framework with properly located access panels. Casing shall be double wall insulated with a 1 in. minimum thickness fiberglass insulation with a density of not less than 1-1/2 lbs. accordance with NFPA Bulletin No. 90A. Insulation shall be secured to casing with waterproof adhesive and permanent fasteners. All cabinet surfaces shall be galvanized. C. Fans shall be centrifugal type, double inlet, double width. They shall be of the forward curved, low speed type on all sizes. Fan housing shall be equipped with adjustable cut-off. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and tested at rated speed after being installed in factory assembled units. Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated ball bearings sized to provide minimum average bearing life of 200,000 hours. Lubrication fittings shall be extended to the exterior cabinet. Fan shafts shall be solid, cold finish steel, turned, grout ground, and polished to insure trouble-free operation and tolerances within the recommendations of bearing manufacturers. Fan motors shall be mounted to an adjustable pivot base in optional position external to the unit. Fan V-belt drive shall be of the variable pitch type. Fan belt guard shall be furnished by the unit manufacturer, easily removable, and made of solid steel with tachometer openings. Inlet vanes shall be furnished where so called for on the schedule. D. Coil sections shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel with removable panels and shall be arranged for the removal of the coil from either end of the unit. Combina- tion hot water/chiller coils shall consist of 5/8 in. o.d. copper tubing on 1-1/2 centers arranged in a staggered pattern with respect to circulation of airflow. They shall be 40 bonded to the tubes by hydraulic expansion of tubes and the coils tested with 300- lbs.pneumatic pressure under water. ON E. The heating coil shall be of the continuous aluminum plate fin and copper tubes type, assembled in a zinc coated steel frame. The coil shall be pitched in the unit casing for proper drainage the coil shall be tested at 250 psig air pressure under water. Coils shall be of the steam distributing, "non-freeze" type. F. All units furnished with DX coils or chilled water coils shall have drain pans pitched for even flow of condensate with side drain connections on both sides of unit. Provide copper tube "P" trap with cleanout in condensate drain piping, "P" traps shall be equal to unit pressure. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-15 L&S 847 A. Layout and details shall clearly indicate compliance with the above Specifications. Any variations in design details, fittings, or accessory items for which approval is requested shall be specifically marked on the Drawings, as shall any major variations from the Drawing (minor variations are assumed to be field conditions). Drawings for Fan Room shall be at 3/8 in. = 1 ft. 0 in. scale. B. The Drawings shall not be submitted to the Engineer for approval until the ductwork has been coordinated with all other trades. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall assume the responsibility for and bear the cost of any alterations required after approval because of inaccurate Shop Drawings or lack of proper coordination, and also for any changes in sheet metal erected prior to approval of Shop Drawings. 2.03 AIR DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, AND REGISTERS " A. Diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be Anemostat-Waterloo, Titus, or Barber Colman, equal to those specified in the Following paragraphs. See Drawings for sizes, cfin's, locations, and qualities of various types. In general, all units shall be installed with face bars parallel to floor or nearest wall. All volume control dampers shall be key operated. Finish for all diffusers, grilles, and registers to be factory finished with color selected by the Engineer. B. Return and Exhaust Register (ER, RR) - Titus Model 350FL/AG-15 steel deflected blade register,off-white finish,with opposed blade damper. C. Top Supply Register (TSR) - Titus Model 272FL/AG-15 aluminum construction, double deflection,white finish,with opposed blade damper. D. Ceiling Diffusers (CD) - Titus Model TMSA, adjustable ceiling diffusers with blank-off panels and opposed blade dampers. E. Bottom Return Register (BRR) - Titus Model 1707, double reflection register with opposed blade damper. 2.04 LOUVERS A. All wall louvers shall be extruded aluminum construction, equal to the following Ruskin Mfg. Co. model. 1. Type "A" - No. ELF375D with box frame, extended sill, 1/2" aluminum mesh bird screen, and Kynar 500 finish. 2.05 AIR HANDLING UNIT(AHU) A. Furnish and install, where shown on the Drawings, central station draw-through MW BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-14 L&S 847 40 OR P. Apply duct liner thermal-acoustic insulation in low velocity duct systems as shown on the Drawings. 1. Duct lining shall be shop installed by the Sheet Metal Contractor. Material shall be V nominal thickness, 3-pound density, non-combustible glass fiber with UL approved neoprene coating on air side. 2. Insulation shall be applied with 100% adhesive coverage, plus stick clips on all sides of duct, 24" on center in direction of air flow, 12" to 18" on center at right angles to air flow. Coat leading edge of each insulation section with adhesive. 3. Lining shall be Certainteed No. 300 "Ultralite",or equal. Q. Where called for on Drawings, final connections to diffusers and registers shall be �. made with flexible ductwork, UL listed, Class 1. To be Thermaflex S-LP-10 for exhaust/retum, M-KA for supply, or equal. Joints shall be sealed with duct tape and Thermaflex duct straps. Connection to rigid ductwork shall be made with spun conical taps. R. Install duct-type smoke detectors furnished by the Electrical Contractor. S. Flexible Air Duct: 1. Flexible air duct shall be Wiremold, Thermoflex, Cleveflex, or equal, and shall be equal to Wiremold Type CRK Vanguard Duct. 2. Flexible duct shall be manufactured from fully annealed aluminum and formed into a multiple corrugated construction, then encased with 1 inch, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass blanket and sheathed with a vinyl vapor barrier. ! ! The duct shall have an inside-bending radius of not more than 3/4 inch I.D. It must comply with the latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed as Class 1 air duct, UL Standard 181. Duct shall have published pressure ratings of not less than 10 ft. S.A. positive pressure, .5 inch W.A. negative pressure. Duct shall also be UL rated for velocities up to 6,500 F.P.M.E. T. Flexible Connections: Provide, in each duct connection to every air handling unit and fan, 30 ounce double neoprene coated woven glass fabric flexible connection not less than 4" long securely held to retaining clamps. 2.02 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS �w BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-13 L&S 847 40 gasketed. Door shall be 12" by 12" minimum except where limited by duct width and shall be larger where necessary for access to fire damper fusible links or other devices. J. Hangers for all rectangular ducts 4 sq. ft. in area or above shall be round bar type fastened to 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" x 1/8" angles under the ducts. Ducts less than 4 sq. ft. in area shall be hung with black V x 1/16" strap iron bent 1" under bottom side of the duct and fastened to the duct with sheet metal screws,using not less than two screws per side and as many more so that they are not greater than 6" centers. K. Hangers are to be placed on not greater than 8'-0" centers or closer where required so that the ductwork can support the weight of a man at any point. L. Wherever sound insulation lining is called for, the sheet metal duct size shown on the Drawings must be increased to provide the clear inside dimensions or cross sectional area shown on the Drawings. M. Duct joint sealing, reinforcing, flanges, etc. for rectangular sheet metal ducts shall .� be based on maintaining airtight ducts at 2" WG Maximum static pressure with maximum leakage of 5% of total fan capacity; 1/2 of 1% for round and oval ducts. All joints in ductwork shall be sealed with U.L. classified United Duct Sealer, or equal. N. Duct systems shall have sufficient volume dampers, whether or not shown, to control and adjust the total volume of each system, each zone, in each branch and at each diffuser or grille. The HVAC Contractor shall consult with the College's Balancing Contractor for the proper placement of volume dampers prior to ., installation. Volume dampers shall be of the butterfly type with 18 gauge galvanized iron blade. All dampers shall be equipped with Duro-Dyne Type UNXLD locking quadrant. All dampers shall be provided with damper bearings on , each end of shaft mounted on a 2" x 3" x 1/8" plate held to duct with sheet metal screws. Maximum width of single blades shall be 14". Splitter dampers shall not be used. �• O. Provide where shown or indicated on the Drawings fire and/or smoke dampers with a UL label for not less than 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating in accordance with UL-555 continuing inspection service. Blades and frame shall be galvanized steel construction with blades of an interlocking design, having two folded guides which serve as stops. Fusible links shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 1351, 20 pounds, issue A. Dampers shall be installed according to latest edition of NFPA-90A, mounted with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" returning angles on both sides of partition, wall, or floor, and sleeves as per the UL test under which the damper fire rating was obtained. Angles shall completely close the wall opening and provide anchorage to the dampers. Damper blade stack shall not reduce duct free area. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-12 US 847 .o ductwork. Ducts shall be free from thumping or rattling when fans are turned on or off. 40 D. Duct sizes shall be strictly followed and no changes in shape or dimensions shall be made by the HVAC Contractor without first obtaining approval from the Engineer, except that duct shall be offset as required to clear structural members and to co- 40, ordinate with other trades and any duct changes must meet the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA standards. E. The center line radius of all duct elbows where shown on the Drawings shall be at least one and one-half times the width of the duct. Where building conditions do not allow for this radius or where square turns are shown, manufactured double walled duct turns equal to Aero-Dyne or Tuttle& Bailey shall be used in the supply or exhaust air ducts and "Sonotru" acoustical attenuating turns as manufactured by South Control Products Co. shall be used in any air ducts where acoustical insulation is included. F. Duct sections 1'-6" wide or less shall be butted together and jointed with flat drive cleats 2-1/8" wide. Top and bottom cleats shall be cut flush with duct and side cleats bent over to make a tight joint. Standing bar slips as specified for ducts over ,A 18"may be used at the HVAC Contractor's option. G. Ducts from 18" to 30" wide shall be jointed with 1/2" standing bar slips made of metal the same as or heavier than duct sheets. Joints in ducts with either dimension over 30" shall have V standing bar slips on those sides over 30". Where sides are over 42",the standing bar slips will be reinforced with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" angles. Additional angle stiffeners not over 60" apart shall be provided between joints. Ducts over 60" in width shall be jointed with 1-1/2" x 1/8" angle irons riveted to ductwork on all sides with 1/8" rivets at not more than 4-1/2" on centers, sections bolted with 3/16" stove bolts at not over 6" centers, sheets turned over angles into joint at least 1/4". H. Sheet metal screws 3/4" #10 may be used to attach stiffener angles to ductwork to secure seams, spaced not over 12" on centers and not less than two per side of 12" or more, except where specified otherwise. Button punching shall not be used except for pre-erection attachment of fittings. I. Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doors opposite each manual damper, reheat coil, steam injection humidifier at each fire damper, and at every duct mounted control device. Doors shall be equal to Buensod-Stacey Type S-2 of rigid construction with cast type rotary latches. Where space limitations do not allow for full swing of the access door, two rotary type latches shall be used. Doors located in insulated ducts shall be furnished with extended frames to serve as a stop for insulation. Insulate doors located in insulated ductwork. All doors shall be BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-11 L&S 847 go approved manner. * 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1. B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work, fire dampers, volume dampers, control dampers and control valves, and for piping installation, valve numbers shall be added to these Drawings prior to submittal to the Engineer. In addition to the above all revised areas shall be clearly marked with a revision bubble. am 1.20 ALTERNATES A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the HVAC Subcontractor is more specifically described below. B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and reasonably incidental to providing all HVAC work specified and shown on the Drawings, less the cost of all extra work described in the Alternates. C. Alternate Bid Item No. 1. 1. Price above base bid for furnishing all labor and materials and other cost in connection with furnishing and installing fan coil units 2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12 including all associated piping, wiring and temperature controls. See Drawings for full extent of Scope. PART 2 -MATERIALS 2.01 SHEET METAL WORK A. All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any ductwork. Above hung ceilings, duct locations and elevations must be co-ordinated with work of other trades to avoid conflicts with structure,piping, conduit and light fixtures. " B. All sheet metal ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet of bend forming quality. •�+ C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest ASHRAE or SMACNA requirements for metal gauges, joints, reinforcing and supports. All exposed ductwork shall be constructed and hung to provide a neat, smooth, finished appearance. Cadmium plated sheet metal screws shall be used on all exposed BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-10 L&S 847 ww all foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation. Thoroughly flush all piping of any oils, burrs, solder, and flux. Replace strainers and filters at completion of cleaning. B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner. C. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped to insure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter. D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish, debris, and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean. 40 1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Engineer. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the M new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-9 L&S 847 6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. so 7. Valve chart. 8. List of recommended spare parts. 9. Copies of all service contracts. 10. Performance curves for pumps, fans, etc. 11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local '~ representative for each item of equipment. D. See the "Automatic Temperature Control' paragraphs of this Section for additional requirements. 1.16 PROTECTION A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other Sections from damage by work or workmen, and shall include making good all damage thus caused. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted; protect work against theft, injury, or damage; and carefully store material and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing or foreign material. C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting, setting in place, and connecting-up completely any equipment supplied under each Section. Work under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling and protecting equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged by reason of mishandling or failure to protect on the part of the HVAC Contractor. D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather, vehicles, dirt, and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure that all electrical or �* absorbent equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage. 1.17 CLEANING • A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts, and equipment of BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-8 L&S 847 w. «w A. The HVAC Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one(1)year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The HVAC Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS OR A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply on qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Contractor shall video tape the instruction procedures and deliver three(3) copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Furnish the Engineer, for approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The manual shall include the following information: 1. Description of systems. W 2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment. 3. Winter/summer changeover procedures. 4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of NO equipment. 5. Lubrication chart. Wo BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-7 L&S 847 ON E. The HVAC Contractor shall consult the College's Temperature Control and Balancing Contractor to co-ordinate work of these trades and to have a full comprehension of the work to be done as well as to determine the conditions affecting the location and placement of all equipment and materials. "" 1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery: The HVAC Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. Delivery and storage of materials and equipment must be co-ordinated with the Smith College Physical Plant, and is limited to areas designated by the College. B. Storage and Handling: The HVAC Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss, which may occur, shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his .„ Subcontract shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor. B. The HVAC Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain .■ 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric power from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the HVAC Contractor. *�+ 1.13 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping and ductwork shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms, unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade. 1.14 GUARANTEE BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-6 US 847 w D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Engineer. 1.08 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The HVAC Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The HVAC Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.09 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The HVAC Contractor shall refer to all the Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements. B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied,in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The HVAC Contractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The HVAC Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-5 L&S 847 an Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since the HVAC Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements. No substitution will be allowed for the Trane, York, or McQuay air handling units .A and condensing unit, Trane, McQuay or International fan coil units, Watts ball valves, Grundfos pumps,Tour and Anderson balancing valves,Tunstall steam traps. B. The HVAC Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.06 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall be new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class or category of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their require- ments and be so labeled. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the HVAC Contractor shall submit to *s* the Engineer six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished on the project. In addition to the above, one (1) set of Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the College's HVAC Department for review and approval. B. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Engineer for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the HVAC Contractor. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-4 L&S 847 s� C. The HVAC Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the HVAC Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the HVAC Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Engineer whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The HVAC Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The HVAC Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the w General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the HVAC Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear 40 the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The HVAC Contractor shall lay out all his work at the site and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Contractor installing such items. G. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Engineer before proceeding with the work. J. Before submitting his bid, the HVAC Contractor shall visit the site with the 4M BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-3 L&S 847 40 .,k control work shall be by Yankee Technology,Inc. 9. Installation of and connection to equipment furnished by others. 10. Air and water balance, tests, start-up. All water and air testing and balancing shall be preformed by Wings Testing and Balancing, Inc and billed directly to the College. 11. Guarantee. 12. Instructions. 13. Record Drawings. 14. Demolition, removal from site and legal disposal of all existing heating and ventilating systems and equipment,made obsolete by new construction. All piping and equipment shall be the property of the College and shall be delivered to such places designated by the College. 1.03 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws,rules,regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes,rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Engineer rules otherwise. B. The HVAC Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS • A. The HVAC Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also * ' exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The HVAC Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the HVAC Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Engineer after construction work begins. BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-2 US 847 w SECTION 15600-HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 01YACI PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division 1, and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all HVAC work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the follow- ing; 1. Duct mount steam humidifiers 2. Fan coil units, unit heaters, radiators, reheat coils, air units, air handling units, and steam injection humidifiers. 3. Air cooled condensing unit and appurtenances. w. 4. Piping systems for hot and chilled water and condensate drainage, steam supply and condensate return, including pumps, heat exchanger valves, and specialties. 5. Duct systems for supply, return, and exhaust, including fire dampers, regis- ters, louvers, and terminal boxes. 6. Exhaust fans. 7. Insulation for piping, ductwork,and equipment. 8. Energy management (building automation) system. All temperature BOOK STORAGE FACILITY 15600-1 L&S 847 w Lindgren&Sharples.P.C.Consulting Engineers INDEX SECTION 15600-HVAC PART 1 -GENERAL PART 2-MATERIALS 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 2.20 STEAM TRAPS ps 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK 2.21 HANGERS 1.03 CODES,ORDINANCES,AND 2.22 INSULATION INSPECTIONS 2.23 PIPE&FITTINGS 1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 2.24 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS& IF 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE COMPENSATORS 1.06 PRODUCTS 2.25 STRAINERS 1.07 SUBMITTALS 2.26 FAN COIL UNITS 1.08 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS 2.27 ACCESS PANELS 1.09 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 2.28 CONDENSING UNIT 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 2.29 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE 1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING CONTROL 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1.13 WORK CONCEALED PART 3-INSTALLATION 1.14 GUARANTEE 1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE 3.01 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM 1.16 PROTECTION 3.02 CUTTING,PATCHING&DRILLING 1.17 CLEANING 3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION 1.18 CUTTING 3.04 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS 1.19 CLEANING 3.05 CLEANING&FLUSHING 1.20 CO-ORDINATION DRAWINGS 3.06 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS wo PART 2-MATERIALS 3.07 INSULATION 2.01 SHEET METAL WORK 3.08 EQUIPMENT INSULATION 2.02 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS 3.09 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN UP 2.03 AIR DIFFUSERS,GRILLES& 3.10 IDENTIFICATION DIFFUSERS 3.11 SPARE PARTS 2.04 LOUVERS 2.05 AIR HANDLING UNITS 2.06 GRAVITY VENTILATORS 2.07 UTILITY FAN 2.08 CONVECTORS r 2.09 WATER COILS 2.10 CIRCULATING PUMPS 2.11 VALVES 2.12 THERMOMETERS 2.13 PRESSURE GAUGES 2.14 UNIONS 2.15 PIPE SLEEVES #! 2.16 DUPLEX CONDENSATE PUMP 2.17 HOT WATER SPECIAL TIES&VALVES 2.18 STEAM TO WATER HEAT EXCHANGER BOOKSTORAGE HVAC 15600 I!A w. 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width,or as indicated on the Drawings. .. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors,Inc.,or approved equal,over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1. At all fire rated assemblies,prepare all penetrations for pipes and perimeters. E. Application 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where neces- sary. *++ 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. .A BOOK STORAGE 15400-20 US 847 rw �r IM 3.08 CLEANING UP A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving the job, thoroughly clean all fixtures installed under this Contract, removing all plaster, stickers, rust stains, and any foreign matter or discoloration of fixtures, leaving every part in perfect condition and ready for use. 3.09 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and be included in his Bid. 3.10 DISINFECTION A. Flush out entire system. B. Introduce chlorine or solution of calcium hypochlorite or sodium hypochlorite. Fill lines slowly and apply agent at rate which will produce 50 parts per million of chloride as determined by residual chlorine tests at end of lines. Open and close valves and hydrants while system is being chlorinated. C. After twenty-four (24) hours, test for residual chlorine. If more than 5 ppm are present, flush out system until all traces are removed. D. After disinfection, flush treated water from system through its extremities. "' Continue flushing until samples of water are satisfactory to local authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat flushing if samples taken daily over next three(3)days indicate that quality of water is not being maintained. Do not draw samples from hydrants and undisinfected hose. E. Submit test results to Owner. 3.11 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including,but not limited to the following: 1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. B. Safmg Insulation BOOK STORAGE 15400-19 US 847 T 3.04 C[ ITING AND PATCHIN A. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of plumbing shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. B. Cutting of openings larger than those that can be drilled will be performed by the M, General Contractor. C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, will be performed by ..� the General Contractor. 3.05 INSULATION .. A. Insulation shall be applied by an independent Insulation Contractor regularly engaged in that business. B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls. Covering shall be applied before masonry proceeds. C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed. 3.06 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. All water piping passing through masonry walls shall be provided with standard weight steel pipe, or Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves, inside diameter to be slightly larger than pipe passing through same. Center pipe in sleeve. B. Provide chromium plated escutcheons where uninsulated pipes pass through walls. 3.07 INSPECTION AND TESTS A. Tests for Plumbing Systems: Soil, waste, vent and water piping shall be tested by the Plumbing Contractor and approved before acceptance. Underground piping shall be tested prior to back filling. Equipment required for tests shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. All tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Local Plumbing Inspector,and shall be performed as required by the Plumbing Code. BOOK STORAGE 15400-18 L&S 847 r� Handbook H28, with graphite or inert filler and oil, with an approved graphite compound,or with polytetrafluorethylene tape applied to the male threads. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE A. Bedding for the pipe shall provide full and stable support, with recesses excavated for pipe bells. All pipe shall be laid to the specified line and grade, with a firm bearing throughout each length and with the bell ends uphill. B. Pipe Joints: The flexible water tight rubber gaskets shall be installed in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer. �r C. Plastic Pipe: Install plastic piping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. At minimum, envelope all PVC pipe in 6" of screened gravel. Clear interior of conduit of dirt and debris as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. D. Joint Adapters: Make joints between PVC pipe and other type of pipe with standard manufactured PVC adapters and fittings. E. Lay conduit beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. 3.03 WATER PIPE FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS A. Mains, Branches and Runoffs: Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by the Plumbing Contractor and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken structural portions of the building. Above ground piping shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes,valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2"between finished covering on the different services. B. Expansion and Contraction of Pipe: Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of pipe. e!• BOOK STORAGE 15400-17 1 L&S 847 C. All backflow preventers shall be approved by the Massachusetts State Plumbing Examiners and shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions, and in accordance with Regulation 310CMR 22.22. D. Units shall be Watts Regulator Co., Febco, Division of CMB, Ind., Hersey Products, Inc.,or equal. E. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall file and prepare all applications for backflow preventer approval with the Department of Environmental Protection, and pay all fees and charges. F: All certificates of approval and test results shall be sent to the Architect. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 SOIL,WASTE,DRAIN AND VENT PIPING A. Installation: 1. Drainage and Vent Pipes: Horizontal soil,rain leaders and waste pipes shall have a minimum grade of 1/4" per foot for piping 3" and less and 1/8" per foot for piping larger than 3". Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two or more fixtures shall be provided with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is noted. 2. Fittings: Changes in pipe size on soil, waste, and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropri- ate use of 45° wyes, long or short sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8, or 1/16 bends, or by a combination of those or equivalent fittings. Single and double sanitary tees and 1/4 bends may be used in drainage lines only where the direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. 3. Union Connections: Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on the inlet side of the traps. Use of bushings will not be permitted. .� B. Joints: Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Threaded joints shall have American National taper pipe threads conforming to National Bureau of Standards BOOK STORAGE 15400-16 L&S 847 w wee 3. Cast iron impeller. 4. Elevated thrust bearing. 5. Double lower bearing with grease reservoir between sections and seal between bearing and impeller. 6. Pumps capable of passing 3" solids. C. Motors: Not less than 3/4 hp, 208 V, 3 phase, 60 cycle, AC, 1,150 rpm, drip-proof enclosure. D. Controls shall consist of the following: 1. Four Series 8230 mercury float switches suspended from cover on galvanized rod, each with 20 ft.cord. 2. One NEMA I Duplex control cabinet for wall mounting,with: 2- magnetic starters 2- fusible disconnect switches 1 - automatic alternator 2- TOA selector switches 2- pump running lights 1 - control circuit transformer 1 - 4" alarm bell w/silencer, 120 V E. Basin shall be 36" dia. x 48" deep fiberglass with inlet(s) and anchor flange as required. F. Cover shall be 40" o.d. round steel, gasketed with all necessary openings including 4" vent connection. 2.09 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Furnish and install the following backflow preventers, as manufactured by Watts Regulator: 1. On cold water feed to heating boilers: No. 909-SQT-3/4" complete with bronze strainer; full port,bronze ball valve shut-offs, and No. 909-AG-C, 1" air gap and drain piping. B. This Subcontractor shall provide a spare parts repair kit for each 909 reduced pressure backflow preventer, to consist of a repair kit for the first check, second check, and relief valve. 15400-15 BOOK STORAGE L&S 847 00 manufacturer's recommendations, and, if necessary, shall be built into place as the building progresses. This Contractor shall be held responsible for the stability and proper support of all plumbing fixtures. C. Single Bowl Sink(P-1) 1. Sink- 19" x 18" self rimming single bowl 18 ga. stainless steel with sound deadening undercoat,punched for three(3)holes on ledge,Elkay LRAD- 1918-55-3. 2. Supply Fitting- Single lever swing spout faucet with 8" centers and heavy chrome plating,Delta No. 100,with laminar flow aerator,Omni or equal. Chrome plated supplies with wheel handle stops and chrome plated • escutcheon plates. 3. Drain- Stainless steel cup strainer with 1-1/2" tailpiece. 4. Trap-P-trap with cleanout nipple. D. Floor Drain(P-2) 1. Cast iron drain with invertible membrane clamping flange, adjustable 6" round Type"B" polished nickel bronze strainer. Zum ZNB-415 or equal by J.R. Smith or Wade. Provide flashing clamp for drains in slabs above ground floor level. Use toilet rooms and other furnished areas. Size to drawings. E. Hose Bib(P-3) Oft 1. Chicago Faucet Company No. 952 polished chrome plated faucet with No. E-97 hose end vacuum breaker, with No. 293-6 removable tee handle, or equal,by Wade or Woodford. ""` 2.08 DUPLEX SCREENLESS SEWAGE EJECTOR A. Furnish and install where shown on Plans, one Duplex set of Weil Series 2220 sewage ejectors, Model 2223, each pump having a capacity of 20 gpm against a TDH of 25 ft. B. Construction Features: 1. Galvanized floor plates and discharge pipes. 2. 1-1/4" diameter shaft, from coupling to impeller. BOOK STORAGE 15400-14 L&S 847 we 40 00 insulation with self-sealing lap, 1" thick for hot water, 1/2" thick for cold water. Insulation shall be one piece snap-on type. All exposed piping within 10'-0" of finished floor shall be insulated as noted above and shall be fully jacketed with a PVC cover. B. Fittings shall be insulated with mitered cut insulation applied over fittings with joints taped. Cold water piping shall also have mastic applied to all overlapping surfaces to form a vapor barrier. C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Any gaps or fishmouths shall be remade. D. Install a twelve (12") inch length of wood blocking at each hanger; insulation shall run continuous through the hanger. Jacket shall match adjacent insulation jacket. E. All exposed drain and water piping at handicapped lavatories shall be insulated with Truebro"Handi Lav-Guard",or equal,molded insulation kit. 2.06 ACCESS PANELS A. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves, balancing fittings, or cleanouts in masonry walls, plastered or gypsum wallboard walls or ceilings, shall be famished by the Plumbing Contractor and installed by tradesmen of wall or - ceiling finish. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12" x 12" min.); in walls, shall be Karp type DSC-214M "Universal" (12" x 12"); for drywall ceilings, shall be Karp Sesame Slim Trim Access Hatches, Type KSTDW/CAD(12"x 12"min.)with screw driver type lock. B. Access panels shall be K arp Associates Inc. I n ryco, Inc., Milcor Division, Birmingham Ornamental Iron,or equal. 2.07 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND F XTi F TRIMMINGS A. General Requirements: Reference made herein to numbers of plumbing fixtures to establish type and quality of materials. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of lock shield, loose key pattern stops for supplies shall be furnished and installed with fixtures. Exposed traps and supply pipes for all fixtures and equipment shall be chrome plated and connected to the rough piping systems at the wall. Wall escutcheons shall be chromium plated or nickel plated brass with polished,bright surfaces. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish all supports, brackets, bolts, etc. for proper installation of all fixtures requiring support. They shall be in accordance with the BOOK STORAGE 15400-13 L&S 847 G. Vacuum relief valves shall be Watts Model 36A- 3/4". H. Globe valves shall be as manufactured by Hammond IB-418 or IB-440. I. Pressure Reducing Valves 1. Pressure reducing valves (PRV) shall be as manufactured by Watts Regulator Co., Model U5B-GG with thermal bypass. No substitutions shall be allowed. «. 2. Furnish and install,where indicated on the Drawings,AMETEK/U.S. Gauge Co.'s Figure P500,2" diameter,0 lb. to 100 lbs. 2.03 HANGERS A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter& Paterson, Fee &Mason,or equal. B. For cast iron pipe- Grinnell Fig. 260, one to each length of cast iron pipe; at twelve foot(12')intervals for threaded piping. C. For hot, cold, and return water piping - Grinnell Fig. 70 at six foot (6) intervals for copper tubing 1-1/4" or less; ten foot (10) intervals for piping at 1-1/2" and larger. Install Fig. 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation. Hangers to be in- ^" stalled outside the insulation. Hangers for gas piping shall be installed at eight-foot (8)intervals. D. Hangers or supports shall be placed within one foot (1') of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over five feet (5) in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 1/2" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. 2.04 C'i.FANOUTS A. Where cleanouts occur in finished floors throughout the building,they shall be Zurn ZN-1405-2, nickel-bronze for concrete finish floor; Zurn ZN-1405-7 nickel-bronze recessed for resilient floors; Zurn ZN-1405-7 for ceramic tile floors; ZN-1405-14 for carpeted floors;or equal by J. R. Smith or Wade. aw 2.05 INSULATION A. All new and existing water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex closed cell pipe am BOOK STORAGE 15400-12 US 847 �* C. Provide gas cocks for sizes V and smaller, and provide gas rated ball valves on gas piping 1-1/4" and larger with tee handles. fW D. rate Valves: Where indicated on the Drawings, all gate valves 4" and larger, shall be Class 125 iron body bronze mounted with body and bonnet conforming to 200 psi wog non-shock cast iron, flanged ends, with Teflon packing, two- *" piece packing gland assembly, Hammond Figure 1R1138, Stockman, or equal. 2. Valves 3" and smaller where indicated on the Drawings shall be Class 125. Body and bonnets shall be of ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, solid disc, copper silicone alloy stem, brass packing gland, Teflon packing, and malleable hand wheel, solder end, Stockham Figure B-104, Hammond 1R1138, or equal. 3. Valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Hammond,American Valve, or equal. E. Balancing Valves: 1. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install balance circuit setter, with calibrated scale, with bronze body and disc and connections for differential pressure meter. 2. Balancing valves shall be Tour&Anderson. F. Check Valves 1. Check valves shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Drawings. Checks up to 2" shall be Class 125. Solder ends,body and caps shall be ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, swing type disc, Stockham Figure B-309. 2. Check valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted with body and cap conforming to ASTM A126, Class B cast iron,flanged, swing type disc,Stockham Figure G-931. 3. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Jenkins, Lunkenheimer, or equal. BOOK STORAGE 15400-11 US 847 C. Alternate Bid No. 1 Furnish all labor and material required to install the new condensate drains for the fan coil unit on the first second floor as identified on the Drawings. See Drawings for full extent of Scope. on PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS "' A. All soil, waste drain, and vent piping in accessible areas 2-1/2" and larger, shall be cast iron"no hub", ASA Group 022 pipe and fittings,joined with cast iron clamps *" as manufactured by"Clamp-All". No substitutions will be allowed. All soil, waste, and vent below slab shall be service weight, cast iron pipe with oakum and lead, sealed gas and watertight. In lieu of lead and oakum joint piping, below slab may be service weight with push-on rubber rings. B. In lieu of cast iron piping, pipe sizes 3" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper pipe with solder fittings. C. All waste lines 2" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper. All vent lines 2" and smaller shall be type"M" copper. D. All hot, cold, and return hot water piping within the building shall be hard copper Type "L" seamless drawn tubing, assembled with sweat fittings. All solders used shall be lead free, cadmium free, "Silberbrite-100", or equal, complying with the latest issue of ANSI A-5.8 publications. All exposed runs to all toilet fixtures and sinks shall be .� chrome plated. 2.02 BALL VALVES A. On water lines inside the building, ball valves shall be as manufactured by Watts Series 136001. No substitutions will be allowed. Valves shall be provided with stainless steel ball,reinforced Teflon seats and seals bronze body, 400-psi wog, and positive 100%shut-off. B. Drain valves at all low points shall be 1/2" or 3/4" solder by 3/4" hose end with attached cap and chain. BOOK STORAGE 15400-10 L&S 847 w 1.18 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts, and equipment of all foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation. Thoroughly flush all piping of any oils, burrs, solder, and flux. Replace strainers and filters at completion of cleaning. B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner. C. During the course of construction,all equipment and pipes shall be capped to insure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter. D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish, debris, and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean. 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1. B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work,buried sanitary, vent and water piping and valves, and for piping installation, valve numbers shall be added to these Drawings prior to submittal to the Architect. In addition to the above all revised areas shall be clearly marked with a revision bubble. 1.20 ALTERNATE BIDS A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the Plumbing Subcontractor is more specifically described below. B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and reasonably incidental to providing all Plumbing work specified and shown on the Drawings,less the cost of all extra work described in the Alternates. BOOK STORAGE 15400-9 L&S 847 AM Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Subcontractor shall video tape the instruction procedures an deliver two(2)copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or • the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read,with large sheets of drawings folded in. the manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The Manual shall include the following information: '4" 1. Description of systems. 2. Description of start-up,operation, and shutdown. Aw 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Lubrication chart. "o 5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 6. Valve chart. 7. List of recommended spare parts. 8. Copies of all service contracts. 9. Performance curves for pumps, etc. 10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. 1.17 GUARANTEE A. The Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster,wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. MR C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. am BOOK STORAGE 15400-8 L&S 847 as w Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (i.e. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4"in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Plumbing Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Plumbing Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1.15 WOK CONCEALED A. All piping, hangers and supports shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms,closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade, unless specifically so shown on the Drawings. When pipes are indicated to be installed in exterior walls, the Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that wall and pipe insulation is properly installed to protect them from freezing. 1.16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that BOOK STORAGE 15400-7 US 847 0M .w 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLIN A. Delivery: The Plumbing subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work .„ efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. All delivery and storage must be coordinated with the Smith College Physical Plant Department. The Plumbing Contractor shall take delivery of all pre-purchased plumbing fixtures and equipment, and shall be responsible for the proper handling, storage, and protection of these materials from that point on. Any damage or loss of these materials after delivery shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. �• B. Storage and Handling: The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss, which may occur, shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDMONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, 4" sockets,etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be 40 removed by the Plumbing Contractor. 4W 1.13 PROTECTION A. The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials W from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the "* Owner. 1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHIN A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing BOOK STORAGE 15400-6 L&S 847 a.w w remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 1.08 PERMITS.FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.09 TEMPORARY HOOK- T-PS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Section 01500. 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATION A. The Plumbing Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Plumbing Contractor shall not scale the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Plumbing Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions,at no additional cost. BOOK STORAGE 15400-5 L&S 847 MM so 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE so A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, aw except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification, and as approved by the Architect and Owner. Am B. The Plumbing Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in •.. accordance with the General Requirements. 1.06 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings,or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Plumbing Contractor shall submit to the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be fiunished. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review,making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Plumbing Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Plumbing Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications,the Plumbing Contractor will be required to BOOK STORAGE 15400-4 L&S 847 so ►► resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever, and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Plumbing Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Plumbing Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Plumbing Contractor shall co-ordinate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Plumbing Contractor shall also Punish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the 7. All final connections to all items of equipment furnished by others requiring water,gas, drain,and waste connections. 8. The disconnecting and removal of all existing piping systems, fixtures, and .. equipment interfering with, or made obsolete by, new construction. All piping, fixtures, and equipment (i.e. copper and brass piping, fittings and valves, mixing valves, water heaters and pumps, heat exchangers, and controls) to be removed is the property of the Owner and shall be delivered to such places designated by the Owner. Removal from the site of all obsolete material after the Owner's review shall be by this Contractor. .,. B. Refer to appropriate Division - 2 Sections for trenching and backfill required in conjunction with plumbing piping;not work of this Section. 1.03 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws,rules,regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes,rules or regulations; the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes,rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules * otherwise. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Plumbing Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superinten- dent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Plumbing Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work BOOK STORAGE 15400-2 US 847 was w SECTION 15400- PLUMBING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 1,as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements,which affect work under this Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all plumbing work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Sanitary waste storm drainage and venting systems inside the building, connecting to drainage systems within and to 10"-0" outside the building. Furnish piping,traps,flanges, seals, cleanouts,fixtures,drains,supports,and roof terminals. ' 2. Water service and sanitary sewer connecting to existing lines within the building. Provide valves, boxes, fittings and all required components for a complete installation. 3. Hot, cold and return hot water distribution systems. Furnish piping, fittings, insulation,supports,valves,water heater,and pump. - 4. Plumbing fixtures and supports. 5. Arrange for inspections and perform cleaning and testing. 6. Duplex sewage ejector pumps,piping, controls,and basin. BOOK STORAGE 15400-1 L&S 847 Lindgren&Sharpies.P.C.Consulting Engineers INDEX SECTION 15400-PLUMBING PART 1 -GENERAL PART 2-MATERIALS 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 2.09 BACKFLOW PREVENTORS 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK 1.03 CODES,ORDINANCES,AND INSPECTIONS PART 3 -INSTALLATION 1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS on 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.01 SOIL,WASTE,AND VENT PIPING 1.06 PRODUCTS 3.02 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE 1.07 SUBMITTALS 3.03 WATER PIPE FITTINGS& 1.08 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS CONNECTIONS 1.09 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 3.05 INSULATION 1.11 DELIVERY,STORAGE,&HANDLING 3.06 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 3.07 INSPECTION AND TESTS 1.13 PROTECTION 3.08 CLEANING UP 1.14 CUTTING&PATCHING 3.09 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 1.15 WORK CONCEALED 3.10 DISINFECTION 1.16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3.11 FIRE SAFING 1.17 GUARANTEE 1.18 CLEANING 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS - 1.20 ALTERNATES PART 2-MATERIALS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS 2.02 BALL VALVES 2.03 HANGERS 2.04 CLEANOUTS 2.05 INSULATION 2.06 ACCESS PANELS 2.07 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND PLUMBING TRIMMINGS 2.08 DUPLEX SCREENLESS SEWAGE EJECTOR BOOK STORAGE PLUMBING 15400 MM B. Gate Valves: Install supervised open gate valves so located to control all sources of ON water supply except fire department connections. Where there is more than one control valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve. C. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in the vertical position in proper direction of flow including the bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection. Install valve trim in accordance with the valve manufacturer's appropriate trim diagram. Test valve for proper operation. 3.05 FINAL CLOSEOUT A. Identification: Apply signs to control, drain, test, and alarm valves identifying their purpose and function. Provide lettering size and style selected by Architect/Engineer from NFPA's suggested styles. B. Adjustments: Place the system in operation with controls functioning. Adjust controls and apparatus for proper operation. Test thermometers and gauges for accuracy over the entire range. Remove and replace items found defective. MM BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-26 we. L&S 847 �w .re D. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 and larger connections. E. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions for rigid systems. F. Make connections between underground and above ground piping using an approved transition piece strapped or fastened to prevent separation. G. Install sleeve at pipe penetrations in basement and foundation walls. Refer to Division 15 Section, "Basic Materials and Methods". H. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes. I. Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gauge with a connection not less than 1/4" and having a soft metal seated globe valve arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal and where they will not be subject to freezing. J. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B 1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows. K. Flanged Joints: Align flanged surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer. L. Mechanical Grooved Joints: Cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with the couplings. M. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths,remove burrs and fins from pipe ends. 3.04 VALVE INSTALLATIONS A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, NFPA 13 and 14, and the authority having jurisdiction. _ BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-25 L&S 847 MM 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, and machine rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width,or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1. At all fire rated assemblies,prepare all penetrations for pipes and perimeters. E. Application 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. „ Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where neces- sary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. 3. Install fire safing around all pipe penetrations and sleeves passing through fire walls, ceilings, floors, etc. 3.03 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. C. Install unions in pipes 2" and smaller adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings. BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-24 .. US 847 s w� M q. Gamewell excess pressure pump kit shall include all necessary equipment as shown in Gamewell Bulletin 6010, typical piping diagram for wet pipe watchman's kit, Model No. M2700-13. Shall include S-1, S-2, S-3 switches, excess pressure pump, and supervisory panel, Model M2011-14. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 CLEANING AND TESTING A. Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler-piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in ANSI/NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers. B. After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system of zone being tested. Test dry-pipe hydrostatically except, in freezing conditions, test with air at pressures not less than 50 psi, for period of 2 hours. Check system for leakage. Leave differential dry-valve clappers open during test,to prevent damage. C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with ANSI/NFPA standards for "little or no leakage", and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. 3.02 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including,but not limited to the following: 1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers, including all penetrations through existing plaster ceiling for the installation of Attic sprinklers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-23 L&S 847 P► an f. Horizontal sidewall sprinkler heads shall be Star Model "E" with am white finish, temperature 165°F unless noted otherwise g. Dry horizontal sidewall shall be equal to Central Model H-1, 1" NPT, 165°F. h. Dry pendent sprinkler shall be equal to Central Model A-1 recessed type with white cover, extended dry pendent, 1" NPT, 165°F. i. Tamper switches shall be equal to Potter Electrical Signal Company, Model OSYS-B, small case, and shall be installed on all control valves for the sprinkler system. j. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection specialties of the following Grinnell Fire Protection Systems, Co., Inc., Viking Corporation, or equal. k. Pre-action alarm valve shall be equal to Viking "Total Pac" single interlocked pre-action system complete with deluge valve, solenoid valve, 1/2 H.P. air compressor, air maintenance device, water inlet heater, and a steel enclosure cabinet with all necessary controls. , 1. Flush mounted Fire Department pumper connection shall be wall mounted cast brass body, dual drop clappers, brass plugs with chains, all with rough chrome-plated finish and lettering on escutcheon reading, "Automatic Sprinkler", equal to Potter-Roemer. Hose connection sizes and threads shall match Northampton Fire Department standards. m. Automatic ball drips, as manufactured by Potter-Roemer shall be +� Fig. 5982, size 3/4", of straight design in case brass. Install in horizontal position only. n. Swing Check valve shall be equal to Central, Model "80" with tapping for automatic ball drip, size as required. o. Double check valve assembly w/metered bypass as noted on plans, to be furnished and installed by the Sprinkler Subcontractor, DEP approved for backflow prevention, Watts Model 709DDC. Provide test kits Model TK-7-BFP, and two repair kits. p. Swing check valve shall be equal to Central, Model "80" with tapping for automatic ball drip size as required. BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-22 ,w L&S 847 am .er renewable composition disc and bronze seat ring, bolted cover, flanged ends. Fairbanks: 0711 Jenkins: 729 Stockham: G-940 Walworth: 8883-LT 4. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. 5. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. F. Fire Protection Specialties 1. Provide fire protection specialties, UL listed, in accordance with the following listing. Provide sizes and types,which mate and match piping and equipment connections. a. Upright sprinkler heads shall be Viking Corp., Model "M" standard upright sprinkler head, rough brass. Temperature rating 165°F or as required by the insurance underwriter. b. Semi-recessed dry pendant sprinkler heads shall be Viking Model "M" chrome plated head with Type "F-1" recessed escutcheon, rated at 165°F unless otherwise noted; to be installed in all occupied spaces. C. Spare sprinklers shall be provided in one 12-head cabinet equal to Viking, Model A-1 cabinet. Each cabinet shall have an assortment of heads as used on the job and also an approved type sprinkler head • wrench;mount cabinet in alarm check valve area. d. Head guards shall be equal to Central Model 1 for upright sprinklers in areas specified on drawings. e. Drain and test connections shall be equal to AGF Model 1000 with sight glass, and test orifice. OM BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-21 L&S 847 am 10. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. E. Valves 1. Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; ` provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with instal- lation requirements. Provide end connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. b. Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn. 2. Gate Valves a. Threaded End, 2" and Smaller: FM, UL-listed, 175 psi,bronze body, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke,rising stem. Crane: 459 Fairbanks: 0222 Hammond: IB681 Jenkins: 275U Stockham: B-133 Walworth: 904 b. Flanged End, 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, UL listed, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke,rising stem. Crane: 467 Fairbanks: 0412 Hammond: IR 1154 * Jenkins: 825-A Stockham: G-634 Walworth: 8713-F 3. Check Valves a. 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted, BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-20 .w L&S 847 e. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one of the following: B-Line Systems Inc. Carpenter and Patterson, Inc. Corner& Lada Co., Inc. Elcen Metal Products Co. Fee&Mason Mfg. Co. ITT Grinnell Corp. 5. Install building attachments at required locations on structural steel for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated on MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. 6. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. 7. Support sprinkler piping independently of other piping. 8. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. 9. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed to ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded. BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-19 L&S 847 am 1. Provide factory-fabricated piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size. a. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1, for piping larger than 4". b. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7, for piping 4" and less. C. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. 2. Provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP- 58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturers published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger- rod attachments to suit hanger rods. .. a. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. b. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. C. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. d. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17. 3. Provide factory-fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to suit buil- ding substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufact- urer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. a. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19. b. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20. .� C. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23. d. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27. BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-18 L&S 847 ..w wAw C. Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect. Install sleeves so that piping will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1/4" above level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves. d. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following: Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and pipe with .■ oakum, caulk with lead, on both sides. 2. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe sleeve `extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas;prime paint finish for unoccupied areas. a. Pipe Escutcheons for all areas: Provide chrome plated sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged. b. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe escutcheons of one of the following: Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. Producers Specialty&Mfg. Co. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co. C. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with adjoining surface. D. Supports,Anchors, and Seals BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-17 L&S 847 Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated. E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults, Elevator Machine Room, and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run ' through electrical spaces. Any piping intended to be run through electrical spaces shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to installation. F. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI 132.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compounder pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. G. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide , uniform compression of gaskets. H. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making .� grooves in pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and prepare for application of specified coatings(if any). J. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test each natural section of each piping system independently, but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressures exceed valve pressure rating. Fill ..6 each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. 1. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: •• a. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. b. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade, or in exterior walls, caulked between sleeve and pipe. BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-16 L&S 847 Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved. (10) Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved piping products of the following: ITT Grinnell Corp. Victaulic Co. B. Piping above ground and within the building shall conform to all requirements of NFPA 13 and shall be as follows: 1. Exposed sprinkler piping, subject to vandalism (stair halls and similar areas), shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe, welded, suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure. 2. All concealed piping and all exposed sprinkler piping in Mechanical Equipment Rooms 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be at the option of the Fire Protection Subcontractor, either Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings or standard weight roll grooved pipe with grooved fittings. 3. All exposed sprinkler piping, 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings. 4. Schedule 40 seamless red brass pipe with brass screwed fittings suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure. 5. Type "L" seamless drawn hard copper tubing with solder joint pressure fittings,where noted on the drawings. C. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently leak proof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints • and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping. D. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by dia- grams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-15 L&S 847 (1) Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47. (2) Coupling Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536. (3) Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages grooved or shouldered pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast in two or more parts, secure together during assembly with nuts and bolts. Permit degree of contraction and expansion as specified in manufacturer's latest published literature. (4) Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure responsive so that internal pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers having properties as designated by ASTM D 2000. (5) Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183, minimum tensile 110,000-psi. .a. (6) Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning engaging machine-cut hole in pipe, encas- ing elastomeric gasket conforming to pipe outside diameter around hole, and lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together during assembly with nuts and bolts. ! (7) Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. (8) Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel bolt hole alignment. Malleable Iron: ASTM 47. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. (9) Grooves: Conform to the following: Standard Steel: Square cut. BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-14 L&S 847 of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet glass. e. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in rooms where indicated or, if not otherwise indicated,where directed by Architect. £ Furnish complete chart and flow diagram of entire system listing the valve number, fluid controlled, and zone reference location for all valves corresponding to the tag numbers. The chart shall be framed under glass and hung in the Fire Protection Equipment Room where directed. Furnish two(2) extra copies of the chart to the Architect. g. Furnish and install a laminated red phenolic plate with engraved white lettering for each zone control flow switch and isolation valve. Nameplates shall be located adjacent to all exposed and concealed valves, approximately 12"below finished ceiling. ig 2.02 PIPE,TUBE,AND FITTINGS A. Interior Piping 1. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, A 106 or A 120: except comply with ASTM A 53 or A 106 where close coiling or bending is required. a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40. b. Fittings: Class 125, cast-iron threaded, ANSI B16.4, or flanged, ANSI B16.1. C. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; cut- groove type for piping 2-1/2" and larger only. (1) Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135. (2) Pipe Weight: Schedule 10 for 5" and smaller; 0.134" wall thickness for 6". (3) Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll-groove or mechanical locking type. d. Grooved Piping Products(for use on pipes 2-1/2" and larger) BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-13 L.&S 847 a. For external diameters less than 6",provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360°around pipe at each location, fastened as follows: Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. "R b. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature, which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Ar- chitect. C. Locate pipe markers as follows: (1) Near each valve and control device. (2) Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25'in congested areas of w piping and equipment. (3) Branch piping need not be marked. 3. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass valve tags with printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16" high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Provide tags on all valves and control devices. a. Provide 1-1/8" sq.brass tags with black lettering. b. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or •�. beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. *� C. Submit valve schedule for piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves, which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses,by special "flags", in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1. d. For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames a no BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-12 US 847 do am 1.18 ALTERNATES A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the Fire Protection Subcontractor is more specifically described below. B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and reasonably incidental to providing all fire Protection work specified and shown on the Drawings, less the cost of all extra work described in the Alternates. C. Alternate Bid Item No. 1 Price above the base bid for furnishing all labor, materials, and other cost in connection with furnishing and installing a new fire protection system in the five(5) new offices located on the second floor. See Drawings for full extent of Scope. „ PART 2 -MATERIALS 2.01 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings,temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicat- ed, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials, which match pipe materials used in fire protection „ piping systems. Where more than one type of material or product is indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Basic Identification 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification materials of one of the following: Allen Systems, Inc. Brady(W. H.) Co., ; Signmark Div. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc. Seton Name Plate Corp. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, color- coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-11 L&S 847 IM Subcontractors of other trades, and shall furnish any information necessary MW to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. MW 2. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this Subcontractor shall prepare composite sketches at a suitable scale, not less than 1/4" = F-0", clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation AW to the work of other trades. 3. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible go problem areas by this Subcontractor without first coordinating the installation of same with other trades and the Architect. This Subcontractor, at his own expense, shall relocate all uncoordinated piping and other equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural finishes installed by other trades. 4. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment in hung ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision before the piping and/or equipment of other trades is installed. 5. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required to use common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits, raceways, piping, ductwork and other materials, this Subcontractor must plan and locate the positions of equipment to be fur- +.. nished under this Section so that all items including piping and/or equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. Location and positioning shall be done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect. 6. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pilasters, partitions or walls, as shown on the Contract Architectural or Structural Drawings showing foundations, floor plans,roof plans, and details. dk 7. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural design or building structure, shall be changed as directed by the go Architect, and all costs incidental to such changes shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner. BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-10 L&S 847 5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 6. Valve chart. 7. List of recommended spare parts. 8. Copies of all service contracts. 9. Performance curves for pumps, etc. 10. Lists of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. 1.16 GUARANTEE A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to �,. be defective during this period. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Ar- chitect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS ! A. Refer to Division 1 for Record Drawings. B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions shall be indicated of concealed work, fire protection lines, valves, and zone flow switches. All changes must be clearly marked with a bubble drawn around the area of work effected by the change. C. Co-ordination of Trades 1. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall give full co-operation to the BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-9 L&S 847 aw AW B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the individual Subcontractor. 1.14 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping shall be installed exposed except where piping is to be installed above new acoustic panels. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior .s exposure above grade. 1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply ..o qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The Manual shall include the following information: 1. Description of systems. 2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown. 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Lubrication chart. BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-8 L&S 847 all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. 1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his Bid. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications and Plans are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied,in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall not scale the drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work r and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING ' A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and equipment to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Fire Protection Subcontractor. BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-7 L&S 847 III♦ on A. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall submit to the Architect eight(8) sets of catalogue cuts or manufacturers' data sheets, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. Submit hydraulic calculations and scaled layout drawings for fire protection pipe and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, elevations and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate equipment. 1. Shop Drawings are subject to review and will require approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization (IRI Incorporated) and the Northampton Fire Department prior to submitting to the Architect for approval. 2. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check the shop drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes, which may be required. 3. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Fire Protection Subcontractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in ., accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsi- bility for errors in shop drawings shall remain with the individual Subcon- tractor. „+ 4. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which shop drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Fire Protection Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 5. Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13, and also that system is operational, complete, and has no defects. 1.09 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-6 .. L&S 847 that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Fire Protection Subcontractor to give proper information, as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. F. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. In no case shall piping be installed laterally in thickness of slab or deck. G. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. All piping shall be installed concealed in finished spaces. H. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. J. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications and shall field verify all existing conditions before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1.07 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-5 L&S 847 am 1.05 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 'R A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code ow and local laws,rules,regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. X0 Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement ` Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work. o 1.06 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced aw workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and , expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Fire Protection Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontrac- tors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Fire Protection Subcontractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Fire Protection Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-4 ' L&S 847 Nre *► water flow data in writing from local authority. Co-ordinate work of this Section with all trades to avoid interference with ductwork, HVAC and plumbing, piping, electrical work, structure, etc. Final sprinkler head locations shall be subject to Architect's approval. The number of heads and pipe sizes may be increased or reduced due to hydraulic calculations or the installation of revised heads, provided the revised heads are UL listed and F.M. approved and meet NFPA 13, Northampton Fire Department, and Insurance Underwriter's criteria. Additionally, all heads shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 recommendations. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire protection piping systems products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five(5)years. w B. NFPA Code: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler System". C. FM Compliance: Comply with Factory Mutual "Approval Guide". D. FM Labels: Provide sprinkler products bearing FM approval labels. NO E. UL Labels: Provide fire sprinkler piping products, which have been approved and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. F. Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing regulations pertaining to fire sprinkler piping. Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work. G. Final installation of system is subject to approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization and local Fire Department. H. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification. I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-3 L&S 847 dw system. System shall be installed in all spaces, unless otherwise noted, with Fire Department connection and system test and drain connections. 7. Disconnect and remove all existing sprinkler heads and piping made " obsolete by or interfering with new construction. B. Related work, to be performed under other sections of his Specification shall include the following: 1. Wiring of flow switches, tamper switches, electric bell and control panel back to the fire alarm panel shall be by the Electrical Subcontractor, coordinated and as directed by the Fire Protection Subcontractor. 2. Cutting and patching. C. All systems and equipment furnished under this section which employ computers, micro-processors, or chips shall be "Year 2000 compliant" i.e., the changing of the calendar time from 1999-2000 shall not result in any malfunction or degradation of the system's or equipment's function. Manufacture's written certification of compliance shall be included with the system or equipment shop drawing submittal. 1.03 SYSTEM DESIGN A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform a water flow test, and with this information, shall calculate pipe sizes and sprinkler head configuration and orifice sizes in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Sprinkler head and pipe run locations, as shown on the drawings, are to be interpreted as diagrammatic only. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall produce a design based on actual available water pressure and submit it to the Architect for approval before beginning fabrication and installation. C. Design Criteria: Pipe sizing and sprinkler head layout shown on the drawings is provided to indicate a suggested pipe routing, zoning, and sprinkler head location, and shall not be used for estimating purposes. Location of piping and heads shall be co-ordinated with all other trades. Actual pipe sizing, types of heads, and layout shall be based on a hydraulically designed system in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13, the Northampton Fire Department, and the Insurance Underwriter (I.R.I.). Location of sprinkler heads, in relation to the ceiling light Aw hazard occupancy. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall prepare working drawings and hydraulic calculations per NFPA 13 and shall obtain Northampton Fire Department and the Colleges Insurance Underwriter approval prior to start of No work. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform water flow tests or obtain BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-2 am L&S 847 ar SECTION 15300-FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division 1,and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements,which affect work under this, Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and services necessary for, and reasonably incidental to, the complete installation of all fire protection work specified herein and/or indicated on the drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Fire protection service piping from the existing service line located in the existing building. 2. Complete dry pipe pre-action automatic sprinkler system. System shall be installed in all spaces, unless otherwise noted, including renovation to existing building sprinkler system. 3. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish all labor and materials required for his own hoisting, rigging, and scaffolding during the entire course of the project. 4. Provide and install double check valve backflow preventer assembly per DEP requirements. 5. Wet pipe alarm check valve stations complete with, but not necessarily limited to, line size valve, retarding chamber, electric and hydraulic alarms, full indicating, control, drain trim, and excess pressure pump. 6. Complete wet pipe automatic sprinkler system and wet pipe stand pipe BOOK STORAGE PAGE 15300-1 L&S 847 Lindgren&Sharples,P.C.Consulting Engineers INDEX SECTION 15300-FIRE PROTECTION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK 1.03 SYSTEM DESIGN 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.05 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 1.06 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1.07 PRODUCTS 1.08 SUBMITTALS 1.09 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS go 1.10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1.14 WORK CONCEALED 1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1.16 GUARANTEE 1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS 1.18 ALTERNATES PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS 2.02 PIPE,TUBE,AND FITTINGS PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 CLEANING AND TESTING 3.02 FIRE SAFING 3.03 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION 3.04 VALVE INSTALLATIONS 3.05 FINAL CLOSEOUT OR BOOK STORAGE FIRE PROTECTION 15300 Smith College Book Storage Facility 40 DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS Smith College Book Storage Facility H. Hinged Door: Door frame of 1-1/4-by-1/2-by-1/8-inch steel channels with I-1/4-by-1/8-inch flat steel bar cover plates on 3 sides,and 1/8-inch-thick angle strike bar and cover on lock side. Door is double-acting and interfaces with alarm system:coordinate as required. I. Finish: Manufacturer's standard,shop-applied enamel finish in manufacturer's standard color. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Installation: Erect partitions plumb,rigid,properly aligned,and securely fastened in place,according to Wo Drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide additional field bracing as shown or necessary for rigid, secure installation. Installer to provide additional clips and bracing as required. C. Adjust moving components for smooth operation without binding. D. Touch up damaged finish after completing installation using field-applied paint to match color of shop- applied finish. oft END OF SECTION 10605 !Aw OR on 40 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605 -2 am Smith College Book Storage Facility w. SECTION 10605-WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 1.1 GENERAL .. A. Submittals: Submit Product Data and Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation details. am 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Am J p q � ,provide products by one of the following: 1. Acorn Wire and Iron Works,Inc. 2. G-S Company(The). .. 3. Hoosier Fence Co.,Inc.(The). 4. Indiana Wire Products,Inc. 5. Kentucky Metal Products Co. 6. King Wire Partitions,Inc. me 7. Lakeside Wire and Iron Co. 8. Miller Wire Works,Inc. 9. SpaceGuard Products. 10. Wire and Iron Products,Inc. +*�► B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 853. C. Steel Channels,Angles,Plates,and Bars: ASTM A 36. D. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 568. E. Cold-Rolled Steel Channels: Formed from steel sheet. w.e F. Square Steel Tubing: Cold-formed structural steel tubing,ASTM A 500. G. Wire Mesh Partitions: As follows: 1. Mesh: 0.135-inch-diameter,intercrimped steel wire woven into 1-1/2-inch diamond mesh. 2. Vertical Frame Members: 1-1/4-by-5/8-by-0.1046-inch cold-rolled steel C-Section channels with 1/4-inch-diameter bolt holes 18 inches o.c. 3. Horizontal Frame Members: 1-by-1/2-by-1/8-inch cold-rolled steel channels. 4. Horizontal Reinforcing Members: 1-by-1/2-by-1/8-inch cold-rolled steel channels or two 1-by- 1/2-inch steel channels. 5. Vertical Stiffening Bars: For freestanding partitions 12 feet high or over, provide flat steel bar stiffener bars. 6. Top Capping Bars: 2-1/4-by-1-inch cold-rolled steel channels, secured to top framing channels with 1/4-inch-diameter"U"bolts spaced not more than 28 inches o.c. 7. Corner Posts: 1-1/4-by-1-1/4-by-1/8-inch steel angles with floor shoe and 1/4-inch- diameter bolt holes to align with bolt holes in vertical frame members. 8. Line Posts: 3-inch by 4.1-1b steel channel line posts with 5-by-18-by-1/4-inch steel base plates located at recommended intervals. 9. Intersection Posts: 1-1/4-by-1-1/4-inch tubular steel posts with floor shoe and 1/4-inch-diameter bolt holes aligned for bolting to adjacent panels. MW 10. Floor Shoes: Cast metal,to provide approximately 3 inches of clear space between finished floor and bottom horizontal frame members. Furnish units with set screws for leveling. 11. Sheet Metal Base: Panels of 0.0598-inch-thick steel sheets,welded or bolted to frames. an WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605- 1 Smith College Book Storage Facility �n SECTION 10100 -VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 1.1 General: A. Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Samples: For selection of colors, patterns, and textures and verification of compliance with requirements. a. Tackable Surface Panels: Color charts showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 1.2 Products: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products of one of the following: 1. Tackable Surface Panels: a. Carolina Chalkboard Co. b. Claridge Products and Equipment,Inc. C. Greensteel,Inc. ! ' B. Solid Colored Homogenous Resilient Tackable Surface Panel: Mildew-resistant, washable, laminated to 1/2-inch-thick homosote or cork sheet. Provide flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. C. Finishes:Color to be selected by architect. 1.3 Execution: A. Install units in locations and mounting heights indicated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Keep perimeter lines straight, plumb, and level. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets,anchors,trim,and accessories necessary for a complete installation. B. Coordinate job-site-assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories. Join parts with a neat, precision fit. C. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 10100 �w VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 1 Smith College Book Storage Facility �w 40 Oft 4. 40"` DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES am Smith College Book Storage Facility 3. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the application am method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface. 4. Apply additional coats if undercoats,stains,or other conditions show through final coat of paint ma until paint film is of uniform finish,color,and appearance. 5. The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures are in place. Extend coatings in these areas to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. as Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. H. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned,pretreated,or otherwise mo prepared for painting as soon as practicable and before subsequent surface deterioration. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried. I. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush,roller,spray or other applicators am according to manufacturers directions. I. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied. am 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet,velvet back,or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended for the material and texture required. ,w J. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. K. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. L. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats,apply a prime coat to material to be painted or finished that has not been prime-coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears,to ensure a finish coat with no bum-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color,texture,and coverage. Remove,refinish,or repaint work not complying with specified requirements. N. Cleanup: At the end of each work day,remove empty cans,rags,rubbish,and other discarded paint materials from the site. I. After completing painting,clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by ..� washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. O. Protection: Protect work of other trades,whether being painted or not,against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning,repairing or replacing,and repainting,as acceptable to Architect. P. Provide "Wet Paint"signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades,touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. END OF SECTION 0990 PAINTING 09900 4 40 Smith College Book Storage Facility MR C. Preparation: Remove hardware and hardware accessories,plates,machined surfaces,lighting fixtures,and similar items already installed that are not to be painted,or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items,if necessary,to completely paint the items ON and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area,have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. D. Cleaning: Clean substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet,newly painted surfaces. E. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk,dust,dirt,grease,oils,and release agents. Roughen to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing,use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt,oil,and other foreign substances with scrapers,mineral spirits,and sandpaper,as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small,dry,seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. b. Prime, stain,or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides,and backsides of wood,including cabinets,counters,cases,and paneling. C. Seal tops,bottoms,and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop-coated;remove oil,grease,dirt,loose mill scale,and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning !! methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council. a. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush,clean with solvents and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. F. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's directions. 1. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density;stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and,if necessary,strain material before using. ` 2. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. G. Application: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. Do not paint over dirt,rust,scale,grease, moisture,scuffed surfaces,or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1. Paint colors,surface treatments,and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. PAINTING 09900-3 Smith College Book Storage Facility H. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original,unopened packages and containers sm bearing manufacturer's name and label with the product trade name manufacturer's instructions. I. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum , ambient temperature of 45 deg F(7 deg C). Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. w, J. Project Conditions: Do not apply paint in snow,rain, fog, or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent,or at temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg C)above the dew point,or to damp or wet surfaces. K. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F(10 deg C)and 90 deg F(32 deg C). L. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding .r air temperatures are between 45 deg F(7 deg C)and 95 deg F(35 deg C). 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Paint Materials,General: Provide block fillers,primers,finish coat materials,and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application,as demonstrated by the manufacturer,based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. E. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range of standard colors. sm .w. 1.3 EXECUTION 4W A. Examination: Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with requirements. Do not begin application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. am B. Coordination: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request,furnish information on characteristics of fmish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. .. 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. om an PAINTING 09900-2- an 44 Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 09900 - PAINTING 1.1 GENERAL wu A. This Section includes surface preparation,painting,and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation,priming,and finish coats specified are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatments. B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in the schedules,except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned,paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated,the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. C. Painting is not required on prefinished items,finished metal surfaces,concealed surfaces,operating parts,and labels. 1. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories,Factory Mutual,or other code-required 4W labels or equipment name,identification,performance rating,or nomenclature plates. D. Submittals: Submit the following: po 1. Product data for each paint system specified,including block fillers and primers. a. Provide the manufacturer's technical information including label analysis and instructions for No handling,storage,and application of each material proposed for use. b. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating,finish system,and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 3. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied,with texture to simulate actual conditions,on representative samples of the actual substrate.Use representative colors when preparing samples for review.. 1) Concrete Masonry: Two 4-by-8-inch samples of masonry,with mortar joint in the center,for each fmish and color. 2) Painted Wood: Two 12-inch-square samples of each color and material on hardboard. 3) Ferrous Metal: Two 4-inch-square samples of flat metal and two 8-inch-long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. 4 E. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have resulted in a construction record of successful in-service performance. F. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. G. Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior components,duplicate finishes of prepared samples. !! 1. Final acceptance of colors will be from job-applied samples. PAINTING 09900- i 40 am Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC-SLV 8/94 A. Verify that subfloors and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements a` specified in this Section and those of the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. MW 2. Carpet cushion manufacturer. B. Level subfloor within 1/4 inch in 10 feet(6 nm:in 3 m),noncumulative,in all directions. 1. Use leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks,holes,and depressions in subfloor. C. Remove subfloor coatings,including curing compounds,and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap,wax,oil,or silicone. D. Broom or vacuum clean subfloors to be covered with carpet. Following cleaning, examine subfloors for moisture,alkaline salts,carbonation,or dust. E. Concrete-Subfloor Preparation: Apply concrete-slab primer, according to manufacturer's directions, where recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. 2. Carpet cushion manufacturer. F. Wood-Subfloor Preparation: Apply wood-floor sealer, according to manufacturer's directions, where recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. 2. Carpet cushion manufacturer. "" G. Resilient-Flooring Substrate Preparation: Replace missing pieces of existing resilient flooring or patch to level as recommended by the following: at 1. Carpet manufacturer. 2. Carpet cushion manufacturer. on H. Direct Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8: "Direct Glue-Down." I. Stretch-in Installation: Comply with CRI 104,Section 11: "Stretch-in Utilizing Tackless Strip." am J. Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104,Section 12: "Carpet on Stairs." K. Comply with carpet manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet;maintain oft uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. L. Install carpet cushion seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams. so M. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. N. Protection: Comply with CRI 104, Section 15: "Protection of Indoor Installation." " END OF SECTION 09680 CARPET 09680-2 40 Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC-SLV 8/94 qM SECTION 09680-CARPET 1.1 GENERAL A. Allowances:Furnish carpet at a unit cost allowance of$25.per square yard. B. Submittals: Submit Product Data for each type of carpet,carpet cushion,and the following: 1. Shop Drawings showing carpet type,color,and dye lot; seam locations,types, and methods;type of subfloor;and type of installation. 2. Samples of each type of carpet material required. 3. Schedule of carpet using same room designations indicated on Drawings. 4. Maintenance data for carpet and cushion to include in the operation and maintenance manual. C. Carpet Surface Flammability: Passes CPSC 16 CFR,Part 1630. 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less per ASTM E 84. D. Carpet Cushion Surface Flammability: Passes CPSC 16 CFR,Part 1630. 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less per ASTM E 84. E. Furnish full-width carpet equal to 5 percent of amount installed, packaged with protective covering for storage,and identified with labels clearly describing contents,before installation begins. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the products specified at end of this Section. B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: As recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. 2. Carpet cushion manufacturer. C. Adhesives: Water-resistant,mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated and to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet as recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. 2. Carpet cushion manufacturer. D. Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood in strips as required to match cushion thickness and in compliance with CRI 104, 11.3. E. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. 1.3 EXECUTION CARPET 09680- 1 Smith College a, Book Storage facility A. Examine areas where installation of products specified in this Section will occur,with Installer present,to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with manufacturer's requirements. 1. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 before beginning installation. 2. For wood subfloors verify that underlayment surface is free of surface irregularities and substances with potential to interfere with adhesive bond,show through surface,or stain products specified in �+! this Section. B. Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive products specified in this Section. +■* C. Installation: Install products specified in this Section using methods indicated according to manufacturer's installation directions. 1. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns,pilasters, casework, and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable. 2. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact of �u base with horizontal and vertical substrates. 3. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates,fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 4. Form comers on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. "*F 5. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials of type indicated and secure with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that otherwise would be exposed. 6. Apply resilient accessories to stairs as indicated. D. Cleaning: Clean products specified in this Section after installation and 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion. Apply protective polish according to resilient accessory manufacturer's directions. an END OF SECTION 09678 so at am an on we so ■w RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678-2 Smith College Book Storage facility so SECTION 09678-RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1.1 GENERAL A. Submittals: In addition to product data submit the following. 1. Samples in manufacturer's standard sizes,but not less than 12 inches long, of each different color and pattern of product specified. 2. Maintenance data for products specified in this Section,to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. B. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form of each different material,style and color of resilient wall base installed. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products specified in each Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. C. Vinyl Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS-W-40, Type II, and requirements specified in the Vinyl Wall Base Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. D. Vinyl Stair Treads: Products of style suitable for use indicated and complying with FS RR-T-650, Composition B, and requirements specified in Vinyl Stair Accessory Product Data Sheet at end of this 1A![ Section. E. Risers: Product of same manufacturer as stair treads and complying with requirements specified in Stair Accessory Data Sheet at end of this Section. F. Stringers: Product of same manufacturer as stair treads and complying with requirements specified in Stair Accessory Data Sheet at end of this Section. G. Vinyl Accessories: Products complying with requirements specified in Vinyl Accessory Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. H. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. I. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. J. Stair Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates not conforming to tread contours. K. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient flooring product and substrate conditions indicated. 1.3 EXECUTION RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678- 1 40 ON Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC-SLV 8/91 E. Cleaning: Clean resilient tile floors after installation and 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections am intended to establish date of Substantial Completion. Apply protective polish according to floor tile manufacturer's directions. END OF SECTION 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660-2 ON Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC-SLV 8/91 SECTION 09660-RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 1.1 GENERAL A. Submittals: In addition to product data,submit the following. 1. Samples of each type,color,and pattern of resilient floor tile. 2. Maintenance data for resilient floor tile, to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. B. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each class,wearing surface,color,pattern,and size of resilient floor tile installed. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F 1066, Composition 1 (nonasbestos formulated B. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum mill finish,butt type for concealed anchorage. C. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type recommended by flooring manufacturer. D. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by tile manufacturer for applications indicated. E. Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant type recommended by tile manufacturer to suit resilient floor rile products and substrate conditions indicated. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Examine areas where installation of tiles will occur,with Installer present,to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for tile installation and comply with file manufacturer's requirements. 1. For wood subfloors verify that underlayment surface is free of surface irregularities and substances with potential to interfere with adhesive bond,show through surface,or stain file. 2. For concrete subfloors use levelling and patching compoubnds as required to fill cracks,holes,and depressions in subfloors. po B. Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive tile. C. Installation: Comply with tile manufacturer's installation directions and other requirements indicated. 1. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls,discounting minor offsets, so tile widths at opposite edges of room are equal to one another and are not less than one-half of a tile. 2. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged. 3. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installing on top of finished file floor,install tile before these items are installed. 04 D. Install metal edge strips where indicated,using countersunk stainless steel anchors. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660- 1 ow Smith College Book Storage Facility a. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 4. b. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 0.059850-inch minimum (uncoated) base metal thickness, 7/16-inch-wide flanges by 1-1/2-inch-deep steel channels,475 lb per 1000 feet with rust-inhibitive paint finish. .w 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: am a. Armstrong World Industries,Inc. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation. C. USG Interiors,Inc. Am 1.3 EXECUTION MW A. General: Install acoustical tile ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturer's instructions and CISCA"Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636. 2. CISCA Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA"Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings." 3. U.B.C.Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems: U.B.C. Standard No.47-18. B. Suspend ceiling hangers as follows: 1. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above. Connect hangers .. either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure, that are appropriate for substrate, and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 2. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise shown;and provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where -" necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented,bent,or kinked members. E. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system. Place splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so that tile-to-tile joints are closed by double lap of material. w� 1. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tile for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through tile. 2. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel spacers between tile and moldings,spaced at 12 inches o.c. 3. Fabricate access units for special suspension system access members and tile units modified as required to allow for removal of access units. END OF SECTION 09512 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09512-2 Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 09512-ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 1.1 GENERAL A. Submittals: In addition to product data for each type of acoustical panel and suspension system required, submit the following: 1. Full-size samples of each tile type,pattern,and color required. 2. Set of 12-inch-long samples of concealed suspension system members. 3. Set of 12-inch-long samples of exposed moldings for each color and system type required. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Acoustical Tile Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: 1. Celotone Natural Fissured;The Celotex Corporation. 2. Acoustone"F"Fissured;USG Interiors,Inc. B. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. C. Suspension System Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. D. Wire Hangers,Braces,and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 641 Class 1 zinc coating,soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so that its stress at 3 times the hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung)will be less than the yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106- inch-diameter wire. E. Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated, or if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical tile edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. ow F. Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated Suspension Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements: 1. Direct-Hung, Double-Web Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from and capped with prepainted or electrolytic zinc-coated,cold-rolled steel sheet; other characteristics as follows: a. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. b. Access: Upward,with initial access openings of size indicated and located throughout the ceiling within each module formed by main runners and cross runners, with additional access available by progressively removing remaining acoustical tiles. 2. Indirect-Hung Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from prepainted or electrolytic zinc-coated,cold-rolled steel sheet;other characteristics as follows: ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09512- 1 oft Smith College Book Storage Facility 3. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to flanges of trim accessories as recommended by A Mm accessory manufacturer. 4. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA- 214. ..I a. Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. b. Level 2 where panels form substrates for tile and where indicated. C. Level 5 for gypsum board surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. 5. Where Level 5 gypsum board finish is indicated,embed tape in joint compound and apply first,fill (second), and finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories;and apply a thin,uniform skim coat of joint compound over entire surface. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects, .., tool marks, ridges and ready for decoration. 6. Where Level 2 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound and apply first coat of joint compound. 7. Where Level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated,embed tape in joint compound. *"* 8. Finish water-resistant gypsum backing board to comply with ASTM C 840 and gypsum board manufacturer's directions. 9. Finish cementitious backer units to comply with unit manufacturer's directions. w END OF SECTION 09255 No l.. .Ill .l. ON am an GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-6 .l Smith College Book Storage Facility 7. Where STC-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated,seal construction at perimeters,behind control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies. 8. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. a. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications. 9. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c. 10. Install water-resistant gypsum backing board panels where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch open space where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 11. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows: a. Fasten with screws. 12. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Apply base layers of gypsum panels and face layer to base layers as follows: a. Fasten both base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. E. Direct-Bonding to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations,and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. F. Installing Trim Accessories: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type,length,and spacing of fasteners. 1. Install comerbead at external comers. 2. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound,except where other types are indicated a. Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. b. Install L-bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed. C. Install U-bead where indicated. ! " d. Install aluminum trim and other accessories where indicated. e. Install control joints at locations indicated. f. Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's recommendations and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. G. Finishing Gypsum Board Assemblies: Treat gypsum board joints,interior angles, flanges of comerbead, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. 1. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint compound. 2. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories having flanges not requiring tape. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255- 5 sm Smith College Book Storage Facility w 3. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Independently Game both sides of joints with framing or finning members as indicated. C. Installing Steel Framing for Walls and Partitions: Install steel studs and furring at spacings indicated. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips or foam gaskets between studs and wall. 2. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to ..s provide support for gypsum board. 3. Cut studs 1/2 inch short of full height to provide perimeter relief. 4. For STC-rated and fire-resistance-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks,as needed,to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. 5. Frame door openings to comply with GA-219,and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer,unless otherwise indicated. 6. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or,if none indicated,as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 7. Install Z-furring members and thermal insulation as indicated and to comply with requirements of manufacturer's directions. 8. Install polyethylene vapor retarder where indicated to comply with the following requirements: a. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with mechanical fasteners or adhesives. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates,including those filled with loose mineral-fiber insulation. b. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges, at perimeter of wall ., openings,and at lap joints;space fasteners 16 inches o.c. C. Seal joints in vapor retarders caused by pipes,conduits,electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor retarder tape. d. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarder immediately before concealing it with the + installation of gypsum board or other construction. D. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. . d 1. Install sound-attenuation blankets, where indicated, prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 2. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. 3. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid-core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and doors over 32 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsum panels into frames. 4. Form control and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed,with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels,as well as supporting Gaming behind gypsum panels. 5. Isolate perimeter of nonload-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors, as detailed. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with U- bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and .. abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. 6. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer, install gypsum panels over wood framing,with floating internal comer construction. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-4 ..s Smith College Book Storage Facility 4. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. a. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product. b. Job-Mixed Formulation: Powder product for mixing with water at Project site. 1) Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners ,M and face flanges of trim accessories. 2) Topping compound formulated for fill(second)and finish(third)coats. 3) All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds. 5. Joint Compound for Cementitious Backer Units: Material recommended by cementitious backer unit manufacturer. K. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. 1. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating gypsum panels. 2. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting-type joint compound recommended for spot-grouting hollow metal door frames. 3. Fastening Adhesive for Wood: ASTM C 557. 4' 4. Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum panels to steel framing. 5. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications: I'm a. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.033 inch thick. b. Fastening gypsum board to wood members. C. Fastening gypsum board to gypsum board. 6. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 7. Steel drill screws of size and type recommended by unit manufacturer for fastening cementitious backer units. 8. Gypsum Board Nails: ASTM C 514. 9. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I. 10. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, thickness and maximum permeance rating as follows: a. 4 mils b. 6 mils 1.3 EXECUTION A. Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. 1. Install supplementary framing,blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or on similar construction. 2. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. a. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling. b. Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure,except at floor. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-3 OR am Smith College Book Storage Facility MR D. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated. E. Gypsum Board Products: Types indicated in maximum lengths available that will minimize end-to-end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application. 1. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36,in thickness indicated. a. Type:X. b. Edges: Tapered. 2. Gypsum Board Base Layer(s)for Multilayer Applications: ASTM C 36,in thickness indicated. a. Type:X 3. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630,in thickness indicated. ... a. Type: MR. F. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. G. Accessories for Interior Installation: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying with w. ASTM C 1047,formed metal or plastic,with metal complying with the following requirement: 1. Steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc. 2. Steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip or electrolytic process,or steel sheet coated with aluminum, or rolled zinc. H. Accessories for Exterior Installations: Comerbead, edge trim, and control joints formed from steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc complying with ASTM C 1047. I. Joint Treatment Materials: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the .. recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated 1. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape,unless otherwise indicated. a. Use pressure-sensitive or staple-attached, open-weave, glass-fiber reinforcing tape with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application indicated. 2. Joint Tape for Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by cementitious backer unit 1e„ manufacturer. 3. Setting-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged,job-mixed, chemical- hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated a. For prefilling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. b. For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing board behind base for ceramic tile,use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. C. For topping compound,use sandable formulation. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-2 Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 09255-GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 1.1 GENERAL A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-resistance-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that are identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Clark Steel Framing,Inc. b. Consolidated Systems,Inc. C. Dale Industries,Inc. d. Dietrich Industries,Inc. e. Marino/Ware(formerly Marino Industries Corp.). f. National Gypsum Co.;Gold Bond Building Products Division. g. Unimast,Inc. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. Domtar Gypsum. b. Georgia-Pacific Corp. C. National Gypsum Co.;Gold Bond Building Products Division. d. United States Gypsum Co. C. Steel Framing for Walls and Partitions: Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements: 1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653,G 40 hot-dip galvanized coating for framing members attached to and within 10 feet of exterior walls. an 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated and with 0.0179-inch minimum base metal thickness,unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide 0.0329-inch minimum base metal thickness for head runner, sill runner,jamb,and cripple studs at door and other openings. b. Provide 0.0329-inch minimum base metal thickness in locations to receive cementitious backer units. w 3. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645,hat shaped,in depth indicated and with 0.0179-inch minimum base metal thickness,unless otherwise indicated. 4. Furring Brackets: Serrated-arm type, adjustable, fabricated from corrosion-resistant steel sheet an complying with ASTM C 645, minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring. 6. Z-Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard Z-shaped furring members with slotted or nonslotted web,fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653 or ASTM A 568 ;with a minimum base metal (uncoated) thickness of 0.0179 inch face flange of 1-1/4 inch, wall- attachment flange of 7/8 inch and of depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255- 1 Smith College Book Storage Facility "0 ,No am go FINISHES DIVISION 9 Smith College Book StorageFacility D. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern,draw,bow,and similar characteristics. E. Lock Strip Gasket Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's printed recommendations. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated. F. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including weld splatter. G. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes,accidents and vandalism,during construction period. H. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800 GLAZING 08800-3 Smith College Book StorageFacility 3. Other glazed panels in which lowest edge is less than 18"above floor; glazing area exceeds 9 sq. ft; and walking surfaces occur on both sides within 36"of panel,with horizontal walking surface planes within 12"of each other. 4. Both leaves of insulating glass covered above shall be safety glazed. 5. Safety glass 9 sq. ft. or less in area shall meet Category I(safe breakage at 150 ft. lb. impact) requirements; larger lights shall meet Category II (safe breakage a 400 ft. lb. impact) requirements. 6. Safety glass shall be either 1/4"heat-tempered glass, or laminated glass with a clear plastic *R interlayer between two 1/8"thick glass lights,minimum 0.015 in.thick interlayer for Category I,minimum 0.030 in.thick interlayer for Category II. Wired glass may not be used as a safety glass except where specifically called for on drawings as part of a fire-rated assembly. E. Insulating glass: 1. Units shall be certified by Insulated Glass certification Council or by an independent testing laboratory as complying with ASTM E 774, Class A. Insulated glass fabricator shall be a member of Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers'Association(SIGMA). 2. Units shall consist of two glass lights enclosing a hermetically sealed dry air space. Separate lights with a non-ferrous spacer containing a dessicant, with welded or soldered comers. Double-seal joints between spacer and glass with a primary butyl seal and a secondary polysulfide or silicone sealant. 3. If not shown otherwise on drawings,units shall have outer and inner lights 1/4 in. clear, inner light 1/4 in. clear, 1/2 in air space, overall thickness of 1 in. Provide tempered lights where shown on drawings or required by paragraph 1.2 C above. F. Frosted Glass: 1. In doors, and within 18" of floor: 1/4 in. laminated safety glass, with inside surface finely sandblasted to regular and even texture. 2. Elsewhere : 1/4 in. annealed glass with inside surface finely sandblasted to regular and even texture. 1.3 SETTING MATERIALS .. A. Glass setting materials shall be in accordance with recommendations of glass manufacturer and FGMA Glazing and sealant manuals. aw B. Setting and edge blocks and spacers:neoprene with 80-90 durometer hardness for setting blocks,60- 70 durometer hardness for edge blocks,40-50 durometer hardness for spacers. C. Tape:pre-shimmed polymerized butyl rubber,Tremco Poly-Shim or Pre-Shimmed 440,or equal. D. Glazing sealants and caulking compounds: as specfied in Division 7 sealant section for exterior and interior use. Sealant used in conjunction with insulating glass must be compatible with insulating glass seal. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets,and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in "FGMA Glazing Manual." B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. •� C. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. GLAZING 08800-2 Smith College Book StorageFacility SECTION 08800-GLAZING 1.1 GENERAL A. System Performance Requirements: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement,wind loading,and impact loading,without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction. B. Submittals: In addition to product data, submit 12-inch-square samples of each type of glass indicated, except for clear monolithic glass products, and 12-inch-long samples of each color required (except black)for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. on C. Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. D. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants. E. Compatibility test report from insulating glass edge sealant manufacturer indicating glass edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers, "FGMA Glazing Manual," and publications of AAMA, LSGA, and SIGMA as applicable to products indicated, ` except where more stringent requirements are indicated. G. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category 11 materials. H. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing agency indicated below: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council(IGCC), 2. Associated Laboratories,Inc. (ALI). 3. National Certified Testing Laboratories(NCTL). 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Glass shall be free from distortion,chips,crack,waces,scratches,and bubbles;and shall comply with ASTM C 1036 and C 1048.Provide quality label on each light. B. Acceptable manufacturers: Cardinal, Falconer,Ford,Globe/Amerada,Guardian, Hordis,LOF, PPG, Saint-Gobain, Solar-Seal, Spectrum,Viracon. C. Glass not otherwise specified or noted on drawings shall be 1/4"clear annealed float. 3/16"thickness may be used at interior openings less than 60 sq. ft., and 1/8"thickness at interior openings less than 30 sq. ft. " D. Installation shall comply fully with Massachusetts State Building Code Paragraph 857.5 and Product Safety Commission Safety Standard for Architectural glazing Materials(16 CFR 1201). Whether or not shown on drawings,use safet y glass in following: 1. All glazing in doors 2. Glazed panels whose nearest vertical edge occurs within 48"of door and whose bottom edge is below level of top of door, except where an interior wall intersects a solid panel between glass and door. GLAZING 08800- 1 Smith College ON Book Storage Facility e 1. 6 each Hinges FBB168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D 2. 1 each Lockset MR ML 2242 NSM 26D 3. 2 each Closer 4111 Alum. 4. 2 each Auto Flush Bolts 359 B26D aw 5. 1 each Coordinator 469 1/2 B26D 6. 1 each Astragal 158 NA 7. 2 each Kick Plate 8 x 34 US26D(213) 8 x 28 (010) 8. 2 each Stop 441 US26D 9. 2 each Silencers 20 H. HARDWARE SET#8 DOORS#011, 106, 107, 111,206,207 1. 3 each Hinges FBB168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D 2. 1 each Latchset ML2210 NSM 26D WW 3. 1 each Closer 4011 Alum. 4. 1 each Stop 441 US26D 5. 3 each Silencers 20 ■s I. HARDWARE SET#7 DOORS#014, 015 1. 1 each Cylinder No 2. Balance of Hardware by Gate manufacturer END OF SECTION 08710 ww �r DOOR HARDWARE 08710-4 .�r Smith College Book Storage Facility A. HARDWARE SET# 1 DOORS#001,013 1. 3 each Hinges FBB 168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D NRP 2. 1 each Exit Device 99EO US26D 3. 1 each Closer 4111 CUSH Alum. 4. 1 each Kick Plate 8 x 34 US26D 5. 1 each Stop 441 US26D 6. 3 each Silencers 20 B. HARDWARE SET#2 DOORS#002, 007, 008, 012 1. 3 each Hinges FBB 179 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D 2. 1 each Lockset MR ML 2251 NSM 26D 3. 1 each Stop 441 US26D 4. 3 each Silencers 20 C. HARDWARE SET#3 DOOR#003 1. 3 each Hinges FBB 168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D 2 1 each Lockset MR ML 2251 NSM 26D 3. 1 each Closer 4011 Alum. tw 4. 1 each Stop 441 US26D 5. 3 each Silencers 20 D. HARDWARE SET#4 DOOR#004 1. 6 each Hinges FBB 168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D 2. 1 each Lockset MR ML 2242 NSM 26D 3. 2 each Flush Bolts 458 B US26D 4. 1 each Astragal 158 NA 5. 2 each Stop 441 US26D 6. 2 each Silencers 20 E. HARDWARE SET#5 DOORS#005, 110 on 1. 3 each Hinges FBB 179 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D 2. 1 each Lockset MR ML 2251 NSM 26D 3. 1 each Closer 4011 Alum. 4. 1 each Kick Plate 8 x 34 US26D 5. 1 each Stop 441 US26D 6. 3 each Silencers 20 F. HARDWARE SET#6 DOORS#006,009, 102,201,202,203 1. 3 each Hinges FBB 168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D NRP 2. 1 each Lockset MR ML 2242 NSM 26D 3. 1 each Closer 4111 Alum. 4. 1 each Kick Plate 8 x 34 US26D 5. 3 each Silencers 20 6. 1 each Electromagnet 997 24VDC Alum(Door#202,203 only) G. HARDWARE SET#7 DOORS#010,213 DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 3 .. Smith College Book Storage Facility No G. Locks: Equip locks with 6-pin tumbler cylinders.All cylinder collars to be 44717452-612 H. Overhead Closers: Where parallel-arm closers are indicated, provide units one size larger than recommended for standard-arm units. I. Combination Door Closers and Holders: Units designed to release and automatically close doors under fire conditions with integral electromagnetic holder mechanisms and UL listed fire detectors complying with UL 228. J. Holders, Stops,and Bumpers: Provide grey rubber exposed resilient parts. 1. Finish exposed metal to match hardware,except finish floor plates to match finish of thresholds. 2. Size and mount units indicated or, if not indicated, to comply with manufacturer's .. recommendations for the exposure condition. Reinforce the substrate as recommended. K. Silencers: Provide silencers in metal door frames,unless not permitted for fire rating,or weatherstripping is provided;3 per single-door frame,4 per double-door frame. L. Miscellaneous Door Hardware: Provide plates,trim,letter box,viewers,knockers,bells,and similar units as indicated. M. Armor,Kick,and Mop Plates: Fabricate protection plates not more than 1-1/2 inches less than door width on stop side and not more than 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side,x the height indicated. N. Weatherstripping: Provide type, size, and profile indicated, continuous at head and jamb edges of each exterior door opening. Provide noncorrosive fasteners. 3. Solid Neoprene conforming to MIL R 6855,Class H,Grade 40. .. 4. Flexible vinyl hollow bulb or loop insert. 5. Brush pile insert of polypropylene or nylon woven pile and aluminum strip backing, complying with AAMA 701.2. O. Thresholds: Extruded aluminum of type, design, and profile indicated, complete with replaceable resilient vinyl wiper-type insert and noncorrosive fasteners. OR 1.3 EXECUTION A. Hardware Mounting Locations: As recommended by the Door and Hardware Institute, unless indicated ow, otherwise. B. Install each hardware item to comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. C. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant. Remove excess sealant and clean adjacent surfaces. D. Hardware Adjustment: Return to Project one month after Owner's occupancy, and adjust hardware to proper operation and function. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper maintenance and adjustment. HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS: DOOR HARDWARE 08710-2 Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 08710-DOOR HARDWARE 1.1 GENERAL A. Submit samples of hardware items, showing each required finish from each manufacturer(for acceptance Pop of color and texture only). B. Submit final hardware schedule organized by "hardware sets," to indicate specifically the product to be furnished for each item required on each door. 1. Furnish templates to each fabricator of doors and frames as required for hardware preparation. C. For fire-rated openings provide hardware tested and listed by UL or FM(NFPA Standard 80). On panic exit devices provide UL or FM label indicating"Fire Exit Hardware." 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Number Designations: Numbers indicating hardware items are ANSI/BHMA standard number designations. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by manufacturers for various products listed below. 1. Butts and Hinges: Stanley. 2. Cylinders and Locks:Corbin&Russwin. 3. Exit/Panic Devices:Von Duprin 4. Closers:LCN 5. Miscellaneous:Ives,Rockwood 6. Thresholds:Zero. 7. Electric Strike:Hamchett C. Finish and base material designations are indicated in accordance with ANSI BHMA A156.18 or the nearest traditional U.S.commercial finish. 1. Where base material and quality of finish are not otherwise indicated, provide at least the commercially recognized quality specified in ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards applicable to each particular type of hardware. D. Hinges and Pivots: Provide full-mortise butt, size,weight,and quantity in accordance with requirements established for door size,weight,and frequency of use. 1. Pins: Stainless steel, except steel pins with steel hinges; nonremovable for exterior and public interior exposure;nonrising for nonsecurity exposure;flat button with matching plugs. 2. Ball-Bearing: Swaged,inner leaf beveled,square comers. 3. Plain-Bearing: Swaged,inner leaf beveled,rounded comers;except provide ball-bearing for doors equipped with closers. E. Locks,Latches,and Bolts: Provide new masterkey system with properly sized key control system. 1. Strikes: Extended lip for latch bolts F. Equip exit devices with dogging devices where door has closer,except when door is fire-rated. DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 1 Smith College Book Storage Facility N. Fabrication: Fabricate components to designs,sizes and thicknesses indicated and comply with indicated standards. Sizes and profiles are indicated on the drawings. 1. Thermal-Break Construction: Fabricate framing with an integrally concealed, low conductance thermal barrier,between exterior materials and interior members to eliminate direct metal-to-metal contact. O. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing and hardware application before shipment to the Project. Disassemble only as necessary for shipment and installation. 1. Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation. 2. Preglaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible. P. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth. Restore mechanical finish. Q. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing for hardware and as necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance and rigidity. R. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, suitable sealant, nonabsorptive plastic or elastomeric tape or gasket between surfaces. Do not use coatings containing lead. S. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles,with hairline fit of contacting members. T. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. U. Provide finger guards of collapsible neoprene or PVC gasketing securely anchored into frame at hinge- jamb of center-pivoted doors. V. Finishes: Comply with NAAMM"Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. Finish designations prefixed by"AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 1.3 Execution: A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and conditions that affect installation. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. B. Installation: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. Set units plumb, level, and true to line,without warp or rack of framing members,doors,or panels. Install in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades. Provide support and anchor securely in place. C. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface-mounted hardware. D. Set sill members in bed of sealant,or with joint fillers or gaskets. E. Refer to "Glass and Glazing" Section for installation of glass and other panels glazed into doors and framing. F. Adjust hardware to function properly. G. Clean completed system after installation. Avoid damage to coatings. H. Clean glass after installation. Comply with"Glass and Glazing" Section for cleaning and maintenance. END OF SECTION 08410 w. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-3 Smith College Book Storage Facility J. Manufacturer's Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to those indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance. K. Design Criteria: Drawings indicate size,profile,and dimensional requirements and are based on specific types and models indicated. Aluminum entrance and storefront by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations do not change the design concept. 1.2 Products: A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended; comply with ASTM B 221 for extrusions, ASTM B 209 for sheet or plate,and ASTM B 211 for bars,rods,and wire. B. Carbon Steel Reinforcement: Comply with ASTM A 36 for structural shapes, plates and bars, ASTM A 611 for cold-rolled sheet and strip,or ASTM A 570 for hot-rolled sheet and strip. - C. Glazing Materials: Comply with"Glass and Glazing"section. !I D. Panel Core Material: Rigid,closed-cell polyurethane insulation. E. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated steel, or material warranted to be go noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components,hardware,anchors,and other components. 1. Do not use exposed fasteners except for application of hardware. For hardware,use Phillips flat- head machine screws that match finish of member or hardware being fastened. on F. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179-inch (26 gage) minimum dead-soft stainless steel, or 0.026-inch-thick minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected for compatibility with other components. G. Brackets and Reinforcements: High-strength aluminum;where use of aluminum is not feasible provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123. H. Concrete/Masonry Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ' ASTM A 123. I. Compression Weatherstripping: Replaceable molded neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287. J. Sliding Weatherstripping: Replaceable wool,polypropylene,or nylon woven pile weatherstripping,with nylon fabric or aluminum strip backing,complying with AAMA 701.2. K. Hardware: SEE SECTION#08710 ! " L. Framing System: Fabricate from extruded aluminum members of size and profile indicated. Include reinforcing. Provide for flush glazing from the exterior without projecting stops. Shop-fabricate and preassemble. Provide frame sections without exposed seams. 1. Infill Panels: Flush-laminated panels of thickness indicated, with core material laminated with waterproof glue between two sheets of aluminum. M. Stile-and-Rail Type Entrance Doors: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie-rods or j-bolts. 1. Glazing: Fabricate to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without disassembly. Provide snap-on extruded aluminum glazing stops with exterior stops anchored for nonremoval. 2. Design: Provide 1-3/4-inch-thick doors with medium stiles(3 1/2"nominal width). ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-2 Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 08410-ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 1.1 General: .. A. System Performance Requirements: Comply with structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration requirements indicated,as demonstrated by testing stock assemblies according to test methods indicated. B. Thermal Movement: Provide for expansion and contraction resulting from an ambient temperature range of 180 deg F (100 deg C) without buckling, joint seal failure, undue stress on structural elements, r damaging loads on fasteners,reduction of performance,or stress on glass. Doors shall function normally over specified range. 1. Wind Loads: Provide assemblies capable of withstanding pressures of 20 psf inward and outward, ... acting normal to plane of the wall. C. Structural Performance: Test in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no glass breakage or permanent damage to fasteners, anchors,hardware or actuating mechanism or permanent deformation of framing members in excess of 0.2 percent of their clear span. 1. Deflection Normal to the Plane of the Wall: Test pressure shall be wind load specified. Deflection shall not exceed 1/175 of clear span,when subjected to uniform load deflection test. 2. Deflection Parallel to the Plane of the Wail: Test pressure shall be 1.5 times wind pressure. Deflection of members carrying full dead load shall not exceed amount that will reduce glass bite below 75 percent of design dimension or edge clearance between member and fixed glass or other fixed member above to less than 1/8 inch. Clearance between the member and operable door or window shall be at least 1/16 inch. D. Air Infiltration: Not more than 0.06 CFM per sq. ft. of fixed area(excluding operable door edges)when .w tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at inward test pressure differential of 1.57 psf. E. Water Penetration: No uncontrolled water penetration (excluding operable door edges) when tested in "" accordance with ASTM E 331 at an inward test pressure differential of 6.24 lbf per sq. ft. F. Condensation Resistance: Provide units showing condensation resistance factor(CRF)of not less than 45 when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503. am G. Thermal Transmittance: Provide U-value of not more than 0.65 BTU/(hr x sq. ft. x deg F) at 15-mph exterior wind velocity when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503. ,■„ H. Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: Include fabrication methods, data on finishing, hardware and accessories and surface maintenance recommendations. 2. Shop Drawings: Include layout, installation details, 1/4-inch scale elevations, detail sections of composite members,anchors and reinforcement,hardware mounting heights and glazing details. 3. Hardware schedule organized into sets. Include item and manufacturer's name and designation of each item required. 4. Samples: Pairs of samples of each finish on 12-inch-long sections. Where normal color variations are anticipated,include sets indicating full range of color variations. ,. 5. Certified test reports showing systems have been tested and comply with requirements. I. Installer Qualifications: Installer who has completed installations similar to those required and whose work has resulted in a record of successful in-service performance. *�* ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410- 1 Smith College Book Storage Facility E. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection,remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. go END OF SECTION 08110 �t go STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-3 A Smith College Book Storage Facility H. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117. I. Fabricate concealed stiffeners,reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold-or .s. hot-rolled steel sheet. J. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to SDI 107. K. Glazing Stops: Minimum 0.0359-inch- thick steel or 0.040-inch-thick aluminum. 1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for .. glass,louvers,and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. L. Finishes, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. 1. Apply primers and organic finishes to doors and frames after fabrication. N. Steel Sheet Finishes: Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1." 1. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces according to SSPC-SP 1. Remove mill scale and rust to comply with SSPC-SP 5(White Metal Blast Cleaning)or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling). 2. Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation,apply a conversion coating suited to organic coating applied over it. 3. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1 acceptance criteria,is compatible with finish paint systems indicated,and has capability to provide A* a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 1.3 EXECUTION ow A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. aw B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105,unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position,plumbed,aligned,and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. am 1. Except for frames located in existing concrete,masonry, or gypsum board assembly construction, place frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. Install at least 3 anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding an heights on strike jamb. 3. In in-place gypsum board partitions,install knock-down,slip-on,drywall frames. 4. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. we C. Door Installation: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSUSDI 100. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install with clearances specified in NFPA 80. .. 2. Smoke-Control Doors: Comply with NFPA 105. D. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection,sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-2 Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 08110-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.1 GENERAL A. Submit Product Data for each type of door and frame specified. B. Quality Assurance: Comply with ANSUSDI 100. C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: NFPA 80, identical to assemblies tested per ASTM E 152,and labeled and listed by UL,Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ' 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: W_ 1. Amweld Building Products,Inc. 2. Benchmark Commercial Doors. 3. Ceco Door Products. 4. Copco Door Co. 5. Curries Co. 6. Deansteel Manufacturing Co. 7. Fenestra Corp. 8. Kewanee Corp. 9. Mesker Door,Inc. 10. Pioneer Industries. 11. Republic Builders Products. 12. Steelcraft. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569 C. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366,commercial quality,or ASTM A 620,drawing quality. E. Steel Doors: Provide 1-3/4-inch- thick doors of materials and ANSUSDI 100 grades and models specified below,or as indicated on Drawings or schedules: 1. Interior Doors: Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0.0478-inch- thick cold-rolled steel sheet faces. 2. Exterior Doors: Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0.0635-inch- thick galvanized steel sheet faces. ! ' G. Frames: Provide frames for doors, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings that comply with ANSUSDI 100;fabricate to be rigid,neat in appearance,and free from defects,warp,or buckle. 1. For interior frames provide units with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners, formed from 0.0478-inch- thick cold-rolled steel for openings 48 inches or less in width and from 0.0598-inch- thick steel for openings over 48 inches in width. 2. For exterior frames provide units with mitered or coped and continuously welded comers,formed from 0.0635-inch- thick galvanized steel sheet. 3. Door Silencers: 3 on strike jambs of single-door frames and 2 on heads of double-door frames. 4. Plaster Guards: Provide where mortar might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. 5. Grout: As specified in Division 4 Section"Unit Masonry." STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110- 1 Smith College Book Storage Facility OR DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS am Smith College Book Storage Facility 1.3 EXECUTION A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. 4M B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1193. 4W END OF SECTION 07901 AV w Wx go w w,. .w» JOINT SEALANTS 07901 -2 so Smith College Book Storage Facility go SECTION 07900-JOINT SEALANTS no 1.1 GENERAL A. Submittals: In addition to product data submit the following: 1. Samples of each type and color of joint sealant required. 2. Certified test reports for joint sealants evidencing compliance with requirements. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants,joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under service and application conditions,as demonstrated by testing and field experience. B. Colors: Provide color indicated of exposed joint sealants or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. C. Sealants shall be chemically-curing elastomeric type, of base polymer indicated below,complying with so ASTM C 920 requirements,including those for Type,Grade, Class,and Use.Provide type M(mortar),G (glass),A(aluminum),or O(materials other than foregoing),as applicable for field condition. D. Sealant for joints in exterior vertical surfaces; one or two-part non-sag polyurethane, complying with ASTM C 920, Type M or S,Grade NS, Class 25 or higher,use NT. Acceptable products include Bostik Chem-Calk 500, 900, or 2639: Mameco Vulkem 116, 227, 921, or 922: W. R. Meadows Dualthane: Pecora Dynatrol I or II: Products Research & Chemical Corp. Permapol RC-1 or RC-2: Sika Corp. Sikaflex-la,-15LM,or—2c NS: Sonnebom NP-1 or NP-2:Tremco Dymonic or Dymeric E. Sealant for joints in interior vertical surfaces: as specified above for exterior use, or one-part, non-sag, paintable butyl or acrylic latex caulkiing compound: 1. Butyl shall comply with FS TT-S-1657,Type I.Acceptable products include Bostik Chem- no Calk 300:Pecora BC-158;Protective Treatments PTI 757;Tremco Butyl Sealant 2. Latex shall comply with ASTM C 834. Acceptable products include Bostik Chem-Calk 600;Pecors AC-20; Sonnebom Sonolac;Tremco Acrylic latex 834. F. Sealant at joints in horizontal surfaces; one or two-part pourable self-levelling polyurethane, complying with ASTM C 920,Type M or S, Grade P, Class 25,Use T. Acceptable products include Bostik Chem- Calk 550 or 950;Nameco Vulkem 45,245,or 255;W. R.Meadows Pourethane;Pecora NR-200 and NR- go 201 Urexpan; Products Research & Chemical PRC 280; Sikaflex-2c SL; Sonneborn Sonolastic SL-1 or Paving Joint Sealant;Tremco THC-900 G. Provide non-staining sealant backing materials and accessories as recommended by sealant manufacturer, including joint cleaner,primer-sealer,bond-breaker tape,and masking tape. Where no other joint back-up exists, provide a compressible closed-cell polyurethane foam backer rod, 25 to 50 per cent greater in diameter than joint width. H. Provide joint fillers for concrete paviing: 1. Self-expanding Cork Jont Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTMD1752 for Type III 2. Cork Joint Filler:Preformed strips complying with ASTMD 1752 for Type 11. 3. Sponge Rubber Joint Filler:Preformed strips complying with ASTMD1752 for Type I. 4. Bitumiinous Fiber joint Filler: Preformed strips of composition below, complying with ASTMD 1751: a. Asphalt-saturated fiberboard b. Granulated cork with asphalt binder encased between 2 layers of saturated felt or glass-fiber felt of width and thickness indicated. JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 1 4W Smith College Book Storage Facility 1. Roof-Edge Flashings: Secure metal flashings at roof edges according to FM Loss Prevention Data a Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone. B. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges,not less than 1 inch deep,filled with mastic sealant(concealed within joints). C. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered,removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches,except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work 1. Do not solder aluminum. 2. Pretinning is not required for lead. D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion,but movable,joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant. E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams,and solder. F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. +■* G. Separations: Separate noncompatible metals or corrosive substrates with a coating of asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. .. H. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation with installation of assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant,interlocking folded seam,or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches and bed with sealant. I. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation with roofing and installation of items penetrating roof. .w END OF SECTION 07620 .M, .r� SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-2 Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 07620-SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM No 1.1 GENERAL A. Submittals: Product Data,Shop Drawings,and Samples for each item specified. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Through-Wall Flashing: a. Cheney Flashing Company,Inc. b. Keystone Flashing Co. 2. Reglets: a. Fry Reglet Corporation. b. Hickman: W.P.Hickman Co. No C. Keystone Flashing Company. C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, 3003-H14, mill finish, minimum thickness of 0.040 inch , unless we otherwise indicated. D. Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories: As follows: 1. Solder: ASTM B 32,Grade Sn50. 2. Fasteners: Noncorrosive metal. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. 3. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12,asbestos free,solvent type. 4. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586,Type I,asbestos free,asphalt based. 5. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene;nonhardening,nonskinning,nondrying,nonmigrating sealant. 6. Elastomeric Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." 7. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part,noncorrosive,aluminum seam-cementing compound. 8. Adhesives: Type recommended for waterproof and weather-resistant seaming and adhesive. 00 9. Clips, Straps, Anchoring Devices, and Similar Accessories: Compatible with material being installed. E. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. F. Coil-Coated Aluminum Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer Hylar 5000 or Kynar 500. 1. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample. ON 2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect. ON 1.3 EXECUTION A. Installation: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" allow for thermal expansion; set true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints,and seams permanently watertight and weatherproof;conceal fasteners where possible. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620- 1 oil am Smith College Book Storage Facility no E. Auxiliary Insulation Materials: Provide materials as follows: 1. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying 4W with fire-resistance requirements. 2. Mastic Sealer: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for bonding edge joints and filling voids. 3. Mechanical Anchors: Corrosion-resistant type as recommended by insulation manufacturer for am deck type,and complying with fire and insurance wind-uplift rating requirements. a. Provide system tested and approved for 1-60 wind-uplift rating. .■ 1.3 EXECUTION A. Preparation of Substrate: Comply with manufacturers'instructions to prepare substrate to receive single- ply membrane system. B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to single-ply membrane system work. go Remove sharp projections. C. Install cant strips, flashings, and accessory items as shown, and as recommended by manufacturer even though not shown. +.. D. Prime substrate where recommended by manufacturer of materials being installed. E. Prevent compounds from entering and clogging drains and conductors, and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other work. F. Insulation Installation: Extend insulation full thickness in two layers, or in multiple layers over entire *�* surface to be insulated,cutting and fitting tightly around obstructions. Form cant strips,crickets, saddles, and tapered areas with additional material as shown and as required for proper drainage of membrane. 1. Stagger joints in one direction for each course. For multiple layers, stagger joints in both directions between courses with no gaps to form a complete thermal envelope. 2. Do not install more insulation in a day than can be covered with membrane before end of day and before start of inclement weather. 3. Secure roof insulation to substrate with mechanical anchors of type and spacing indicated but in no w case provide less than one anchor per 4 sq. ft.of surface area. G. Membrane Installation: 3. Fully Adhered, Single-ply Membrane: Install membrane by unrolling over prepared substrate, lapping adjoining sheets as recommended by manufacturer. Apply adhesive to surfaces to be bonded and roll single-ply membrane into place when adhesive has properly cured. Treat seams with special cement and apply sealant to exposed sheet edges, tapering application as .. recommended by manufacturer. Install mechanical fasteners, flashings and counterflashings, and accessories at locations and as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 07530 SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530-3 Smith College Book Storage Facility B. Fully Adhered EPDM Membrane: Manufacturer's standard installation. ON 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: a. Carlisle Syntec Systems. b. Celotex Corp. C. ERACORP. d. Firestone Building Products Co. e. GenFlex Roofing Systems. f. Kelly Energy Systems,Inc. g. Manville Building Materials Corp. h. Versico Inc.. C. Auxiliary Materials: Provide the following to suit Project. 1. Sheet Seaming System: Manufacturer's standard materials for sealing lapped joints, including edge sealer to cover exposed spliced edges as recommended by manufacturer of single-ply membrane system. 2. Cant Strips, Tapered Edge Strips, and Flashing Accessories: Types recommended by manufacturer of single-ply membrane material, provided at locations indicated and at locations recommended by mfr.,including adhesive tapes,flashing cements,and sealants. 3. Flashing Material: Manufacturer's standard system compatible with single-ply membrane. 4. Slip Sheet: Type recommended by manufacturer of single-ply membrane material for protection of membrane from incompatible substrates. 5. Protective Coating: Liquid-applied Hypalon finish coat to apply to exposed membrane, in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 6. Mechanical Fasteners: Metal or plastic plates,caps,battens,accessory components,and fastening devices,to suit substrate and as recommended by single-ply membrane manufacturer. 7. Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by single-ply membrane manufacturer for particular substrate and project conditions,formulated to withstand minimum 60-psf uplift force. a. Provide adhesives that comply with local requirements limiting volatile organic compounds (VOC). D. Insulating Materials: Provide materials as follows: 1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation with closed cells and integral high-density skin, complying with ASTM C 578 for Type indicated;with 5-year aged r- values of 5.4 and 5.0 at 40 deg and 75 deg F,respectively;and as follows: a. Type IV, 1.6-pcf minimum density,unless otherwise indicated. 1) Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed values of 5 and 165,respectively. b. Provide tapered boards where indicated for sloping to drain;fabricate with taper of 1/4 inch r per foot in the 24-inch dimension. SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530-2 Smith College am Book Storage Facility a. SECTION 07530-SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 1.1 GENERAL am A. This Section specifies single-ply membrane roofing systems, including related insulation and auxiliary materials. .. B. Types of roofing systems specified in this Section using single-ply membrane roofing include the following: MW 1. Fully adhered. C. Single-ply membrane roofing includes the following: no 1. Ethylene propylene diene monomer(EPDM). D. Roof insulation related to single-ply membrane roofing is specified in this Section. E. Manufacturer: Obtain primary single-ply membrane roofing from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. F. Installer: A firm with successful experience in installing roofing systems similar to those required for this Project and acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer of primary roofing materials. G. Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product data,installation instructions,and general recommendations from manufacturers of single- ply membrane roofing system materials for types of roofing required. Include data substantiating .wr that materials comply with requirements. 2. Samples of finished roofing sheets,including T-shaped side/end-lap seam,and as follows: a. Insulation material. H. UL Listing: Provide labeled materials that have been tested and listed by UL in 'Building Materials Directory"for application indicated,with Class A rated materials/system for roof slopes shown. 1. Special Project Warranty: Provide written warranty,signed by Manufacturer of primary roofing materials and its authorized Installer,agreeing to replace/repair defective materials and workmanship as required to maintain roofing system in watertight condition. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years after date of Substantial Completion. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. EPDM Membrane: Ethylene propylene diene monomers formed into uniform, flexible sheets, complying with ASTM D 4637,Type 1. 1. Class U: Unreinforced. "w 2. Thickness: 60 mils,nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: Black. SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530- 1 Smith College Book Storage Facility A. Install through-penetration firestops to comply with the "System Performance Requirements" paragraph and the through-penetration firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. B. Install fire-resistive joint sealant to comply with the"System Performance Requirements"paragraph,with ASTM C 1193, and with the sealant manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. END OF SECTION 07270 00 po FIRESTOPPING 07270-3 .. Smith College Book Storage Facility d. Intumescent,Latex Sealant: Single-component,intumescent,latex formulation. e. Intumescent Putty: Nonhardening, dielectric,water-resistant putty containing no solvents, inorganic fibers,or silicone compounds. f. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component,elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on one side. g. Job-Mixed Vinyl Compound: Prepackaged vinyl-based powder product for mixing with water at Project site to produce a paintable compound,passing ASTM E 136,with flame- spread and smoke-developed ratings of zero per ASTM E 84. h. Mortar: Prepackaged dry mix composed of a blend of inorganic binders, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking,homogenous mortar. i. Pillows/Bags: Re-usable,heat-expanding pillows/bags composed of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire- retardant additives. j. Silicone Foam: Two-component, silicone-based liquid elastomer that, when mixed, .� expands and cures in place to produce a flexible,nonshrinking foam. k. Silicone Sealant: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealant. 1. Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealant: Solvent-release-curing, single-component, synthetic-polymer-based sealant. B. Fire-Resistive Elastomeric Joint Sealants: Chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated complying with ASTM C 920 requirements and requirements specified in this Section applicable to fire-resistive joint sealants. 1. Sealant Colors: Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. 2. Single-Component, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure related Use NT, and joint-substrate-related Uses M, G, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated)O. a. Additional capability,when tested per ASTM C 719,to withstand the following percentage changes in joint width as measured at time of installation and still comply with other requirements of ASTM C 920: 1) 50 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 100 percent movement. 2) 100 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in compression for a ' total of 150 percent movement. 3. Multicomponent,Nonsag,Urethane Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure-related Use NT,and joint-substrate-related Uses M,A,and(as applicable to joint substrates indicated)O. a. Additional capability,when tested per ASTM C 719,to withstand the following percentage changes in joint width as measured at time of installation and still comply with other *" requirements of ASTM C 920: 1) 40 percent movement in extension and 25 percent in compression for a total of 65 percent movement. 2) 50 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 100 percent movement. 4. Single-Component,Nonsag,Urethane Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT,M,A. and(as applicable to joint substrates indicated)O. 1.3 EXECUTION ww FIRESTOPPING 07270-2 go Smith College Book Storage Facility in SECTION 07270-FIRESTOPPING 1.1 GENERAL A. System Performance Requirements: At all penetrations through rated construction provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire, according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases. 1. Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F ratings indicated,as determined per ASTM E 814,but not less than the fire-resistance rating of the constructions penetrated. 2. Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 119,but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the construction in which the joint occurs. 3. For firestopping exposed to view,traffic,moisture,and physical damage,provide products that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions. B. Submittals: In addition to product data for each type of product specified,submit the following: 1. Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds(VOCs)and are nontoxic to building occupants. Rw 2. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying compliance of their products with specified requirements. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Comply with the following requirements in providing system components that are compatible with each other,the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating firestops under conditions of service and application,based on testing and field experience. 1. Accessories: Provide the following components for each firestopping system as needed to install fill materials and to comply with"System Performance Requirements"paragraph: a. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials including the following: 1) Semirefractory fiber(mineral wool)insulation. 2) Ceramic fiber. 3) Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. 4) Fire-rated formboard. 5) Joint fillers for joint sealants. b. Temporary forming materials. C. Substrate primers. d. Collars. e. Steel sleeves. 2. Fill Materials: Provide through-penetration firestop systems composed of the fill materials indicated below: a. Ceramic-Fiber and Mastic Coating: Ceramic fibers in bulk form formulated for use with mastic coating,and ceramic fiber manufacturer's mastic coating. b. Ceramic-Fiber Sealant: Single-component formulation of ceramic fibers and inorganic binders. C. Endothermic, Latex Compound Sealant: Single-component, endothermic, latex formulation. FIRESTOPPING 07270- 1 om Smith College Book Storage Facility A. Installation, General: Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products ... and application indicated. 1. Install insulation that is undamaged,dry,unsoiled,and has not been exposed at any time to ice and snow. 2. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. 3. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated. 4. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. B. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection board. Set in adhesive according to written instructions of insulation manufacturer. C. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached,spindle-type insulation anchors. D. Place loose-fill insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown, either by pouring or by machine blowing to comply with ASTM C 1015. 1. For cellulosic loose-fill insulation, comply with the Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association's"Special Report--Standard Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation." E. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system. F. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse,and other causes. END OF SECTION 07210 .W no Wo so M 4W as sm BUILDING INSULATION 07210-2 Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 07210-BUILDING INSULATION 1.1 GENERAL A. Submittals: Product Data for each type of insulation product specified. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, ASTM E 119, or ASTM E 136 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses,widths,and lengths. B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578 for type indicated below: 1. Type VII,2.20-lb/cu.ft.minimum density Styrofoam brand High load 60 1"or approved equal 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 5 and 165,respectively. C. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm . D. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. E. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. F. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements: 1. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. 2. Spindle: Copper-coated low carbon steel, fully annealed,0.105 inches in diameter,length to suit depth of insulation indicated. G. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place,but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter. 1. Where spindles will be exposed to human contact after installation,protect ends with capped self- locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap. H. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation,fasteners,and substrates. 1.3 EXECUTION BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 1 Smith College Book Storage Facility DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Smith College Book Storage Facility 2. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer compatible with finish coats to concealed surfaces of woodwork. 3. Washcoat for Stained Finish: Apply a vinyl washcoat to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and fmishing. 4. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. 5. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining(if any), apply paste wood filler to open-grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 6. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for finish system, staining, and sheen,with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. a. AWI Finish System TR-6: Catalyzed polyurethane. b. Staining and Sheen: Match Architect's sample. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Preparation: Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas, and examine and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing, before installing. B. Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified above for type of woodwork involved. 1. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches(3 mm in 2400 mm). 2. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refmish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish - at cuts. C. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints, using full-length pieces to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Fill gaps,if any,between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler and sand smooth. ! !" D. Tops: Anchor securely to base units. Seal space between backsplash and wall. E. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips and by blind nailing on backup strips,splined-connection strips,and similar associated trim and framing. END OF SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-3 ,t Smith College Book Storage Facility 3. For concealed hardware provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class .�. requirements of BHMA A156.9. G. Furring,Blocking, Shims,and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber,kiln dried to less .w than 15 percent moisture content. H. Fabrication,General: Complete fabrication, including assembly and finishing,before shipment to Project site to maximum extent possible. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing,trimming,and fitting. 1. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members,kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 2. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. .. 3. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops and similar exposures,seal edges with a water-resistant coating. 4. Install glass to comply with FGMA "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops. I. Wood Cabinets(Casework)for Transparent Finish: As follows: 1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. J. Laminate-Clad Cabinets(Plastic-Covered Casework): As follows: ..� 1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. dW 2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide colors and textures of laminate surfaces complying with the following: a. Provide Architect's selections from laminate manufacturer's full range of colors and an finishes. 3. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers except where located directly under tops. K. Countertops: As follows: 1. Type of Top: High-pressure decorative laminate as follows: a. Grade: GP-50,0.050-inch nominal thickness. b. Colors,Patterns, and Finishes: Provide colors and textures of laminate surfaces complying with the following: 1) Provide Architect's selections from laminate manufacturer's full range of colors and ... finishes. C. Edge Treatment: Lumber edge for transparent finish matching wood species and cut on cabinet surfaces. L. Shop Finishing: Finish wood cabinets (casework), counter tops, and paneling at the fabrication shop. Defer only final touch up,cleaning,and polishing until after installation. 1. Grade: Same grades as items to be finished. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-2 ON Smith College Book Storage Facility ON SECTION 06402-INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 1.1 GENERAL A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips unless e concealed within other construction prior to woodwork installation. B. Submittals: In addition to product data,submit the following: 1. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,attachment devices,and other components. 2. Samples of lumber and panel products for each species and cut indicated for transparent finish, go and each material indicated for opaque finish,with one-half of exposed surfaces finished. 3. Samples of laminate-clad panel products,for each type,color,pattern,and surface finish. C. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute. D. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work is completed, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Woodwork Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide interior architectural woodwork by one of the following: OR B. Woodwork for Transparent Finish: Grade and species as follows: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Wood Species:Hard maple C. Woodwork for Opaque Finish: Grade and species as follows: No 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Wood Species:any closed-graiin hardwood listed in referenced woodworking standard. D. Panel Products: As follows: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Hardwood plywood and face veneers:HPVA HP-1 E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3. F. Cabinet Hardware: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets,except for items specified in Division 8 Section"Door Hardware." !w 1. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by reference to BHMA numbers or referenced to this standard. 2. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated. a. Satin Stainless Steel, Stainless-Steel Base: BHMA 630. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402- 1 I milli Smith College Book Storage Facillity 5. "Table 2305.2--Fastening Schedule"of the BOCA National Building Code. 6. "Table 1705.1--Fastening Schedule,"of the Standard Building Code. D. Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact,or in area of high relative humidity. E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler. F. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. ow G. Installation of Structural-Use Panels: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. rw 1. Comply with"Code Plus"provisions of above-referenced guide. 2. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: a. Combination Subflooring-Underlayment: Glue and nail to framing throughout. b. Subflooring: Glue and nail to framing throughout. C. Sheathing: Nail to framing. d. Sheathing: Nail or staple to framing. e. Underlayment: Nail or staple to subflooring. END OF SECTION 06100 .w we .w ■w ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4 Smith College Book Storage Facillity 3. Span Ratings: Provide panels with span ratings required to meet "Code Plus" provisions of APA Form No.E30,"APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential&Commercial." 4. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: APA-rated Sturd-I-Floor,Exposure 1. 5. Subflooring: APA-rated sheathing,Exposure 1. 6. Wall Sheathing: APA-rated sheathing,Exposure 1. 7. Wall Sheathing: APA-rated Structural I sheathing,Exposure 1. r� 8. Roof Sheathing: APA-rated sheathing,Exterior. 9. Roof Sheathing: APA-rated Structural I sheathing,Exterior. 10. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment,provide fire-retardant- treated plywood panels with grade, C-D Plugged Exposure 1, in thickness indicated or, if not otherwise indicated,not less than 15/32 inch thick. 11. Plywood Underlayment for Resilient Flooring: APA B-C Underlayment Exterior plywood panels with fully sanded face. 12. Plywood Underlayment for Ceramic Tile: Provide APA-rated, Underlayment grade, exterior plywood, 5/8 inch thick,for ceramic tile set in epoxy mortar. 13. Plywood Underlayment for Carpet: APA Underlayment Exposure 1 plywood panels with fully sanded face. l I. Air-Infiltration Barrier: Asphalt-saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),unperforated. J. Air-Infiltration Barrier: Air retarder complying with ASTM E 1677;made from polyolefins; either cross- laminated films,woven strands,or spunbonded fibers;coated or uncoated;with or without perforations to transmit water vapor but not liquid water; and with minimum water-vapor transmission of 10 perms " when tested according to ASTM E 96,Procedure A. K. Fasteners: Size and type indicated. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of AJ Type 304 stainless steel. 1. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. 2. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A ; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated,flat washers. L. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation,fabricated in strip form,for use as a sill sealer; 1-inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. N. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines,with members plumb,true to line,cut,and fitted. B. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of fiming,nailers,blocking,grounds,and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven staples,P-nails,and allied fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 3. "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of referenced framing standard and with AFPA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction." 4. "Table 23-I-Q--Nailing Schedule"of the Uniform Building Code. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 3 Smith College Book Storage Facillity a. Species: Southern pine; SPIB. b. Species: Douglas fir-larch;NLGA,WCLIB,or WWPA. C. Species: Hem-fir;NLGA,WCLIB,or WWPA. d. Species: Douglas fir south;WWPA. 3. Framing Other than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: Provide any species of machine stress-rated (MSR)dimension lumber with a grade of 1450f-1.3E. 4. Framing Other than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: Provide any species and grade with a modulus of elasticity of at least 1,300,000 psi and an extreme fiber stress in bending of at least 850 psi for 2-inch nominal thickness and 12-inch nominal width for single member use. 5. Exposed Framing: Provide material hand-selected from lumber of species and grade indicated e*! below for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics that would impair finish appearance. a. Species and Grade: As indicated above for load-bearing construction of same type. b. Species and Grade: Spruce-pine-fir, Select Structural; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. C. Species and Grade: Southern pine,Select Structural;SPIB. .. d. Species and Grade: Hem-fir, Select Structural;NLGA,WCLIB,or WWPA. D. For timbers of 5-inch nominal size and thicker,provide Douglas fir-larch, Select Structural per NLGA, WCLIB,or WWPA rules or Southern pine,No. 1 Dense per SPIB rules. ..� E. Concealed Boards: Provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Species and Grade: Eastern softwoods,No.3 Common per NELMA rules. 2. Species and Grade: Northern species,No.3 Common or Standard per NLGA rules. 3. Species and Grade: Mixed southern pine,No.2 per SPIB rules. 4. Species and Grade: Western woods, Standard per WCLIB rules or No. 3 Common per WWPA rules. F. Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber of any species for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking,and similar members. G. Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that evidence compliance with building code in effect for Project. Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses,as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical , data or by rational engineering analysis, and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Lumber manufactured by laminating wood veneers in a continuous press using an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 to produce members with grain of veneers parallel to their lengths and complying with the following requirements: a. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending: 2500 psi for 12-inch nominal-depth members. b. Modulus of Elasticity: 2,000,000 psi . H. Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels: Provide either all-veneer, mat-formed, or composite panels complying with DOC PS 2, "Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels," unless otherwise indicated. Provide plywood panels complying with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood,"where plywood is indicated. 1. Trademark: Factory mark structural-use panels with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements. 2. Span Ratings: Provide panels with span ratings required to suit support spacing indicated. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2 Smith College Book Storage Facillity SECTION 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY 1.1 GENERAL A. Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data, tests, certificates and/or affidavits necessary for dimension lumber, engineered wood products, underlayment, insulating sheathing, air-infiltration barriers, metal framing w anchors,and construction adhesives. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Lumber, General: Comply with DOC PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. Provide dressed lumber, S4S,with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency. 1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece, or omit grade stamps and provide grade-compliance certificates issued by inspection agency. 2. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch 1W nominal thickness or less,unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood-Preservative-Treated Materials: Comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2(lumber)and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. After treatment,kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent,respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: a. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing,flashing,vapor barriers,and waterproofing. b. Wood sills,sleepers,blocking,furring,stripping,and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. C. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. d. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 2. Pressure treat wood members in contact with ground or freshwater with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 lb/cu. ft. 3. Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. C. Dimension Lumber: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the ALSC National Grading Rule(NGR)provisions of the inspection agency indicated. 1. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade and any of the following species: a. Species: Eastern softwoods;NELMA. b. Species: Northern species;NLGA. C. Species: Mixed southern pine;SPIB. d. Species: Western woods;WCLIB or WWPA. 2. Framing Other than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: Provide Construction or No.2 grade and any of the following species: ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 1 Smith College Book Storage Facility DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Smith College Book Storage Facility B. Installation, General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing steel stairs. Set units accurately in location,with edges and surfaces level,plumb,and true. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop-welded. Do not weld,cut, or abrade the surfaces of galvanized units that are intended for bolted connections. D. Set loose items on cleaned bearing surfaces using wedges or other adjustable devices. After the items have been positioned and plumbed,tighten the anchor bolts and pack space with grout. E. Secure handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. an 1. Use brackets with flange tapped for concealed hanger bolt. F. Touch up shop paint after erection. Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and paint 'W with same material as used for shop painting. G. For galvanized surfaces,clean welds,bolted connections,and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair sk paint. END OF SECTION 05500 06 r� am ..w METAL STAIRS AND MISC. METALS 05500-4 ..� Smith College Book Storage Facility 1. At Contractor's option, provide prefabricated stair assemblies with prefilled treads consisting of prepoured reinforced concrete fill in metal pan,attached to stringers. L. Handrails and Railing Systems: Fabricated pipe railings not part of stair assembly shall comply with applicable recommendations of NAAMM Pipe Railing Manual. M. Handrails and Railing Systems: Comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish,and member sizes,but not less than that required to support structural loads. 1. Interconnect members by coping and butt-welding or by welding with internal connectors. 2. Form changes in direction of handrails and rails as follows: a. By welding in prefabricated flush elbow fittings. b. By bending. C. By mitering. d. By any method indicated above,applicable to change of direction involved. 3. Form curves by bending in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling,twisting,cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces. 4. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails. 5. Close exposed ends by welding 3/16-inch-thick steel plate or prefabricated fitting in place. 6. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for attachment to other work. For galvanized railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets,and other components. 7. Connect railing posts to stair framing by direct welding. N. Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate:Fabricate from steel plate,of thickness indicated,with manufacturer's standard abrasive granules,rolled into surface. O. Extruded Nosings and Treads: Extruded aluminum units with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum- oxide or silicon-carbide grits, or a combination of both, in an epxoy-rosin binder, of size and configuration indicated:with manufacturer's standard anchors for application indicated. P. Pipe Guards" 3-by-3-by-5/16-inch steel angles, extending from floor to 42 inches above floor. Provide with 3/8 inch steel base plates for bolting to floor, and with 1/4 inch-by-2-inch steel strap braces at top. Provide 2 vertical angles at each location and extend strap between angles and from each angle to wall or column. Q. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations on application and designations of finishes. Shop prime ferrous metal items not indicated to be galvanized. 1. Hot-dip galvanize items indicated to be galvanized. Comply with ASTM A 153 or ASTM A 123 as applicable. 2. Galvanize exterior railings and supports. 3. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with SSPC- SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning." 4. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA 1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Preparation: Coordinate and furnish anchorages,setting drawings,templates,and directions for installing anchorages,including concrete inserts,weld plates,and anchor bolts. METAL STAIRS AND MISC. METALS 05500-3 Smith College Book Storage Facility 4. Pipe: ASTM A 53,Type F, or Type S, Grade A, standard weight(schedule 40),unless otherwise indicated,or another weight required by structural loads;black finish,unless otherwise indicated. 5. Rolled Floor Plate: ASTM A 786. 6. Bars for Gratings: ASTM A 569 or ASTM A 36. 7. Wire Rod for Grating Cross Bars: ASTM A 510. 8. Commercial-Quality Sheet: Product type(method of manufacture)as follows: a. Cold-Rolled: ASTM A 366. b. Hot-Rolled: ASTM A 569. 9. Gray-Iron Castings:ASTMA A 48,Class 30. �* 10. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type;galvanized ferrous castings,either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27 cast steel. Provide bolts,washers,and shims as required,hot-dipped galvanized per ASTM A 153. C. Fasteners: Provide plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating, for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required:concealed unless otherwise indicated or unavoidable and standard with systems indicated. D. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer with good resistance to corrosion,compatible with finish paint systems,and complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664. .� E. Anchors and Inserts: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials,capable of sustaining,without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined per ASTM E488. F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint,with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight. G. Concrete Fill: Comply with requirements of Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal- weight concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,500 psi H. Fabrication,General: Form from materials of size,thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements. 1. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove sharp or rough areas and ease exposed edges. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work. 2. Weld comers and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended. 3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth,using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. I. Rough Hardware: Furnish custom-fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneoous steel and iron shapes for supporting and anchoring woodwork. ± J. Steel-Framed Stairs: Provide complete stair assemblies of type indicated, including metal framing, hangers,columns, railings, struts, clips,brackets,bearing plates, and other components necessary for the support of stairs and platforms. 1. Fabricate stringers of structural steel channels, or plates, or a combination thereof, and platforms of structural steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members, of size indicated or required to support design loads. 2. Where masonry walls support steel stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry. K. Metal Pan Risers, Subtreads, and Subplatforms: Shape metal pans from hot-rolled or cold-rolled steel sheet to configuration shown. iNk METAL STAIRS AND MISC. METALS 05500-2 am Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 05500-METAL STAIRS AND MISCELLANEOUS METALS 1.1 GENERAL A. Structural Performance of Metal Stairs: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials involved. 1. Treads of Steel Stairs: Uniform load of 100 lbf per sq. ft.or a concentrated load of 300 lbf on an area of 4 sq.inches located in the center of the tread,whichever produces the greater stress. 2. Platforms of Steel Stairs: Uniform load of 100 lbf per sq. ft.. 3. Stair Framing: Stresses resulting from loads specified above as well as stresses resulting from railing system loads. B. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Provide handrails and railing systems capable of withstanding the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials involved. 1. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied at any point and in any direction and a uniform load of 50 lbf per linear foot applied horizontally and concurrently with a uniform load of 100 1bf per linear foot applied vertically downward. Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied at any point and in any direction and a uniform load of 50 lbf per linear foot applied in any direction. Concentrated and aw uniform loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: Horizontal concentrated load of 200 lbf applied to 1 sq. ft. at any point in the system, including panels, intermediate rails, balusters, or other elements composing the infill area. Loads on infill area need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top rails. C. Submittals: In addition to product data,submit the following: 40 1. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation of steel stairs with structural computations. 2. Samples of materials and finished products as may be requested by Architect. der D. Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. E. Submittals: In addition to product data,submit the following: 1. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation of steel stairs with structural computations. 2. Samples of materials and finished products as may be requested by Architect. OW 1.2 PRODUCTS A. General: Provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. B. Steel and Iron: As follows: 1. Plates,Shapes,and Bars: ASTM A 36. 2. Cold-Formed Tubing: ASTM A 500. 3. Hot-Formed Tubing: ASTM A 501. METAL STAIRS AND MISC.METALS 05500- 1 AP N IN Smith College Book Storage Facillity ..s G. Floor Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations,unless otherwise indicated. w H. Floor Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet closures according to SDI recommendations to provide tight- fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of decking. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of floor deck panels,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Weld shear connectors through deck to support framing according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturers's instructions. Butt end joints of deck panels;do not overlap. I. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 05310 ..M ww ow Ak wr► STEEL DECK 05310-2 ..:. Smith College Book Storage Facillity SECTION 05310-STEEL DECK 1.1 GENERAL 40 A. Submittals: Product data and manufacturer's certificates for each type of deck and accessory. B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel,"including welder certification. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated,provide labeled steel deck panels identical to those tested as part of an assembly for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspection agency performing testing and follow-up services,that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. FM Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by Factory Mutual and listed in Factory Mutual"Approval Guide"for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-60 windstorm ratings. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Noncomposite Steel Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet noncomposite form deck panels conforming to SDI Publication No. 28 "Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Form Deck,"the minimum section properties indicated,and the following: 1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446, Grade E, G 60 (ASTM A 446M, Grade E, Z 180) zinc coated according to ASTM A 525(ASTM A 525M). 2. Profile Depth:as shown on drawings. 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness:as shown on drawings. D. Accessories: Roof deck accessory materials and floor deck pour stops and closures that comply with requirements indicated and recommendations of the steel deck manufacturer. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary of SDI Publication No.28,manufacturer's recommendations,and requirements of this Section. B. Place deck panels on supporting framing and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting framing before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. C. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting framing without warp or deflection. D. Cut, reinforce, and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking. E. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,appearance and quality of welds,and methods used in correcting welding work. F. Roof Deck Accessories: Install sump pans, sump plates, ridge and valley plates, finish strips, cover plates, end closures,and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's recommendations. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. STEEL DECK 05310- 1 Smith College Book Storage Facility 4. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures,appearance and quality of welds,and methods used in correcting welding work. ww M. Shop Priming: Shop prime steel, except surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar, surfaces to be field welded,surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections, and surfaces to receive sprayed- on fireproofing. 1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 2 "Hand Tool Cleaning"or SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning." 2. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, comers, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1.3 EXECUTION **� A. Erect structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. , B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates and set on wedges,shims,or setting nuts as required. 1. Tighten anchor bolts, cut off wedges or shims flush with edge of base or bearing plate, and pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates. C. Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1. Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned shear/bearing connections. D. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. END OF SECTION 05120 M* STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-2 .,,� Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 05120-STRUCTURAL STEEL 0 1.1 GENERAL A. Submittals: In addition to Product Data and mill test reports on structural steel and bolts, submit Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components, including connections, splices, holes, welds,and bolts. B. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." 2. ASTM A 6 "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use." 3. Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 1. Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and,if pertinent,has undergone recertification. D. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets,platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Structural Steel Shapes,Plates,and Bars: ASTM A 36 carbon steel. B. Cold-Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500,Grade B. C. Nonhigh-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A; carbon-steel, hex-head bolts; carbon-steel nuts;and flat,unhardened steel washers,uncoated. D. Primer: Nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC's"Painting System Guide No. 7.00." E. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application. F. Fabrication: Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate structural steel according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop Drawings. 1. Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"for structural steel. 2. Shop install and tighten nonhigh-strength bolts,except where high-strength bolts are indicated 3. Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." a. Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned shear/bearing connections. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120- 1 W Smith College Book Storage Facility ON Ow METALS DIVISION 5 ..s Smith College Book Storage Facility a. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3/4 inch or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 2 inches pour height of 12 inches. b. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches,pour height of 60 inches. 2. Do not exceed the following pour heights for coarse grout: a. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 1-1/2 inches,pour height of 12 inches. e b. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches, pour height of 60 inches. C. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 3 inches, pour height of 12 feet. P. Parging: Parge predampened masonry walls,where indicated,with Type S or Type N mortar applied in 2 uniform coats with a smooth, steel-trowel finish. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. Damp cure parging for at least 24 hours. s Q. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears prior to tooling joints. R. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, remove mortar particles with nonmetallic ..A scrapers,and clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison r► purposes. 2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners;remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean brick by bucket and brush method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20 Revised,using the specified masonry cleaner. 5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of AM stain. S. Masonry Waste Disposal: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including broken masonry units, waste mortar,and excess or soil-contaminated sand,by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. END OF SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY 04200-6 4 Smith College Book Storage Facility IF 2. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet 3. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet 4. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown,do not exceed minus 1/4 inch nor plus 1/2 inch. 5. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from bed joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from head joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch E. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns and for accurate locating of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners,jambs,and where possible at other locations. F. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern indicated;do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs. G. Built-in Work: As construction progresses,build-in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts,and similar items,unless otherwise indicated. I. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. J. Provide continuous horizontal-joint reinforcement as indicated. Install with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap a minimum of 6 inches 1. Provide continuity at comers and wall intersections by using prefabricated"L" and"T"sections. ` K. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide a 1-inch open space between masonry and structural member,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. L. Provide masonry lintels where shown. Provide precast lintels matching concrete masonry units in color, texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcement bars indicated or required to support loads indicated. M. Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles,lintels,ledges,other obstructions to 0 the downward flow of water in the wall,and where indicated. 1. Extend flashing 4 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form a pan. N. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. O. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Do not exceed the following pour heights for fine grout: UNIT MASONRY 04200- 5 am Smith College Book Storage Facility no P. Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories: As follows: 1. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Am Grade 1;compressible up to 35 percent;of width and thickness indicated. 2. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall;size and configuration as indicated,made from styrene-butadiene rubber complying with ASTM D 2000,Designation M2AA-805. 3. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I(No. 15 asphalt felt). so Q. Masonry Cleaners: As follows: 1. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal.of water. NOW 2. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence,and other stains from masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. R. Mortar and Grout Mixes: Do not use admixtures unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 1. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar indicated below: 2. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification, for job-mixed mortar;and ASTM C 1142 for ready-mixed mortar,of types indicated below: 3. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with U.B.C. Standard No.21-15, Proportion Specification, for Mortar Cement mortar of types indicated below: a. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. b. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, reinforced masonry,and where indicated, use Type S. C. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for .. interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated,use Type N. 4. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. Use grout of consistency to completely fill spaces intended to receive grout. 1.3 EXECUTION "''"' A. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges 4k concealed. B. Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. .,,. C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick prior to laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb the water so they are damp but not wet at the time of laying. D. Construction Tolerances: As follows: 1. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet nor 3/8 inch in 20 feet nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed plus or minus 114 inch in 10 feet nor 1/2 inch maximum. UNIT MASONRY 04200-4 „� 4W Smith College Book Storage Facility J. Joint Reinforcement: Provide joint reinforcement formed from galvanized carbon-steel wire, ASTM A 641,Class 1,for interior walls;and ASTM A 153,Class B-2,for exterior walls. 1. Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross Ok rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet with prefabricated comer and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below: a. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch b. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch 2. For single-wythe masonry,provide truss design with single pair of side rods: K. Ties and Anchors,General: Provide ties and anchors that comply with the following requirements,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wire: As follows: a. Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating for exterior walls;and with ASTM A 641 Class 1 coating for interior walls. ' 2. Steel Sheet: As follows: a. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366(commercial quality)cold-rolled,carbon-steel sheet �1 hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153, Class B-3, for sheet- metal ties and anchors in exterior walls; ASTM A 526, G 60 (commercial quality), steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process on continuous lines prior to fabrication, for sheet- metal ties and anchors in interior walls. L. Bent Wire Ties: Individual units prefabricated from bent wire to comply with requirements indicated. M. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Frame: Provide 2-piece assemblies as described below, wire diameter as indicated: 1. For Anchorage to Concrete: Dovetail sheet metal anchor section and triangular-shaped wire tie r section sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face. 2. For Anchorage to Steel Framing: Crimped 1/4-inch-diameter wire anchor section for welding to steel and triangular-shaped wire tie section sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face. N. Rigid Anchors: Steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches long,with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins. Shop paint with 2 coats of coal-tar epoxy-polyamide paint. O. Embedded Flashing Materials: As follows: 1. Sheet-Metal Flashing: Fabricate from the following metal complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section"Flashing and Sheet Metal"and below: a. Stainless Steel: 0.0156 inch thick. b. Copper: 10-oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0135 inch thick for fully concealed flashing, 16-oz./sq. ft.weight or 0.0216 inch thick elsewhere. 2. Copper-Fabric Laminate: Copper sheet weighing 7 oz./sq. ft. bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. 3. Rubberized Asphalt Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard composite flashing product consisting of a pliable and highly adhesive rubberized asphalt compound, 26 mils thick, bonded completely and integrally to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film, 4 mils thick, to produce an overall thickness of 30 mils. UNIT MASONRY 04200- 3 .w Smith College Book Storage Facility 1. Compressive Strength: 3500 psi minimum average net-area compressive strength. 2. Compressive Strength: As required to produce concrete unit masonry construction of compressive strength indicated. 3. Weight Classification: Normal weight. Am 4. Provide Type I,moisture-controlled units. 5. Provide Type II,nonmoisture-controlled units. E. Brick,General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: am 1. Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces. am 2. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size,form,color,and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. F. Face Brick: ASTM C 216 and as follows: .,a 1. Grade: SW. 2. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi minimum average net-area compressive strength. 3. Initial Rate of Absorption: Between 5 and 20 g/30 sq. in.per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. 4. Surface Coloring: Brick with surface coloring, other than flashed or sand-finished brick, shall withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet .+ 5. Type: FBS. 6. Size: As indicated in BIA Technical Note IOB for the size designation below, within tolerances specified in ASTM C 216: .. a. Size: Standard. G. Building(Common)Brick: ASTM C 62 and as follows: .w 1. Grade: SW. 2. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi minimum average net-area compressive strength. 3. Size: Match size of face brick. H. Mortar and Grout Materials: As follows: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. 2. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 3. Mortar Cement: U.B.C.Standard No.21-14. 4. For pigmented mortars,use premixed,colored-cement or cement-lime mix of formulation required to produce color indicated. 5. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207,Type S. 6. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch, use aggregate graded ' with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. a. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone,as required to match Architect's sample. 7. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. 8. Mortar Pigments: Iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and , with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. 9. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 10. Water: Potable. I. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615,Grade 60 UNIT MASONRY 04200-2 +. Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 04200-UNIT MASONRY 1.1 GENERAL A. Allowances: Furnish face brick at entry ramp under a unit cost allowance of $35/brick. B. Performance Requirements: Provide unit masonry that develops installed compressive strengths(fm) at 28 days as indicated. C. Submittals: In addition to product data,submit the following: 1. Samples for masonry units and mortar showing the full range of colors and textures available. 2. Material certificates for each different masonry product required. 3. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency for mortar, grout mixes, and masonry units. D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit 0-0 masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with the following requirements: -- 1. Cold-Weather Construction: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar and grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. Maintain mortar and grout above freezing. Heat 0 masonry units to 40 deg F for grouting. 2. Cold-Weather Protection: Cover masonry with insulating blankets or provide enclosure and heat to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F for 48 hours after construction. Install wind breaks when wind velocity exceeds 15 mi./h. F. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work from excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F and above. 1.2 PRODUCTS Ow A. Colors,Textures,and Patterns: Provide masonry units and mortar for exposed work matching Architect's samples or, if none, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors, textures, and patterns. B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: 1. Compressive Strength: 1900 psi minimum average net-area compressive strength. 2. Compressive Strength: As required to produce concrete unit masonry construction of compressive strength indicated. 3. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 4. Provide Type I,moisture-controlled units. 5. Provide Type II,nonmoisture-controlled units. 6. Size: Manufactured to the actual dimensions of 318 inch less than nominal sizes indicated on Drawings: 7. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture,unless otherwise indicated. 8. Provide special shapes for lintels,comers,jambs,sash,control joints,headers,bonding,and other special conditions. 9. Provide square-edged units for outside comers,except where indicated as bullnose. C. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55 and as follows: UNIT MASONRY 04200- 1 Smith College Book Storage Facility DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Ma Smith College Book Storage Facility no 1. Ready-mixed topping complying with ASTM C 94 may be used when acceptable to Architect. Aft 1.3 EXECUTION A. Topping Applied to Fresh Concrete: Do not begin placement of topping until water ceases to rise to No surface,and water and laitance have been removed from base slab surface. B. Topping Applied to Hardened Concrete: Remove dirt, loose material, oil, grease, paint, or other contaminants leaving a clean surface. ,,,,,, 1. When base slab surface is unacceptable for good bonding, roughen surface by chipping or scarifying before cleaning. OW C. Prior to placing topping mixture,dampen slab surface,but do not leave standing water. Over dampened surface,and immediately before placing topping,broom-on a coat of thin neat cement grout. Apply neat cement grout only to areas that will receive topping before grout sets or dries. 1. In lieu of neat cement grout, manufactured bonding agent, integrally colored to show extent of application, may be used. Apply by brush or spray, at recommended rates, in accordance with manufacturer's directions. .w D. For reinforced toppings,provide necessary chairs or supports, and maintain position of reinforcing mesh as shown on drawings. E. Joints: Mark locations of joints in base slab so that joints in top course will be placed directly over them. F. Float Finish: Spread topping mixture evenly over prepared base to the required elevation and strike off. Use highway straightedge, bull float, or darby to level surface. After the topping has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation and water sheen has disappeared, float surface at least twice to a uniform sandy texture. Restraighten where necessary with highway straightedge. The surface shall achieve an F/F 20 and F2 17 tolerance when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1155. Uniformly slope surface to drains. G. Trowel Finish: After floating,begin fast trowel finish operation using power driven trowels. Continue troweling until surface is ready to receive final troweling. Begin final troweling when a ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface. Continue final trowel operation to produce finished surface free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and achieving an F/F 25 and F/L 20 tolerance when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1155. H. Cure and protect topping applications and finishes as specified in Section"Cast-In-Place Concrete". I. Performance: Failure of concrete topping to bond to substrate (as evidenced by a hollow sound when tapped,disintegration,or other failure of topping to perform as a floor finish)will be considered failure of materials and workmanship. Repair or replace toppings in areas of such failures,as directed. END OF SECTION 03350 CONCRETE TOPPINGS 03350-2 40 Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 03350-CONCRETE TOPPINGS 1.1 GENERAL A. Related Documents: Comply with requirements of Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" and as herein specified. B. Submittals: Furnish data,samples,laboratory test reports and materials certificates as specified in Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete." 1.2 PRODUCTS !' A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I or Type 111. 0 1. Furnish white cement if required to obtain finish color to match Architect's sample. B. Standard Aggregate: ASTM C 33,and as follows: OR 1. Fine aggregate consisting of sand or crushed stone screenings, clean, hard, free of deleterious matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows: a. 3/8-inch: 100 percent. b. No.4: 95-100 percent. C. No. 8: 80-90 percent. d. No. 16: 50-75 percent. e. No. 30: 30-50 percent. f. No. 50: 10-20 percent. g. No. 100: 2-5 percent. 2. Coarse aggregate consisting of gravel or crushed stone, clean, hard, free of deleterious matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows: a. 1/2-inch: 100 percent. b. 3/8-inch: 30-50 percent. C. No.4: 0-15 percent. d. No. 8: 0-5 percent. C. Furnish selected aggregate to match Architect's finish sample. D. Reinforcement: ASTM A 185,welded steel wire fabric. E. Standard Topping: Design mix to produce topping material with following characteristics: 1. Compressive Strength: 4000 psi minimum. 2. Slump: 8 inches maximum at point of placement for concrete containing md-range, water- reducing admixture(super-plasticizer)and 4 inches maximum for other concrete. 3. W/C Ratio: 0.44 maximum. F. Mixing: Provide batch type mechanical mixer for mixing topping material at Project site. Equip batch mixer with a suitable charging hopper, water storage tank, and a water-measuring device. Use mixers that are capable of mixing aggregates,cement,and water into a uniform mix within specified time,and of discharging mix without segregation. G. Mix each batch of 2 cu. yds., or less, for at least 1-1/2 minutes after ingredients are in mixer. Increase mixing time 15 seconds for each additional cu.yd.or fraction thereof. CONCRETE TOPPINGS 03350- 1 Smith College Book Storage Facility 400 3. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-set mortar, apply trowel finish as specified,then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface by fine brooming. 4. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps,and elsewhere as indicated. a. Immediately after float finishing,slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber- .� bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. I. Curing: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather, apply an evaporation-control compound according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating,but before power floating and troweling. 1. Begin initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from exposed surfaces. .w 2. Continue curing unformed concrete surfaces by water ponding, continuous fog spraying, continuously wetted absorptive cover, or by moisture-retaining cover curing. Cure formed surfaces by moist curing until forms are removed. Keep concrete continuously moist for not less •• than 72 hours for high-early strength concrete and 7 days for all other concrete. J. Field Quality Control: Perform sampling and testing during concrete placement,as follows: K. Field Quality Control: The Owner reserves the right to employ a testing agency to perform tests. If tests show unsatisfactory work or non-coompliance with construction documents, contractor will pay testing costs. END OF SECTION 03300 Am .w .n w .r, .w CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4 •s, Smith College Book Storage Facility B. Vapor Retarders/Barriers: Place vapor retarder/barrier membrane for slabs on grade,with joints lapped 6 inches and sealed. C. Reinforcement: Accurately position and support reinforcement,and secure against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement to maintain minimum cover with metal chairs,runners,bolsters, spacers,and hangers as required. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete,not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 1. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable; lap at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. D. Joints: Locate and install construction, isolation, and control joints as indicated or required. Locate construction joints so they do not impair strength and appearance of structure. Place isolation and control joints in slabs-on-ground to stabilize differential settlement and prevent random cracking. lA► E. Installation of Embedded Items: Set and build anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting diagrams, templates, and instructions provided by others for locating and setting. 1. Locate and support waterstops to prevent displacement. F. Concrete Placement: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete,"for placing concrete in a continuous operation within planned joints or sections. Do not begin concrete placement until other affected work is completed. 1. Consolidate placed concrete using mechanical vibrating equipment with hand rodding and tamping ps so that concrete is worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into forms. 2. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to weather extremes during mixing,placing,and curing. 0" a. In cold weather comply with ACI 306. b. In hot weather comply with ACI 305. G. Finish of Formed Surface: As follows: 1. Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide a smooth finish for concrete surfaces exposed to view and surfaces to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. Repair and patch defective areas,with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed. H. Monolithic Slab Finishes: As follows: 1. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish when surface water has disappeared and when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power- driven floats. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating. a. Check and level surface plane to tolerances of F(F) 18 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor levelness). Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling,refloat surface to a uniform,smooth,granular texture. 2. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, paint, or other thin film-finish coating system. a. After floating,begin first trowel-finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance,and with surface leveled to tolerances of F(F)20 (floor flatness)and F(L) 17 (floor levelness). Grind smooth surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3 80, Smith College Book Storage Facility Am 2. Vapor Retarder: Clear 8-mil-thick polyethylene. 3. Water-Resistant Barrier: Polyethylene membrane with multi-ply kraft paper and glass-fiber- reinforced core. 4. Vapor Barrier: 1/8-inch-thick asphalt core membrane. Aft 5. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd.,complying with AASHTO M 182,Class 2. 6. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Waterproof paper,polyethylene film, or polyethylene-coated burlap, complying with ASTM C 171. 7. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309,Type I. Moisture loss not more than 0.55 kg/sq.meter when applied at 200 sq.ft./gal. 8. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. F. Mix Proportions and Design: Proportion mixes complying with mix design procedures specified in ACI 301. 1. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of cement content by weight. 2. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties: a. 3500-psi, 28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.51 maximum (non-air- entrained),0.40 maximum(air-entrained). 3. Limit maximum water-cement ratio of concrete exposed to freezing and thawing to 0.45. 4. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows: a. Ramps,Slabs,and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3 inches. b. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 3 inches. 5. Adjust mix designs gns when material characteristics,job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. Do not use revised concrete mixes until laboratory test data and strength results have been submitted to and reviewed by Architect. G. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete, providing not less than 4.5 percent nor more than 7 percent entrained air for concrete exposed to freezing and thawing,and from 2 percent to 4 percent for other concrete. H. Use water-reducing, accelerating, and retarding admixtures that have been tested and accepted in mix designs in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions. I. Job-Site Mixing: Use drum-type batch machine mixer,mixing not less than 1-1/2 minutes for 1 cu.yd. or smaller capacity. Increase mixing time at least 15 seconds for each additional cu.yd. J. Ready-Mix Concrete: ASTM C 94. ba 1.3 EXECUTION ,., A. Formwork: Construct formwork so that concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment,elevation,and position. Select form materials to obtain required finishes. 1. Maintain formwork tolerances and surface irregularities within ACI 347 limits, Class A tolerances for concrete exposed to view and Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces. 2. Provide openings in formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. �a 3. Clean and adjust forms prior to concrete placement. Apply form-release agents or wet forms as required. Retighten forms during concrete placement,if required,to eliminate mortar leaks. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2 04 Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 03300-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.1 GENERAL A. Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product data for reinforcement,foaming accessories,admixtures,patching compounds,waterstops, joint systems,curing compounds,dry-shake finish materials,and others as requested by Architect. P0 2. Shop drawings for fabricating,bending,and placing concrete reinforcement. 3. Laboratory test reports or evaluation reports for concrete materials and concrete mix designs. 4. Written report to Architect for each proposed concrete mix at least 15 days prior to start of concreting. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by Architect. B. Quality Assurance: Comply with provisions of ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings," ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete," and CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice,"except where more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a testing agency acceptable to Architect to perform materials evaluation testing and to design concrete mixes. a. Materials certificates signed by concrete producer and Contractor may be submitted in lieu of materials laboratory testing when acceptable to Architect. l 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Form Materials: Furnish form materials with sufficient stability to withstand pressure of placed concrete without bow or deflection. 1. Forms for Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Suitable panel-type material to provide continuous, straight,smooth,exposed surfaces. B. Reinforcing Materials: As follows: tw 1. Deformed Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615,Grade 60,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185. C. Concrete Materials: As follows: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type 1. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618,Type F. 00 3. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, except local aggregates of proven durability may be used when acceptable to Architect. 4. Water: Potable. 5. Fiber Reinforcement: Engineered polypropylene fibers designed for secondary reinforcement of 40 concrete slabs. D. Admixtures: Provide admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. i 1. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 2. Water-Reducing,Retarding,and Accelerating Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494. A" E. Related Materials: As follows: 1. Waterstops: Flat dumbbell or centerbulb type,size to suit joints, of either rubber(CRD C 513)or PVC(CRD C 572). CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 1 Smith College Book Storage Facility JPW DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE No Smith College Book Storage Facility am 2. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic,to provide a uniform fine line texture. 3. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating surface 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom,perpendicular to line of traffic. AM G. Final Tooling: Tool edges and joints formed in fresh concrete with a jointing tool to a radius of 3/8 inch. Repeat tooling of edges and joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. H. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Apply nonslip aggregate finish to float-finished paving surface. Uniformly spread 25 lb of dampened nonslip aggregate per 100 sq.ft.of surface. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel,but do not force below surface. 1. After curing,lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone,and water to expose nonslip aggregate. .. I. Dry-Shake Color Finish: Apply dry-shake material following first floating operation at rate of 100 lb per 100 sq.ft.,unless a greater amount is recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Uniformly apply 2/3 of the material over the concrete surface with a mechanical spreader, and embed by float finishing. Uniformly distribute remainder of the material to ensure uniform color, and embed by floating. .� 2. Apply a light hand-trowel finish followed by a broom finish to concrete. Apply curing compound recommended by the dry-shake material manufacturer immediately after the final finishing. J. Protection: In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control film. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating,but before floating. K. Curing: Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from exposed surfaces. 1. Moisture-cure concrete by water ponding, continuous fog spraying, continuously wetted ,.. absorptive cover,or by moisture-retaining-cover curing. Keep concrete continuously moist for not less than 7 days. L. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective, and does not meet the requirements of this Section. M. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. N. Maintain concrete paving free of stains,discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete paving not more than 2 days prior to date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. .r END OF SECTION 02520 .rru PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-3 40 Smith College Book Storage Facility E. Curing Materials: As follows: 1. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. 2. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd.,complying with AASHTO M 182,Class 2. 3. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Waterproof paper, polyethylene film, or white burlap-polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM C 171. F. Mix Design: Comply with mix design procedures specified in ACI 301 and proportion mixes according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301 to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength: 3500 psi at 28 days. 2. Water-Cement Ratio: 0.45 maximum at point of placement. r 3. Slump Limit: 3 inches at point of placement. 4. Air Content: 5.5 to 7.0 percent. "A G. Site Mixing: Use drum-type batch machine mixer,mixing not less than 1-1/2 minutes for 1 cu. yd. or smaller capacity. Increase mixing time at least 15 seconds for each additional cu.yd. H. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and ASTM C 94. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Surface Preparation: Proof-roll prepared subbase and remove loose material from surface. B. Forms: Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for paving to required lines,grades,and elevations. C. Reinforcement: Accurately position and support reinforcement, and secure against displacement. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete. D. Joints: Locate and install contraction, construction, isolation, and expansion joints as indicated or required. E. Concrete Placement: Comply with ACI 304 for measuring,mixing,transporting, and placing concrete. Place concrete in a continuous operation within planned joints or sections. 1. Moisten subbase when required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. 2. Consolidate placed concrete according to ACI 309R using mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented with hand rodding and tamping. 3. Screed and darby or bull-float the surface before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. 4. Protect concrete from cold or hot weather during mixing,placing,and curing as follows. a. In cold weather,comply with ACI 306R. b. In hot weather,comply with ACI 305R. F. Float Finish: Begin floating when bleed water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surfaces to true planes within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10 feet as determined by a 10-foot-long straightedge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to a uniform granular texture. 1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic,to provide a uniform gritty texture. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-2 am Smith College Book Storage Facility r► SECTION 02520-PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 1.1 GENERAL A. Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product data for reinforcement, accessories, admixtures,joint systems, curing compounds, and dry-shake color materials. 2. Design mixes for each class of concrete. Include revised mix proportions when characteristics of �* materials,project conditions,weather,test results,or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 3. Laboratory test reports for evaluation of concrete materials and mix design tests. 4. Material certificates, signed by concrete manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each concrete material complies with or exceeds requirements, may be submitted in lieu of material laboratory testing when acceptable to Architect. B. Quality Assurance: Comply with provisions of ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings," ACI 318, 'Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete," and CRSI "Manual of .... Standard Practice,"except where more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products ..�, complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 2. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform materials evaluation testing and to design concrete mixes. am 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other acceptable panel-type materials to .�. provide full-depth,continuous,straight,smooth exposed surfaces. B. Reinforcing Materials: As follows: ... 1. Deformed Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615,Grade 60,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185,flat sheets,not rolls. .. C. Concrete Materials: As follows: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type 1. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618,Type F. 3. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4, except aggregates of proven durability may be used when r acceptable to Architect. 4. Water: Potable. 5. Fiber Reinforcement: ASTM C 1116,Type III. 4 D. Admixtures: Provide admixtures that are compatible with one another and do not contain more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. 1. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. am 2. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type A. 3. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type F or Type G. 4. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type E. Oak 5. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type D. �m, PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520- 1 Aw 40 Smith College - Book Storage Facility SECTION 02160-EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEMS 1.1 General: A. Excavation Support Systems include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Shoring and bracing necessary to protect existing buildings, streets, walkways,utilities, and other improvements and excavations against loss of ground or caving embankments. 2. Maintenance of shoring and bracing. 3. Removal of shoring and bracing,as required. B. Regulations: Comply with codes and ordinances of governing authorities having jurisdiction. C. Job Conditions: Before starting work,verify governing dimensions and elevations. Survey condition of -- adjoining properties, take photographs, recording existing settlement or cracking of structures, pavements, and other improvements. Prepare list of such damages, verified by dated photographs, and signed by Contractor and others conducting investigation. D. Survey adjacent structures and improvements, establishing exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. E. During excavation, resurvey benchmarks weekly, maintaining accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations occur or if cracks,sags,or other damage is evident. F. Existing Utilities: Protect existing,active utility services and structures from damage during shoring and bracing work. Repair or replace damages to satisfaction of utility owner. 1.3 Execution: A. Shoring: Protect site from caving and unacceptable soil movement. Where shoring is required, locate PP system to clear permanent construction and to permit forming and finishing of concrete surfaces. Provide shoring system adequately anchored and braced to resist earth and hydrostatic pressures. B. Shoring systems retaining earth on which support or stability of existing structures is dependent must be left in place at completion of work. C. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent work. If necessary to move a brace,install new bracing prior to removal of original brace. D. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work, except as Alp otherwise acceptable to Architect. E. Install internal bracing,if required,to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames. 00 F. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures. G. Remove sheeting, shoring, and bracing in stages to avoid disturbance to underlying soils and damage to structures,pavements,facilities,and utilities. H. Repair or replace adjacent work damaged or displaced through installation or removal of shoring and bracing work. END OF SECTION 02160 EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEMS 02160- 1 ..a Smith College Book Storage Facility F. Employ a certified, licensed exterminator to treat building and to control rodents and vermin before and during selective demolition operations. G. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks,and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. H. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings, facilities, and site improvements to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area. 1. Provide temporary weather protection,during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction,on exterior surfaces and new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage .■. occurs to structure or interior areas. 2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing fmish work that are to remain and are exposed during selective demolition operations. 3. Cover and protect furniture,furnishings,and equipment that have not been removed. I. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. ..� J. Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring,bracing,or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement,settlement,or collapse of building to be selectively demolished. K. Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations. L. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. M. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition. .r. N. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. O. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by selective demolition operations. P. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required,patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. Q. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining construction to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. .� R. Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where demolished walls or partitions extend one finished area into another. Provide a flush and even surface of uniform color and appearance. S. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. T. Disposal: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate ' on-site. 1. Do not bum demolished materials. 2. Dispose of demolished materials at designated spoil areas on Owner's property. 3. Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. U. Sweep the building broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation. END OF SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-2 ,., Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 02070-SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 1.1 GENERAL A. Definitions: As follows: 1. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to remain the Owner's property. a ► 2. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner's property. Remove,clean,and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify contents of containers and deliver to Owner's designated storage area. 3. Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them for reuse;store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in locations indicated. 4. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations. B. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner's property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor's option. C. Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section"Contract Closeout." u�r 1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before starting selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. E. Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so that Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 1.2 EXECUTION A. Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition. B. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. C. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. D. Utility Requirements: Locate,identify, shut off,disconnect,and seal or cap off indicated utility services serving building to be selectively demolished. 1. Where utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide bypass connections to maintain continuity of service to other parts of the building before proceeding with selective demolition. E. Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables,or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070- 1 on Smith College Book Storage Facility 40 Op No DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK Smith College Book Storge Facility J. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial-quality, durable 3-ring, vinyl-covered loose-leaf binders,thickness as necessary to accommodate contents,and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product,and the name,address,and telephone number of the Installer. 2. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project title or name,and name of the Contractor. 3. When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide additional copies of each required warranty,as necessary,for inclusion in each required manual. END OF SECTION 01740 A I'm OR am 40 go WARRANTIES 01740-2 .m Smith College Book Storge Facility ow SECTION 01740-WARRANTIES AW 1.1 GENERAL A. Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for wo particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. B. Special warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents,either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. so 1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's period for correction of the Work. C. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not an relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. .o D. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction,remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction. Aw E. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding,reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. "` F. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. The no Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. G. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties and ow shall not limit the duties,obligations,rights,and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties,obligations,rights,or remedies. am 1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment, the Owner Oft reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work,until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. H. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the a Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion,submit written warranties upon request of the Architect. 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by AM separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect within 15 days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. I. When the Contract Documents require the Contractor,or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer to execute a special warranty, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner,through the Architect,for approval prior to final execution. ? 1. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. WARRANTIES 01740- 1 ,.., as Smith College Book Storage Facility C. Final Cleaning: Employ experienced cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal,commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Complete the following operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion. 1. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. 2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass. Remove glazing compounds. Replace chipped or broken glass. 3. Clean exposed finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and foreign substances. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. 4. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication. Clean plumbing fixtures. Clean light fixtures and lamps. 5. Clean the site of rubbish,litter, and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas;remove stains, spills, and foreign deposits. Rake grounds to a smooth,even-textured surface. - D. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities. E. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Remove waste materials and dispose of lawfully. oft END OF SECTION 01700 OW l CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-3 oil .,k Smith College Book Storage Facility 1. Upon completion of reinspection,the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance. If the Work is incomplete, the Architect will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required. 2. If necessary,reinspection will be repeated. F. Record Document Submittals: Do not use record documents for construction. Protect from loss in a secure location. Provide access to record documents for the Architect's reference. **� G. Record Drawings: Maintain a set of prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark the drawing most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Give attention to concealed '"� elements. 1. Mark sets with red pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate 00 categories of the Work. 2. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind with durable-paper cover sheets;print titles,dates,and other identification on the cover of each set. ow H. Record Specifications: Maintain one copy of the Project Manual, including addenda. Mark to show variations in Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. Give attention to substitutions and selection of options and information on concealed construction. Note related record drawing information and Product Data. 1. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Architect for the Owner's records. I. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operation and maintenance data into sets of manageable size. Bind in individual, heavy-duty, 2-inch,3-ring, binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following information: . � 1. Emergency instructions. 2. Spare parts list. 3. Copies of warranties. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Shop Drawings and Product Data. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each Installer of equipment that requires maintenance to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. Include a detailed review of the following items: 1. Maintenance manuals. 2. Spare parts,tools,and materials. 3. Lubricants and fuels. 4. Identification systems. 5. Control sequences. 6. Hazards. 7. Warranties and bonds. ..� 8. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments. B. As part of instruction for operating equipment,demonstrate the following: 1. Startup and shutdown. 2. Emergency operations and safety procedures. 3. Noise and vibration adjustments. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-2 ••: Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 01700-CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1.1 GENERAL A. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions 2 through 16. B. Substantial Completion: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following: 1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the Work claimed as substantially complete. a. Include supporting documentation for completion and an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties,workmanship bonds,maintenance agreements,final certifications,and similar documents. 4. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, final project photographs, damage or settlement surveys,property surveys,and similar final record information. 5. Deliver tools,spare parts,extra stock,and similar items. 6. Provide cylinders for keying by Owner. 7. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of operation and maintenance personnel. Remove temporary facilities,mockups,construction tools,and similar elements. 8. Complete final cleanup requirements,including touchup painting. 9. Touch up and repair and restore marred,exposed finishes. C. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will proceed or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. r 1. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work is substantially complete. 2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. D. Final Acceptance: Before requesting inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the following: P" 1. Final payment request with releases and supporting documentation. Include insurance certificates where required. 2. Submit a statement,accounting for changes to the Contract Sum. 3. Submit a copy of the final inspection list stating that each item has been completed or otherwise ►i resolved for acceptance. 4. Submit consent of surety to final payment. 5. Submit a final settlement statement. 6. Submit evidence of continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. E. Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work has been completed, except for items whose completion is delayed under circumstances acceptable to the Architect. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700- 1 MW Smith College Book Storage Facility 3. The specified product cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The Architect will not consider the request if the specified product cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly. 4. The request is related to an"or-equal"clause. 5. The substitution offers the Owner a substantial advantage, in cost, time, or other considerations, after deducting compensation to the Architect for redesign and increased cost of other construction. 6. The specified product cannot receive approval by a governing authority,and the substitution can be approved. B. The Contractor's submittal and the Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples JAW for construction not complying with the Contract Documents do not constitute an acceptable request for substitution,nor do they constitute approval. END OF SECTION 01631 w w .w SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 -2 40 Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 01631 -SUBSTITUTIONS 1.1 GENERAL A. Substitutions: Changes in products,materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents proposed after award of the Contract are considered requests for substitutions. The following are not requests for substitutions: 1. Substitutions requested during the bidding period and accepted by Addendum prior to award of the Contract. 2. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner. 3. Specified options included in the Contract Documents. 40 4. Contractor's compliance with regulations issued by governing authorities. B. Substitution Request Submittal: The Architect will consider requests for substitution received within 60 days after commencement of the Work. 1. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution. Submit requests according to procedures required for change-order proposals. 2. Identify the product or method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. 3. Provide documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions and the following information: a. Coordination information, including a list of changes needed to other Work that will be necessary to accommodate the substitution. b. A comparison of the substitution with the Work specified,including performance,weight, "M size,durability,and visual effect. C. Product Data,including Drawings and descriptions of products and installation procedures. d. Samples,where applicable or requested e. A statement indicating the effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the substitution on Contract Time. f. Cost information,including a proposal of the net change,if any in the Contract Sum. ,u g. Certification that the substitution conforms to the Contract Documents and is appropriate for the applications indicated. h. The Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately. 4. Architect's Action: If necessary,the Architect will request additional information within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. The Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection within 2 weeks of receipt of the request. Acceptance will be in the form of a change order. a. Use the product specified if the Architect cannot make a decision within the time allocated. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Conditions: The Architect will receive and consider a request for substitution when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied. Otherwise,the Architect will return the requests without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required. 2. Changes are in keeping with the intent of the Contract Documents. SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 - 1 Smithe College Book Storage Facillity 2. Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name 2 or more products or manufacturers,provide 1 of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. a. Where products are specified by name, accompanied by the term "or equal," comply with provisions concerning"substitutions"to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 3. Nonproprietary Specifications: When Specifications list products or manufacturers that are ... available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the Contractor to use of these products only, the Contractor may propose any available product that complies with Contract requirements. Comply with Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 4. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product, listing characteristics required,with or without use of a brand name,provide a product that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with requirements. 5. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply and are recommended for the application. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in product literature or by the manufacturer's certification of performance. 6. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only require .� compliance with an imposed code, standard,or regulation,select a product that complies with the standards,codes,or regulations specified. 7. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching a Sample, the Architect's decision on a whether a product matches will be final. Where no product in the specified category matches and complies with other requirements,comply with provisions concerning"substitutions" for selection of a matching product in another category. 8. Visual Selection: Where requirements include the phrase "... as selected from manufacturer's standard colors,patterns,textures..."or a similar phrase,select a product that complies with other requirements. The Architect will select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line selected. am 1.3 EXECUTION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of products. Anchor each product securely in AAA. place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. «.a END OF SECTION 01600 A, APlA MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600-2 40 Smithe College Book Storage Facillity - SECTION 01600-MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 1.1 GENERAL A. "Products"are items purchased for incorporation in the Work,whether purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. 1. "Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or designation,shown or listed in the manufacturer's published product literature. B. "Materials" are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated,processed,or installed to form a part of the Work. C. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections,such as wiring or piping. D. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind from a single source. 1. When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between 2 or more products for use on the Project,the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected. E. Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations,using means and methods that will prevent damage,deterioration,and loss,including theft. 1. Coordinate all deliveries with Owner. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage and to prevent overcrowding construction spaces. Coordinate with installation to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration,theft,and other losses. 2. Deliver products in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system,complete with labels and instructions for handling,storing,unpacking,protecting,and installing. 3. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 4. Store products to facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. Store heavy materials away from the structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction. 5. Store products subject to damage by the elements within confines of construction site. Coordinate with Owner. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and,unless otherwise indicated,new at the time of installation. 1 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish,safety guards, and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect. 2. Standard Products: Where available,provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures governing product selection include the following: 1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name only a single product or manufacturer,provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600- 1 MW Smith College Book Storage Facility .w construction delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces,and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and temporary facilities are the Contractor's property. The Owner reserves the right to .W take possession of project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary paving. Where the area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil in the area. Remove .m materials contaminated with oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace paving,curbs,and sidewalks at the temporary entrances,as required by the governing authority. 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during the construction "" period a. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings. b. Replace worn parts and parts subject to unusual operating conditions. ow C. Replace burned out lamps. END OF SECTION 01500 low 4" Im CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-5 MM AW Smith College Book Storage Facility s0 steel. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics. Comply with details indicated. 5. Temporary Exterior Lighting: Install exterior yard and sign lights so signs are visible when Work is being performed. 6. Waste Collection and Disposal: Collect waste daily. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241. Enforce requirements strictly. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully. 7. Stairs: Provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. Cover finished,permanent stairs with a protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at the time of acceptance. D. Security and Protection Facilities Installation: Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from use of temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. 1 1. Temporary Fire Protection: Until permanent facilities supply fire-protection needs, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against controllable fire 00 losses. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241. a. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose,but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. Maintain 40 unobstructed access to fire extinguishers. b. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. C. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas. d. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. 2. Permanent Fire Protection: At the earliest date, complete installation of the permanent fire- protection facility and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. 3. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with code requirements for erection of barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs. Where appropriate and needed,provide lighting,including flashing red or amber lights. 4. Security Supervisor: Contractor responsible for security of construction site at all times. Contractor to identify one person responsible for security of project facility. Subcontractors will not have access to premises without contractor supervisor personnel. 5. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, and theft. Provide a secure lockup where materials and equipment are of value and must be stored. 6. Environmental Protection: Operate temporary facilities and conduct construction in ways that comply with environmental regulations and minimize the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise-making equipment to hours that will minimize complaints. E. Operation: Enforce discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability to intended uses to minimize waste and abuse. F. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements. Maintain temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to OR avoid damage. G. Protection: Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect during excavation. H. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when the need has ended,when replaced by a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or restore permanent CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-4 Smith College Book Storage Facility transformers, overload-protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switch gear. Install service underground. a. Power Distribution: Install wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage. b. Temporary Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching to fulfill security requirements and illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. MM 7. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat for curing or drying of completed installations or for protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations. Coordinate A! ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize consumption of energy. a. Heating Facilities: Owner authorizes the use of the permanent system, or temporary connection to existing heating source during construction. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters,open flame,or salamander heating units is prohibited. 8. Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service for personnel engaged in .� construction. Post a list of important telephone numbers. 9. Sanitary Facilities: Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve the ass Project's needs. Provide toilet tissue,paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Provide covered waste containers. a. Toilets: Owner will designate existing toilets for use by construction personnel. Designated toilets should be kept clean and in good order. b. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for personnel involved in handling materials that require wash-up. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds. 10. Sewers and Drainage: a. Filter out soil, construction debris, chemicals, and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways. b. Connect temporary sewers to the municipal system, as directed by sewer department officials. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean,sanitary condition. Following heavy use,restore normal conditions promptly. C. Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy rains. C. Support Facilities: ' 1. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Install sheds equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within the building. 2. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction from exposure,foul weather,other construction operations,and similar activities. 3. Temporary Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and employees. �. 4. Project Signs: Install project identification and other signs where indicated to inform the public and persons seeking entrance to the Project. Support on framing of preservative-treated wood or a.� CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-3 .,,, 406 Smith College Book Storage Facility P11 6. Open-Mesh Fencing: 0.120-inch- (3-mm-) thick, galvanized 2-inch(50-mm) chainlink fabric fencing 6 feet(2 rri)high with galvanized barbed-wire top strand and galvanized steel pipe posts, 1-1/2 inches(38 mm)I.D.for line posts and 2-1/2 inches(64 mm)I.D.for corner posts. B. Equipment: Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect,the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for use intended. 1. Water Hoses: 3/4-inch(19-mm),heavy-duty,abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 feet(30 m)long. Provide adjustable shutoff nozzles at hose discharge. 2. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured,NEMA-polarized outlets. Provide outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment. 3. Electrical Power Cords: Grounded extension cords. Use hard-service cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. all 4. Lamps and Light Fixtures: General service incandescent lamps. Provide guard cages or tempered-glass enclosures where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture. 5. Heating Units: Temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM,or another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed. 6. Fire Extinguishers: Hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class ABC,dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for the exposures. a. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Installation,General: Use qualified personnel to install temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. 1. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed op permanent facilities. 2. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate safely and efficiently. Relocate as the Work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous,or unsanitary conditions,or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site. B. Temporary Utility Installation: Engage the local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching,compatible materials and equipment. Comply with company recommendations. 1. Arrange with company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility availability, provide trucked-in services. 3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to the site where the Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose. 4. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner or Architect. Neither the Owner nor Architect will accept cost or use charges as a basis of claims for Change Orders. 5. Temporary Electric Power: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics. Include meters, CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-2 an Smith College Book Storage Facility Im SECTION 01500-CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS MW 1.1 GENERAL A. Summary: This Section specifies construction facilities and temporary controls including temporary im utilities,support facilities,and security and protection facilities. B. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including,but not limited to,the following: MW 1. Building code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Utility company regulations. an 4. Police,fire department,and rescue squad rules. 5. Environmental protection regulations. C. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and .. Demolition Operations," ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition,"and NECA Electrical Design Library"Temporary Electrical Facilities." 1. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA,NECA,and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70"National Electric Code." D. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. E. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility. Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and procedures performed on temporary utilities. At the earliest time,change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. air 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Materials: Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide materials suitable for use intended. 1. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry." Provide UL-labeled, fire-treated lumber and plywood for temporary p yw p ary offices and sheds. Provide exterior, Grade B-B high-density concrete form overlay plywood for signs. Provide 5/8-inch- (16-mm-)thick exterior plywood for other uses. 2. Roofing Materials: UL Class A standard-weight asphalt shingles or UL Class C mineral-surfaced roll roofing on roofs of temporary offices,shops,and sheds. 3. Paint: Comply with Division 9 Section"Painting." a. For exposed lumber and plywood, provide exterior-grade acrylic-latex emulsion over exterior primer. b. For sign panels and applying graphics, provide exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. C. For interior walls of temporary offices,provide 2 coats interior latex-flat wall paint. 4. Tarpaulins: Waterproof, fire-resistant, UL-labeled tarpaulins with flame-spread rating of 15 or less. For temporary enclosures,provide translucent,nylon-reinforced, laminated polyethylene or �+wa polyvinyl chloride,fire-retardant tarpaulins. 5. Water: Potable water approved by local health authorities. so" CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500- 1 am Smith College Book Storage Facility 1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar activities. G. Submittals: The testing agency shall submit a certified written report,in duplicate,of each inspection and test to the Architect. If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a certified written report, in ,w duplicate,of each inspection or test through the Contractor. 1. Submit additional copies of each report to the governing authority,when the authority so directs. 2. Report Data: Reports of each inspection,test,or similar service include,but are not limited to,the 40 following: a. Date of issue. b. Project title and number. 'so C. Name,address,and telephone number of testing agency. d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test. f. Designation of the Work and test method. g. Identification of product and Specification Section. h. Complete inspection or test data. i. Test results and an interpretation of test results. j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing. k. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with requirements. 1. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. m. Recommendations on retesting. H. Qualifications for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies that are prequalified as complying with the American Council of Independent Laboratories'"Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" and that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed. 1. Each agency shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the state where the Project is located. 1.2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 1.3 EXECUTION A. Repair and Protection: Upon completion of inspection, testing, and sample taking, repair damaged construction. Restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Division 1 Section"Cutting and Patching." 1 B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities,and protect repaired construction. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for f" inspection and testing. END OF SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL 01400-2 Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 01400-QUALITY CONTROL .w� 1.1 GENERAL A. Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by •* Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by the Architect. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless they are the responsibility of another entity, Contractor shall provide MW inspections and tests specified elsewhere and required by authorities having jurisdiction. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum. 1. Where inspections and tests are the Contractor's responsibility, the Contractor shall employ and am pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform these services. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum. 2. Where inspections and tests are the Owner's responsibility, the Owner will employ and pay a am qualified independent testing agency to perform those services. 3. Where inspections and tests are the Owner's responsibility,the Owner will engage the services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform those services. a. Where the Owner engages an agency to test or inspect part of the Work and the Contractor is required to engage an entity to test or inspect the same or related element,the Contractor shall not employ the entity engaged by the Owner,unless the Owner agrees in writing. go C. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections and tests prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with requirements. 1. The cost of retesting is the Contractor's responsibility where tests performed indicated MW unsatisfactory work or noncompliance with contract requirements. D. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with agencies performing inspections and tests. Provide auxiliary services MW as requested. Notify the agency in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services include the following: 1. Providing access to the Work. so 2. Furnishing incidental labor and facilities to assist inspections and tests. 3. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assisting the agency in taking samples. w 4. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples. 5. Delivering samples to testing laboratories. 6. Providing preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency. am 7. Providing security and protection of samples and test equipment. E. Duties of the Testing Agency: The testing agency shall cooperate with the Architect and the Contractor in performing its duties. The agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform inspections and tests. SM 1. The agency shall notify the Architect and the Contractor of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. The agency shall not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements or approve or accept any .� portion of the Work. 3. The agency shall not perform duties of the Contractor. F. Coordination: Coordinate activities to accommodate services with a minimum of delay. Avoid removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. QUALITY CONTROL 01400- 1 Smith College Book Storage Facility On returned marked with the action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, at the Project Site, for quality comparison 40 a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Documents is observed,the submittal may serve as the final submittal. b. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with each set. 5. Distribution of Samples: Distribute additional sets to subcontractors,manufacturers,and others as required for performance of the Work. Show distribution on transmittal forms. t H. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's instructions, and manufacturer's field reports required under other Sections of the Specifications. ON 1. Certifications: Where certification that a product or installation complies with specified requirements is required, submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer certifying compliance. a. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company. I. Architect's Action: Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return are required,the Architect will review each submittal,mark to indicate action taken,and return. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. 1. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp. The Architect will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken. "o END OF SECTION 01300 as 1 SUBMITTALS 01300-4 A Smith College Book Storage Facility ■w F. Product Data: Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where Product Data includes information on several products,mark copies to indicate applicable information. 1. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. s. b. Compliance with trade association standards. C. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. d. Application of testing agency labels and seals. e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. w. f. Notation of coordination requirements. 2. Preliminary Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of Product Data where selection of options is required. 3. Submittals: Submit 5 copies for non-mechanical submittals, 7 copies for mechanical submittals. The Architect will retain one and return the other copies marked with action taken. a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Documents is observed, the submittal serves as the �.. final submittal. 4. Distribution: Furnish copies to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. Do not proceed with installation until a copy of Product Data is in the Installer's possession. a. Do not use unmarked Product Data for construction. + ! G. Samples: Submit full-size Samples cured and finished as specified and identical with the material proposed. Mount Samples to facilitate review of qualities. .R 1. Include the following: a. Specification Section number and reference. Im b. Generic description of the Sample. C. Sample source. d. Product name or name of the manufacturer. e. Compliance with recognized standards. am f. Availability and delivery time. 2. Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a check of these a* characteristics, and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. Where variations are inherent in the material, submit at least 3 units that show limits of the variations. a. Refer to other Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, am fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar characteristics. b. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be incorporated in the Work. Samples must be M undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals. C. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or designated as the Owner's property, are the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site. 3. Preliminary Submittals: Submit a full set of choices where Samples are submitted for selection of color,pattern,texture, or similar characteristics from standard choices. The Architect will review and return submittals indicating selection and other action. 4. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit 3 sets. One set will be SUBMITTALS 01300-3 ,■, Smith College Book Storage Facility 8. Area Separations: Provide a separate time bar to identify each construction area for each portion of the Work. Indicate where each element must be sequenced with other activities. ' C. Submittal Schedule: After developing the Contractor's Construction Schedule, prepare a schedule of submittals. Submit within 10 days of submittal of the Construction Schedule. to 1. Coordinate with list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values, list of products, and the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order. Provide the following information: a. Date for first submittal. b. Related Section number. C. Submittal category(Shop Drawings,Product Data,or Samples). d. Name of the subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Date for the Architect's final approval. 3. Schedule Distribution: Distribute copies of the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittal Schedule to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and parties required to comply with submittal dates. Post copies in the field office. s„ a. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. b. Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been OR made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. D. Weekly Construction Reports: Prepare a weekly report recording events at the site. Submit duplicate ON copies to the architect at weekly intervals.Include the following information: 1. List of subcontractors at the site. 2. Progress of all trades. 3. Status of submittals 4. Orders and requests of all governing authorities. 5. Services connected or disconnected. 6. Equipment or system tests and startups. 7. Substantial completions authorized 8. Accidents and unusual events 9. Stoppages,delays,shortages,or losses. E. Shop Drawings: Submit newly prepared information drawn to scale. Indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. 3. Compliance with standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 6. Sheet Size: Except for templates and full-size Drawings, submit one correctable, reproducible print and one blue-or black-line print on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 36 by 48 inches. The Architect will return the reproducible print. a. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken. SUBMITTALS 01300-2 oft Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 01300-SUBMITTALS 1.1 GENERAL A. Submittal Procedures: Coordinate submittal preparation with construction, fabrication, other submittals, and activities that require sequential operations. Transmit in advance of construction operations to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate submittals for related operations to avoid delay because of the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination until related submittals are received. 2. Processing: Allow 2 weeks for initial review. Allow more time if the Architect must delay .., processing to permit coordination. Allow 2 weeks for reprocessing. a. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. 3. Submittal Preparation: Contractor to pre-review all submittals for compliance with contract documents. Place a permanent label on each submittal for identification. Provide a 4-by 5-inch space on the label or beside title block to record review and approval markings and action taken. MW Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of the Architect. d. Name and address of the Contractor. e. Name and address of the subcontractor. �s f. Name and address of the supplier. g. Name of the manufacturer. h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. i. Drawing number and detail references,as appropriate. M. 4. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately. Transmit with a transmittal form. The Architect will not accept submittals from sources other than the Contractor. 5. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810. On the form, record requests for data and deviations from requirements. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with requirements. .M B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Prepare a horizontal bar-chart-type, contractor's construction schedule. Provide a separate time bar for each activity and a vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of Work indicated in the "Schedule of Values." Indicate estimated completion in 10 percent increments. As Work progresses, mark each bar to indicate actual completion. 1. Submit within 30 days of the date established for"Commencement of the Work." 2. Prepare the schedule on stable transparency, or other reproducible media, of width to show data for the entire construction period. 3. Secure performance commitments from parties involved. Coordinate each element with other activities; include minor elements involved in the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. , Indicate sequences necessary for completion of related Work. 4. Coordinate with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittal Schedule, payment requests,and other schedules. 5. Indicate completion in advance of Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial Completion to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6. Phasing: Show how phased completion affects the Work. 7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages for each portion of the Work. SUBMITTALS 01300- 1 •�+ P Smith College Book Storage Facility 4 I. Agenda: Present weekly Construction Report (See Sec. #01300 Submittals). Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous meeting. Review items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion appropriate to Project status. 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how to expedite ON construction behind schedule; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss revisions required to insure subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 2. Review the present and future needs of each entity present,including the following: a. Time. b. Sequences. C. Status of submittals. d. Deliveries and off-site fabrication problems. e. Temporary facilities and services. f. Quality and work standards. g. Change Orders. 3. Reporting: Architect to write meeting minutes. Contractor to provide architect with weekly Construction Report one day prior to scheduled meeting. 4. Schedule Updating: Revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule after each meeting where revisions have been made. Issue the revised schedule concurrently with the weekly Construction Report. END OF SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS 01200-2 .ft, Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 01200-PROJECT MEETINGS 1.1 GENERAL A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings,including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Preconstruction conferences. 2. Preinstallation conferences. M" 3. Progress meetings. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction. Review responsibilities and personnel assignments. MW C. Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner,Architect,and their consultants;the Contractor and its superintendent;major subcontractors;and other concerned parties shall attend. a, 1. Participants shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. �u D. Agenda: Discuss items that could affect progress,including the following: 1. Tentative construction schedule. 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Submittal of Shop Drawings,Product Data,and Samples. 4. Use of the premises. E. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a conference before each activity that requires coordination with ..r� other operations. F. Attendees: The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by • the installation shall attend. Advise the Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 1. Review the progress of other operations and preparations for the activity under consideration at each preinstallation conference,including requirements for the following: a. Compatibility problems and acceptability of substrates. b. Time schedules and deliveries. C. Manufacturer's recommendations. d. Warranty requirements. e. Inspecting and testing requirements. 2. Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements, and the approved schedule. Promptly distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned, including the Owner and the Architect. 3. Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate actions necessary to resolve problems and reconvene the conference. G. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at regularly scheduled weekly intervals. Notify the Owner and the Architect of scheduled dates. Coordinate meeting dates with preparation of the payment request. H. Attendees: The Owner, Architect, and other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or future activities shall be represented. Participants shall be authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. am PROJECT MEETINGS 01200- 1 .. Smith College Book Storage Facility 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications is abbreviated. Implied words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Streamlined Language: The Specifications generally use the imperative mood and streamlined language. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. an At certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words"shall be"are implied where a colon(:)is used within a sentence or phrase. M. Copies of Standards: Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source. N. Abbreviations and Names: Where acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization,authorities having jurisdiction,or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to Gale Research Co.'s"Encyclopedia of Associations,"available in most libraries. O. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports,releases,jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence,records,and similar documents,established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work. END OF SECTION 01095 Am Am REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095-2 go am Smith College Book Storage Facility am SECTION 01095-REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS .. 1.1 GENERAL A. Definitions: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. am B. "Indicated"refers to graphic representations,notes,or schedules on the Drawings,or other paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as of "noted," "scheduled,"and"specified"are used to help the reader locate the reference. Location go is not limited. C. "Directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required,"and "permitted" mean directed by the Architect,requested by the Architect,and similar phrases. '" D. "Approved," when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the ..R Conditions of the Contract. E. "Regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work F. "Furnish" means supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation,and similar operations. G. "Install" describes operations at the Project Site including the actual unloading, unpacking, assembly, erecting,placing,anchoring,applying,working to dimension,finishing,curing,protecting,cleaning,and similar operations. H. "Provide"means to furnish and install,complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Installer" is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. 1. The term "experienced," when used with the term "installer," means having a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the special requirements indicated,and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. a. Using terms such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain work must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,such as "carpenter." J. "Project Site" is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction,with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project Site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built. K. "Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or ,. tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere,and to report on and,if required,to interpret results of those inspections or tests. L. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on CSI's 16- Division format and MasterFormat's numbering system. REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095- 1 *s #0 Smith College Book Storage Facility !M I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,mortar,oils, putty, and similar items. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or fmishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 40 END OF SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-3 MW Smith College Book Storage Facility 0M 1.3 EXECUTION so A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which work is to be performed before cutting. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered,take corrective action. 1. Before proceeding, meet with parties involved. Review areas of potential interference and NO conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. MM C. Protection: Protect existing construction to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. .w D. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. E. Avoid cutting pipe,conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. no F. Performance: Employ skilled workmen. Proceed at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 1. Cut construction to install other components or perform other construction and subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. IM G. Cutting: Cut using methods that will not damage elements retained or adjoining construction. Comply with the original Installer's recommendations. 1. Use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. .w Cut holes and slots as small as possible,neatly to size required,and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. To avoid marring finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. am 3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a Carborundum saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections where cutting and patching requires go excavating and backfilling. 5. Where services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, by-pass utility services before cutting. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after ON by-passing and cutting. H. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. go 1. Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. so 3. Where removing walls or partitions extends one finished area into another,patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. Remove floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials to achieve uniform color and appearance. am a. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire surface containing the patch after the area has received primer and second coat. ww 4. Patch, repair, or rehang ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-2 ""' to Smith College Book Storage Facility on SECTION 01045 -CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.1 GENERAL A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures in advance of the time cutting and patching will be performed. Request approval to proceed. Include the following: 1. Describe extent of cutting and patching. Show how it will be performed and indicate why it cannot be avoided. 2. Describe changes to existing construction. Include changes to structural elements and operating components and changes in the building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. List products to be used and firms that will perform Work. 4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching will be performed 5. Utilities: List utilities that will be disturbed or relocated and those that will be temporarily out-of- service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. 6. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details go and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure. 7. Approval to proceed does not waive the Architect's right to later require complete removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. go B. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. PM 1. Obtain approval before cutting and patching the following structural elements: a. Foundation construction. b. Bearing and retaining walls. OR C. Timber and primary wood framing. C. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements in a manner that would reduce their Rw capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements in a manner that would increase maintenance or decrease operational life or safety. 1. Obtain approval before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems: a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire protection systems. C. Electrical wiring systems. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion,reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. E. Existing Warranties: Replace,patch,and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged in such a manner as not to void warranties. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Use materials identical to existing materials. Use materials that visually match adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if identical materials are unavailable. Use materials whose performance will equal that of existing materials. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 - 1 Smith College Book Storage Facility 1.4 EXECUTION A. Inspection of Conditions: Require Installers of major components to inspect substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with inspections and tests to minimize the need to uncover completed construction. C. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials, during handling and installation. Apply protective covering to assure protection from damage. D. Clean and maintain completed construction as necessary through the construction period. Adjust and .w lubricate operable components to assure operability without damaging effects. E. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction to assure that no part is subject to harmful, dangerous, or .w. damaging exposure. Such exposures include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Excessive static or dynamic loading. 2. Excessive internal or external pressures. oft 3. Excessively high or low temperatures. 4. Water or ice. 5. Solvents and chemicals. 6. Abrasion. .. 7. Soiling,staining,and corrosion. 8. Combustion. w END OF SECTION 01040 .w ON w .. Mk COORDINATION 01040-2 • 40 Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 01040-COORDINATION 4M 1.1 GENERAL 4W A. This Section includes requirements for coordinating construction operations including,but not necessarily limited to,the following: 1. Coordination drawings. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Cleaning and protection. 4. Moving/re-moving stored warehouse items 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate operations that depend on each other for proper installation,connection,and operation. 1. Schedule operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part depends on installation of other components,before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for maintenance, service,and repair. 3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Coordinate with Owner the removal and re-storing of items in and around warehouse spaces in OR order to facilitate the Work. B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices,reports,and attendance at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate contractors where coordination of their work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required procedures with other activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress. Such activities include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Delivery and processing of submittals. 3. Progress meetings. 4. Project closeout activities. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction to assure that operations are carried out with consideration for w conservation of energy,water,and materials. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of,but not incorporated in,the Work. E. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings if needed for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. Prepare coordination drawings where limited space necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. 1. Show the relationship of components shown on separate shop drawings. 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Comply with requirements contained in Section"Submittals." 1.3 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) COORDINATION 01040- 1 ON Smith College Book Storage Facility ww H. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completing the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data to substantiate Contract adjustments. I. Change Order Procedures: Upon the Owner's approval of a Proposal Request,the Architect will issue a Change Order on AIA Form G701. END OF SECTION 01035 .w, ..s MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035-2 + . 40 Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 01035-MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 1.1 GENERAL A. Minor Changes in the Work: The Architect will issue instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work on AIA Form G710. B. Owner-Initiated Change Order Proposal Requests: The Architect will issue a description of proposed changes in the Work that require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Time. The description may include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal requests are for information only. Do not consider them an instruction to stop work or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 10 days of receipt, submit an estimate of cost necessary to execute the change for the Owner's review. a. Include an itemized list of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases. b. Indicate taxes,delivery charges,equipment rental,and amounts of trade discounts. C. Indicate the effect the change will have on the Contract Time. C. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: When unforeseen conditions require modifications, the Contractor may submit a request for a change to the Architect. 1. Describe the proposed change. Indicate reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Contract Sum and Time. 2. Include an itemized list of products required and unit costs,with the total amount of purchases. ' 3. Indicate taxes,delivery charges,equipment rental,and amounts of trade discounts. D. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709. ns E. Allowance Adjustment: Base Change Order Proposals on the difference between the purchase amount and the allowance,multiplied by the measurement of work-in-place. Allow for cutting losses,tolerances, mixing wastes,normal product imperfections,and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. Prepare explanations and documentation to substantiate margins claimed. 3. Submit substantiation of a change in work claimed in the Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances. F. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in the allowance, whether for purchase order amount or handling,labor, installation, overhead,and profit. Submit claims within 21 days of receipt of authorization to proceed. The Owner will reject claims submitted later than 21 days. 1. Do not include indirect expense in cost amount unless the Work has changed from that described in Contract Documents. 2. No change to indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. G. Construction Change Directive: When Owner and Contractor disagree on the terms of a Proposal Request, the Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Form G714 instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change. 1. The Construction Change Directive contains a description of the change and designates the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Time. MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035 - 1 Smith College Book Storage Facility ..0 SECTION 01030-ALTERNATES 1.1 GENERAL A. An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed or in the products,materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. ..o 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. B. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully integrate that Work into the Project. C. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract,notify each party involved, in writing,of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A. Add Alternate No. 1: Demolition and construction of areas on second floor as shown on contract documents. END OF SECTION 01030 .P MF ow .. ALTERNATES 01030- 1 Smith College Book Storage Facillity s� 8. Copies of licenses from governing authorities. 9. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 10. Performance and payment bonds. K. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. 1. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application include the following: yw a. Occupancy permits. b. Warranties and maintenance agreements. MR C. Test/adjust/balance records. d. Maintenance instructions. e. Meter readings. f. Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy. OR g. Final cleaning. h. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety. L. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following: 1. Completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. 3. Transmittal of Project construction records to the Owner. 4. Certified property survey. 5. Proof that taxes,fees,and similar obligations were paid. 6. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 7. Change of door locks to Owner's access. 1.3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01027 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027-3 Smith College Book Storage Facillity for Payment shall be complete. Include the total cost and proportionate share of general overhead ..� and profit margin for each item. a. Temporary facilities and items that are not direct cost of work-in-place may be shown as kil separate line items or distributed as general overhead expense. 7. Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives change the Contract Sum. on D. Applications for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner. MW E. Payment-Application Times: Payment dates are indicated in the Agreement. The period covered by each application is the period indicated in the Agreement. F. Payment-Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703 as the form for .� Applications for Payment. G. Application Preparation: Complete every entry, including notarization and execution by a person *+ authorized to sign on behalf of the Contractor. The Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application. H. Transmittal: Submit 3 executed original copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect within 24 hours. One copy shall be complete,including waivers of lien and similar attachments. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal listing attachments and recording appropriate information related to the application. I. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of lien from every ... entity who may file alien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested,prior to deduction for retainage,on 1W each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item,submit final or full waivers. 3. Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of lien for the period of construction covered by the application. a. Submit final Applications for Payment with final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who may file alien. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in a manner, acceptable to the Owner. J. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. am 2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 3. Schedule of Values. 4. Contractor's Construction Schedule(preliminary if not final). 5. Submittal Schedule(preliminary if not final). a"' 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. Copies of building permits. .w APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027-2 .W Smith College Book Storage Facillity _ SECTION 01027-APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 1.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor's Construction Schedule,Submittal Schedule,and List of Subcontracts. B. Schedule of Values: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms,including: a. Contractor's Construction Schedule. b. Application for Payment forms,including Continuation Sheets. C. List of subcontractors. d. List of products. e. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. f. Schedule of submittals. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values at the earliest possible date but no later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Applications for Payment. C. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish the format for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Include the following Project identification: PP a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. C. Project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. PP f. Change Orders(numbers)that affect value. g. Dollar value. h. Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate evaluation of Applications for Payment. Break subcontract amounts down into several line items. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar;the total shall equal the Contract Sum. 4. Provide a separate line item for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment,purchased or fabricated and stored,but not yet installed 5. Provide separate line items for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage of completion,and for total installed value. 6. Show line items for indirect costs and margins on costs only when such items are listed individually in Applications for Payment. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027- 1 Smith College Book Storage Facility H. Owner-Furnished Products: .. 1. The Owner will furnish a pair of sliding doors for the renovated Conference Room. The Work includes providing hardware and installation of the Owners'doors. 2. Owner to purchase compact(moveable) shelving system in room#001. Leveling and installation of shelving support tracks is the responsibility of shelving vendor. Contractor to coordinate vendor access and scheduling of work. 1.3 EXECUTION END OF SECTION 01010 .r ..e SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-2 Smith College Book Storage Facility SECTION 01010-SUMMARY OF WORK 1.1 GENERAL A. The Project consists of the renovation of an existing basement space into an area for the storage and maintenance of books within the Genereal Stores building. 1. Project Location: 126 West Street,Northampton, Massachusetts 2. Owner: Trustees of Smith College c/o Physical Plant 126 West Street Northampton,MA 01060 B. Contract Documents, dated 15 November 1999, were prepared for the Project by Thomas Douglas Architects,Northampton,Massachusetts. ' C. The Work consists of the renovation of an existing basement space into an accessible area for the storage and maintenance of books within the General Stores Building. The work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Approximately 8700 sq. ft.book storage room 2. Approximately 1400 sq. ft.book service area 3. New passenger elevator and shaft 4. New exit stairways and shaft 5. New exterior entry stair and ramp 6. New finish surfaces at basement and first floor levels 7. New mechanical and electrical systems for renovated areas and related mechanical rooms lA D. Contractor Use of Premises: During construction the Contractor shall have full use of premises,including use of the site. The Contractor's use of premises is limited only by the Owner's right to perform work or employ other contractors on portions of the Project. E. Use of the Site: Limit use of premises to areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond the areas indicated. 1. Allow for Owner occupancy and use by the staff of the College. 2. Keep driveways and entrances clear. Do not use these areas for parking or material storage. Schedule deliveries to minimize on-site storage of materials and equipment. 3. No on-site parking.Parking arrangements will be made through owner. F. Use of the Existing Building: Maintain building weathertight. Repair damage caused by construction. Protect the building and its occupants during construction. G. Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during construction. Cooperate with the Owner to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Do not interfere with the Owner's operations. 1. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner shall be responsible for the removal and/or relocation of such stored items as may be required for the installation of new flooring surfaces with prior timely notification by the Contractor. The Owner shall be responsible for the removal and/or relocation of such stored items as may be required for the pouring of levelling slab at the basement floor. 2. The Owner will be responsible for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of the building. SUMMARY OF WORK 01010- 1 Smith College Book Storage Facility DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work,including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor.If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance,the Contractor shall pay the dif- ference to the Owner.The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner,as the case may be,shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3.1 The Owner may,without cause,order the Contractor in writing to suspend,delay or inter- rupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension,delay or interruption as described in Subparagraph 14.3.1.Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit.No adjustment shall be made to the extent: l► .1 that performance is,was or would have been so suspended,delayed or interrupted:by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible;or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the ow Contract. 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination-for the Owner's. , convenience,the Contractor shall: .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and Ob preservation of the Work;and .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice,terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter_. into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination,along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. III OR o. .o 0 © 1997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 9/97 WARNING: Unlicensed Dhotocoovine violates U.S.copvripht laws and will subject the violator to Iepal prosecution. .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1,or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents;or .4 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor's request,reasonable evidence as required by Subparagraph 2.2.1. 1412:; The Contractor;may terminate the Contract if,through no act or fault of the Contractor oYltraetar, Sii-b'subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or Beriit �lrtsringYportions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, repeated 'suspensions,delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Pa It *3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scl3lfed ft completion,or 12o days in any 365-day period,whichever is less. 41 ",-i �r1 of the reasons described 31r;$ubparagraph 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists,the Contractor may, rttf days'written notice to the Owner and Architect,terminate the Contract and recover frornitli Owner payment;forWork eltec`�ited and for proven loss with respect to materials, q t, tools,and consStixcfiion ilt�ient and machinery, including reasonable overhead, 11ro damages. , 141 '%.tbe,Work is stop consecutive days through no act or fault of the Con1fk1br or-a`Subconttaetor o err a mt nor employees or any other persons performing portiortrs of the Work uilde# contr ct watts lid-Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed,to fulfill the Owner's obligations t�der fhe Contract Documents with respect to matters 1mpo3 tans to ihe.progress of tli r,Vork,t to�dhtractor may,upon seven additional days'written notice tti;the Owner'and the Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as 1+"' provided in Subparagraph 1q t5 `" 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR.CAUSE ..� 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: tt es or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or i persistently or repeatedly proper materials;':.�e .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between,the Contractor and the Subcontractors; 3:persistently,disregards difiances, or rules, regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction;or '< 4'otherwise is guilty_of iibsraritia breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. 14 -When any of the above reasons"exist,the Owner,upon certification by the Architect that su �et` cau lr seexists to justifyaction, may ftt out prejudice to any other rights or rern s of the Owner and after gi rig the Contractor and the Contractor's surety,if any,seven days,written notice,terminate employment of the Contractor and may,subject to any prior rights of th 'Surety' .1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; . + 0 0 .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Paragraph 5.4;and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient.Upon request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed © 19 9 7 A I A accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 ®' GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in CONSTRUCTION Subparagraph 14.2.1,the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. �i 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing,inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses shall be at the Contractor's expense. 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing,inspection or approval shall,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. �Ir 13.6 INTEREST x, 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear mteayest from the date `+a°K :5 payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or,in the a40nee thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project iscatd� °- �. 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD '� 13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: .1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act o aii ng prior=to the relevant date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statutes "tat7o 's;h alF 0.4 commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deer e tc> accrrled in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Coal'' on .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for`., nt 1Xx ctsa� failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Subs n aiid prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any" 164 statute,of u limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action`stiall3ie`deeme� have accrued in any and all events not later than the date tssuairoe o . fia ?!� Certificate for Payment;and .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act~occurring after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment,any atsplcbe statute limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of actlorrshall be deemed tc"' have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any aeDT,fa11ur3 att by, the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided un aiagraph 3 5a t, e"daEe"iof any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by 6 Aractor under Paragrapl 12.2,or the date of actual commission of any other act of o perso n anydutyo obligation by the Contractor or Owner,whichever occurs last. (III ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT c v 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR °oo x•00 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 con- secutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor,St1b-Silbeontractor or © 19 9 7 A I A 0 their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portrons of the Work under AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,for anv of the following reasons:' GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR .1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which CONSTRUCTION requires all Work to be stopped; The American Institute .2 an act of government,such as a declaration of national emergency which requires all of Architects Work to be stopped; 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. ..® 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves,their partners,successors,assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors,assigns and legal r representatives of such other party in respect to covenants,agreements and obligations contained irL the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Subparagraph 13.2.2, neither party to the Coniiktkaifassign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other.If either party attempts to rnake such an assignment without such consent,that party shall nevertheless remain legally"responsible for all obligations under the Contract. 1.w 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to an institutional lender providing construction financing for the Project. In such event, the lender shalt assume the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall ea�ute Alf consents reasonably reg4j#d to facilitate such assignment. 113.3 WRITTEN°NOTICE 13.3'f N itteilt"notice shall be dee hie been duly served if delivered in person to the individual oTa member of the firntpr e�atitr to an officer of the corporation for which it was } : intended;or if delivered at or'senIt byre ste bt certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. 13.4 R,IGHTS'AND REMEDIES 13.4.1: Duties and obligations iitnpsb contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder,shall, ad_dlb a # ant 3iQt a limitation of duties,obligations,rights and remedies otherwise imposed;.or alai bl� 13-4.2 No action or failure to act h th 4e .w y e Qwner,tlArchitect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of,41 right or,duty afforded`them,rundet the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute aplroval of or acquiesce a?xgoe t'thereunder,except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 135 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 1 51 zwlhsis,inspections'-and approvals o. portions of the Work required by the Contract 06 Dcuitents or by-laws, ordinances; rulest regulations or orders of public authorities having m1d ctitin shall be made at an appropriate time.Unless otherwise provided,the Contractor shall make:arrangements for such tests; inspections and:approvals with an independent testing #4 laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner,oz.withgfhe appropriate public authority,and shall bear-'Alt`related costs of tests;inspections apd_approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shill'bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids aie.received or negotiations concluded. °. a +1N 13.5.2 If the Architect,Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions °0000 of the Work require additional testing,inspection or approval not included under Subparagraph o 13.5.1,the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to © 1 9 9 7 A I A make arrangements for such additional testing,inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 .. the Owner,and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such CONSTRUCTION costs,except as provided in Subparagraph 13.5.3,shall be at the Owner's expense. The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue,P W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents,whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work,including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,shall be at the Contractor's expense. 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.5,if,within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Subparagraph 9.9.1,or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless,,:., Owner-has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition Thee `er shall g'ive such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.During the one-year pei��5r correction of Work,if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor, rturtty to .,y make the correction,the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the 'tor nano make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct rz 3nctl ;"ng ' ork within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from thewn chlteet_; the Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 2.4. . 12.2.2.2The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with rOspe to jx rtI ns of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time bet Suhstial VIA Completion and the actual performance of the Work. 12.2.2.3The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by correct>redrk performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Paragraph 12.2. 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work wh":,are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are helther etiriected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damag�d'ttruction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors cauIsed by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with-A'e;'" 4 ments of the Contract Documents. 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be construedttt-`establish a,lt rind=of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the'Cdnt°ract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of=.Work as described`in (III Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contiactorto correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract 0 o Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be oo .00 commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations ' o other than specifically to correct the Work. © 1997 AIAO AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 123 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK GENERAL CONDITIONS 123.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment The American Institute shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 ' WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. Im no 11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear,subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph 11.4.10. 00 The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. am 11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest,the Owner as fiduciary shall,upon occurrence of an msuz 1c)s$;give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties.The cost of required bonds shall.be,'cliarged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a am separate account proceeds so received,which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement'as-the!parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4.6.If after such loss no other special so agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience,replacement of damage 'property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accQrdstrice with Article 7. 11.4dD The OWnet as fiduciary;shall havepciiver to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties &Ifiterest shdll:object irk i iting within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's>exeriti ,7"bf this power; if such oboction is made, the dispute shall be resolved as rw provided in Parphs 4.5 and 4.6.The Owner's fiduciary shall,in the case of arbitration,make settlement with"insurers in accordance w1ti directions of the arbitrators. If distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required,'the arbitrators will direct such distribution. 11.5': PERFORMANCEBOND AND,PAYMfNiSOND 11.5.1_ "The Owner,shall have'the nglat:"to'require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithf i1'3erforina'6e'of the Contract,a�nd'.paynent' of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in Bidding rei#irements or'specifieal %'required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. 11.5.2 Upoiithe request of any persoltor entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment•of,obligations'`arising undef the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION,OF WORK am 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covezed'contrary ttt the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents it mtl9t if required in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been'cove>~eecf:which the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered,the=Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such,-Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,costs of uncoverin g an re d lacement shall, b appropriate Chan e Order,be at the o a P Y g oo�Do Owner's expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correction 0 shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate ©1997 9 7 A I A contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 am GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION set The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. f Washington, D.C.20006-5292 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. j occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall,without mutual written consent,take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation,lapse or reduction of insurance. 11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law,which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner;this insurance: shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. 11.4.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner,at the Owner's option,may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards,however caused.The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property, including consequential losses due to fire !6f ther hazards however caused. 11.4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other thar>` de" d herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance e shall,if possible,include such insurance,and the cost thereof shall be charged t n : by appropriate a ro Change Order. '. PP P g � 11.4.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties,. nab both,at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate roaxth` nri the Project,or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the ) lettect through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the ct�rislut�oeriad, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Subparagph>4t Fdalpnlages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property hstxrane eparate, policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otheri %s � 11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur,the Owner shall file with the 6nttact+ax a c0of of . each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Paragraphs 4J? } shall;. contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and eiidorsemen ;t ted.to this Project.Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be e1d or Mowed . to expire,and that its limits will not be reduced,until at least 3o days'prior wriW x, h s been given to the Contractor. 11.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights aganiea�caiher' and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and emplrees,each"` n Ok (z) the Architect,Architect's consultants,separate contractors described in Article 6,tf any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employ ees;for lama `" or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursu � f�i3' Paragraph 11.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Worki ekept such;rights as t hav ti to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Ownei Qr Contract.Or, as appropriate,shall require of the Architect,Architect's consultants,separate contractors desenlied' 06 o. o° in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of °oo them,by appropriate agreements,written where legally required for validity,siW4i,waiyers each © 1997 AIAO in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such"waivers -of AIA DOCUMENT A2o1-1997 subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a Pill, GENERAL CONDITIONS Person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnifica- OF THE CONTRACT FOR tion, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and CONSTRUCTION whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and ■ Architect. 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. Y 103 H117t1�100�(1S MATERIALS 10.3.1 If reaso2liie autions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting`fcom a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated Gip 0rry1 (PCB),encountered on the site by the Contractor,the Contractor shall, upon recog rrzrng,foie condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the ** condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. 10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance iifound to be'present,toverify that it has been rendered harmless.Unless otherwise required by the;g; 4ntract Documents,the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the Harries and"qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying s the presence or ah�ence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe contairirnentfsuch material aE sit' stance. The Contractor and the Architect will re I to the fawner in wrtin start `whether or not either has reasonable objection to promptly PY _ g % the persons or entities proposed by the-6iner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person Qr entity proposedOwner,the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect haye`riu rOsoriable objection.When the material or substance has been renderedharXnless;Work itY tltte affectea shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Cons" r The:Contract.Timcs� 'be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased-In'n the-amount of the_0,46 ctor's reasonable additional costs of shut-down, ,rw delay and start-up,which adjustments'shA,&1 accomplished as provided in Article 7. 10.3.3 To the fullest"n-t permitted by law,� Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor,Subcontractors,Architect,Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,.losses and expenses,including but not limited to attor- neys'fees,arising b4"'-4--or resulting f n-performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or subsfatkce presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Subparagraph 10.3A and has not beext rendered harrnSs,'pzovided that such claim,damage,loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or de_aft," o injury to or destruction of tangible property(other than the Work itself)and provided th 86th damage,loss or expense is not due to the sole negligence of a party seeking4ridern 10.4 The Owner.shall not be responsible under lx'at:agraph 10.3 for materials and substances .w brought to the site by the Contractor unless such"materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents. III) 10.5 If,without negligence on the part of the Contractor,the Contractor is held liable for the oo .00° cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and 01997 A 1 A expense thereby incurred AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR 10.6 EMERGENCIES CONSTRUCTION 10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the no Contractor's discretion,to prevent threatened damage,injury or loss.Additional compensation or The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 1 portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment,except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from: .1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor,a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS p ' 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,maintaining and sups al�qty precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety af} 5 d� rotnde : reasonable protection to prevent damage,injury or loss to: .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected tlxere , s .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therei ii , _ge ► on or off the site,under care,custody or control of the Contr for of 1 ont toils s Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors;and n , a� .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees,`slirtlbs, la walks,`' ! pavements,roadways,structures and utilities not designated for on or replacement in the course of construction. 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable lartr orttrr�tt �rules;_ regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of per or property or their protection from damage,injury or loss. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditrol7s and, performance of the Contract,reasonable safeguards for safety and protection,,' g.; Otw danger signs and other warnings against hazards,promulgating safety regulations a1t17 >fyiri owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. ` na 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials'or equiprnenf t ie�istt l`,� methods are necessary for execution of the Work,the Contractor shall exercise utmosl caltand carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel: 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss o o insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a 0 01997 A 1 A® Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or'by anyone for AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS and 10.2.1.3,except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or OF THE CONTRACT FOR anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of CONSTRUCTION them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The The American Institute foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under of Architects Paragraph 3.18. 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. w tee! have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Subparagraph 9.8.2.Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or,if no agreement is reached,by decision of the Architect. 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use,the Owner,Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect:the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to .w determine and record the condition of the Work. 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and,when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed,the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information and belief,and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections,the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable.The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment,and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered(less amounts withheld by Owner)have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 3o days'prior written notice has been given to the Owner,(3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not Aw be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents,(4)consent of surety,if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations,such as receipts,releases and waivers of liens,claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner.If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory,to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien.If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made,the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys'fees. o a � oo. .00 9.10.3 If,after Substantial Completion of the Work,final completion thereof is materially delayed o through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, © 19 9 7 A I A and the Architect so confirms,the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certifi- AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 cation by the Architect,and without terminating the Contract,make payment of the balance due GENERAL NT AITI c1 FOR for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted.If the remaining balance for Work not CONSTRUCTION R fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents,and if bonds have been furnished,the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. , 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT - 9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration,then the Contractor may,upon seven additional days'written notice to the Owner and Architect,stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received.The Contract Time shall be extended appropri- ately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down,delay and start-up,plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately,is substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submiyYo the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final paymetzt Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor tb: 4w complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list,the Architect will make an inspection to:determrne`e� whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's � inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list:, whic.*Ji not,'-, sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner caxi cupy-._ or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use,the Contractor shalt;before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such.item.upon notification by the Architect.In such case,the Contractor shall then submit a request or anct er'. inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete,the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date`of Sub tantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate.Watranties'. required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner' ands Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate.' Upon such acceptance and consent of surety,if any,the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 0 0 0000° 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE O 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work © 1 9 9 7 A I A® at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Clause 11.4.1.5 and GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work.Such partial occupancy or use CONSTRUCTION may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, The American Institute of Architects retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. oft opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Subparagraph 3.3.2,because of: .1 defective Work not remedied; an .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Surria_ .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time,and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be in for amounts previously withheld. .9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS° " 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment,the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor,upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work,the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work.The Contractor'shall,by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor,require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment AM of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2,9.6.3 and 9.64 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment,a progress payment,or partial or entire use or occupancy of the �w Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.6.7 Lbiless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of oo .00° the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or © 19 9 7 A I A suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require GENERAL CONDITIONS of THE CONTRACT FOR money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, CONSTRUCTION shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for The American Institute of Architects breach of the requirements of this provision. 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work.if approved in advance by the Owner,payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon com- pliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest,and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and __�.. equipment stored off the site. ' 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment.The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge,information and belief,be free and clear of liens,claims,security interests or encum- brances in favor of the Contractor,Subcontractors,material suppliers,or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor,materials and equipment relating to the Work. 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for. Payment,either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment,with a copy to the Contractor,for`. such amount as the Architect determines is properly due,or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data comprising,the Application for Payment,that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that,to the'best of the Architect's knowledge,information and belief,the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents.The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the.Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections,to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to . payment in the amount certified. However,the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be IAI► a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work,(2)reviewed construction means,methods,techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment,or(4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part,to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner,if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the moo. Owner required by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify °o moo° payment in the amount of the Application,the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as 0 ©1997 AIA® provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1.If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect GENERAL CONDITIONS is able to make such representations to the Owner.The Architect may also withhold a Certificate OF THE CONTRACT FOR for Payment or,because of subsequently discovered evidence,may nullify the whole or a part of a CONSTRUCTION Certificate for Payment previously issued,to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 ' f,> WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. ow bw 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner,Contractor and Architect,stating their agreement upon all of the following: AN .1 change in the Work; .2 the amount of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum;and .3 the extent of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Time. ,. 72.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed it Subparagraph 7.3.3• .w 7.1 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by:Ithe Owner and Architect,directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment,if .. any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive,without invalidating the Contract,order changes in the Work within the general scope of.the Contract consisting of additions,"deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted'accordingly.' 7.3.E A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the ._terms of'a Change Order. 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Iirective provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum,the adjustment shall be based on one`ofthe following methods: .. .1 mutual acceptance of`aT lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; ws .3; cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable`fixed'or percentage fee;or .4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 7.3:4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive,the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for AM determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 73:5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the ... Contractor therewith,including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method fo `determining them.Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Ch nge Order. ..r 7.1 ' If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum,the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the A" change,including,in case of an increase in the Contract Sum,a reasonable allowance for overhead fill and profit. In such case,and also under Clause 7.3.3.3,the Contractor shall keep and present,in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate 61115- o Am supporting data.Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of -- this Subparagraph 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following: .1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe ©'9 9 7 A I A® Aw g g AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 benefits required by agreement or custom,and workers'compensation insurance; .2 costs of materials,supplies and equipment,including cost of transportation,whether OFITHEA CONTRACT OFOR incorporated or consumed; CONSTRUCTION .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of hand tools,whether rented from The American Institute the Contractor or others; of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington,D.C. 20006-529.2 .ter WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3,this Article 6 and Articles io,11 and 12. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor,the Contractor shall,prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent lllur discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. 6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a separate contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction of the Contractor. The Owner shall be responsible to the:Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays,improperly timed activities,damage to the Work or ! + defective construction of a separate contractor. 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Subparagraph 3.14. 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish,the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 GENERAL 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract,and without invalidating the Contract,by Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work,subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 0 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and o Architect;a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and ©19 9 7 A I A@ may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor;an order for a minor change in the Work may be AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 issued by the Architect alone. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR 7,1,3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract CONSTRUCTION 0-4, Documents,and the Contractor shall proceed promptly,unless otherwise provided in the Change The American Institute Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 I " WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. NOW Subcontractor's Work,which the Contractor,by these Documents,assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the .. Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights,and shall allow to the Subcontractor,unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement,the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract MW Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall mike available to each proposed Subcontractor,prior to the execution of the subcontract agree- zn rt,.copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon so written request of the Subcontractor,identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Srtontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to Ago 11 their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS , 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that: i assignment is effective onlftif*termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Paragraph 14.2 an45nly°for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing;and .2 assignment is subject to the prior.rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond ,... relating to the Contract. 5.4.2 4 Upon such assignment, if the Wark has been suspended for more than 3o days, the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the - suspension ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.T • OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 611- The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Projector other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these~ including those portions related to insurance and wary of subrogation.If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such-action by the Owner,the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Paragraph 4.3. 61.2;;: When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site,the term"Contractor"in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. 6.1.3 " The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor,who shall cooperate with them.The III) Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The �o construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor,separate © 1 9 9 7 A I A contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs OF THE CONTRACT FOR construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,the Owner shall be CONSTRUCTION deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the The American Institute .re of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 *�+ WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. !!A4 4.6.5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. 4.6.6 judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITIONS 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a 1.Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor, 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work.The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity.Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. "! 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. - 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity;proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be'increased or decreased by the difference,if any,occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. o, o 00 00 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor,person or entity previously selected if the o Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitute. © 1997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement,written where legally required for validity,the Contractor shall OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION require each Subcontractor,to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor,to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the )= The American Institute Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities,including the responsibility for safety of the of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party. 4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association. The,request.may,be made concurrently with the filing of a demand for arbitration but, in such 'V'M _tYiedrationshA' roceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings,which sti ll Rayed pending 'mediation for a period of 6o days from the date of filing,unless stayed for alonger period by agreement of the parties or court order. 4:5 3 'TII44rties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally.The mediation shall ma be in the place where the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon. AgYeemerits reached in mediation shalf<be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court b;mng jurisdiction thereof. , 4.6 -' A.,RBITRATION 4.6. Airy Claiirtarising out of or relai to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic AM effect and except those waived as provided for-in Subparagraphs 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5,shall,after declsion.by the Architect,or 3o days after submission of the Claim to the Architect,be subject to arbitration Priorto arbitration, the parties,sh'll endeavor to resolve disputes by mediation in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 4: . 4.6.2 Claims not resolved by mediation`shalfbe decided by arbitration which,unless the parties mutually, agree otherwise, shall be in,accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules"o£the American Arbitratiotr Asa anon`currently in effect. The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the o, party tot he Contract and with the American Arbitration Association,,and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. so" 4.6.3 A demand for arbitration shall bli made within the time limits specified in Subparagraphs 4.4 6 and 4.6.1-as applicable,and in othertaseswithin a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen, and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant'to Paragraph 13.7. 4.6.4. Limitation on Consolidation or joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract.shall-include, by consolidation`or joinder or,in any other manner, the Architect, the Architect's employees or consultants,except by written consent containing specific reference to the Agreement and signed by the Architect, Owner,Contractor and any other person or entity sought to be joined. No arbitration shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner,parties other than the Owner,Contractor,aseparate contractor as described in Article 6 �.. and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration. No person or entity other than the Owner, Contractor or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an o o Am original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsibility is insubstantial.Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute [� consent to arbitration of a Claim not described therein or with a person or entity not named or © 1 9 9 7 A I A described therein.The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 ` additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically GENERAL CONDITIONS enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION am The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 4w WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. condition precedent to mediation,arbitration or litigation of all Claims between the Contractor and Owner arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 3o days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect with no decision having been rendered by the Architect. The Architect will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. IP 4.4.2 The Architect will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim take one or more of the following actions: (i) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party,(2) reject the Claim in whole or in part,(3)` ' approve the Claim,(4)suggest a compromise,or(5)advise the parties that the Architect is unable to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Architect concludes that, in the Architect's sole discretion, it would be !* inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Claim. 4.4.3 In evaluating Claims,the Architect may,but shall not be obligated to,consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Architect in rendering a decision.The Architect may request the Owner o authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense. ' 4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or,to fiYrnlslt additional supporting data,such party shall respond,within ten days after receipt of suth regt"t,-and shall either provide a response on the requested supporting data, advise the-ArchiteEt when the ww response or supporting data will be furnished or advise the Architect that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any,the.Architect will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. 4.4.5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision,which shall state the rea- sons therefor and which shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or:Contract Time or both.The approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architect shall'be final and bidding on IUw the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration. 4.4.6 When a written decision of the Architect states that (i)the decisio4ls final but-subject to mediation and arbitration and (2) a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 3o days after the date on which the party making the dei-Aand receives the final written decision,then failure to demand arbitration within said 3o days p0rio14",ll result, in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor..If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated,sikh decision may be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned. 4.4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time iliereafter,the Architect or the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety,if any,of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default,the Architect or the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. O O 4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien,the party asserting such Claim 0 may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines © 1997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 prior to resolution of the Claim by the Architect,by mediation or by arbitration. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR 4.5 MEDIATION CONSTRUCTION 4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic ! The American Institute effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraphs 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall,after of Architects initial decision by the Architect or 3o days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. w no 4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum,written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Paragraph io.6. 4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited . , to (i) a written interpretation from the Architect, (2) an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the.Contractor was not at fault, (3) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the hzOCJ4 failure of payment by the Owner, (5) termination of the Contract by the .. Omer, f tvrier�s suspension or (7) other reasonable grounds, Claim shall be filed in accordance with this paragraph 4.3. 4.3.7 CLAIMS FOK ADDITIONAL TIME AM 4.3.7.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as providM-herein shall be given.-The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and-of probable,effect of delay on progress of the Work.In the case of a continuing delay only one +� Claim is necessary 4.3.7.2 If adverse;.weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be docurrlented by''data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the ... period of time,,could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction, pop 4.3.8 Injury'or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person;-or property because of an act or omission of the other party,or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible,.written notice of such injury or damage,whether or not insured,shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient dde ail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. 4.3.9 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon,and if quantities originally contemplated are-,materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work Am proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably,adjusted. A . 4.3.10 Claims-for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for 'consequential damages arising out of-or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes: i damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use,income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons;and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for<-principal office expenses including the A% compensation of personnel stationed there,for Iosses of financing,business and repu- tation,and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable,without limitation,to all consequential damages due to either a .. party's termination in accordance with Article 14.Nothing contained in this Subparagraph 4.3.10 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated direct damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. © t 9 9 7 A I A AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 a 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES GENERAL CONDITIONS 4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the OF THE CONTRACT fOR CONSTRUCTION Architect but excluding those arising under Paragraphs 10.3 through 1o.5, shall be referred The American Institute initially to the Architect for decision.An initial decision by the Architect shall be required as a of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 am WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If no agreement is made concerning the time 1�1► within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2,then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them. 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings.When making such interpretations and initial decisions,the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor,will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. Aw 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeks -'§a-,a matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, ext��of time.or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim als �destrter disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out�i�` Alattng to the Contract.Claims must be initiated by written notice.The responsibility*o xibst It is e Claims x . shall rest with the party making the Claim. 4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21-d#s after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after tie elalmant:first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim,whichever is later.Claims rrtttst'N Anittated by written notice to the Architect and the other party. k 4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a ,C aimw etcEept as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Subparagraph 9.7.1 and Article i�#;,the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall contmue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions.If conditions are encountered at the site which are (i) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which diffel aatea .from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions,of an unusual nature,which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract.7? uiriterk0;then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance ofthe conditions The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and,if they differ materially and cause art irrc)ease or decrease in the Contractor's cost of,or time required for,performance of any part of hn Work,_ will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Tiine,or both.If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially,different-front those o o indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, o° the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing,stating the reasons._Claims by e� either party in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after-the Architect © 1 9 11 A I A® has given notice of the decision. If the conditions encountered are materially::different, the AIA DOCUMENT A2014997 Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted,but if the Owner and Contractor GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,the adjustment shall be CONSTRUCTION referred to the Architect for initial determination, subject to further proceedings pursuant to Paragraph 4.4• The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. w ow 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor.Communications by and .. with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. 4.2.5 Based ziu the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will r view and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for am Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Aa Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether 6r.not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this ..A authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authorlti_sl all givejise to a dutyvor responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors material and'equipment suppliers,their agents or employees,or other persons or w entities perforrum- portions of the Work.. 4.2.7 The Architect Will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals`such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the �.. limited purpose of checking for conformance-with information given and the design concept expressed in the Conh4ct�Docliments._Tli,�6 thitect's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to-cause no delay in'the-Work or in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or w* separate contractors,.while allowing suffielent tittle in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate-review: Review` of"such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of`,other details such as dimensions and quantities,or AM for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Paragraphs "�" 3.3>3.5 and 3.12. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless'otherwise specifically,stated by the Architect,of any construction means, methods;_techniques sequences or procedufes. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of'an assembly of which the item is a component. Am 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change,Orders,and construction Change Directives,and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided'in Paragraph 7.4. oft 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the,date of final completion,will.receive and forward to the Owner, for the AM Owner's review and records,written warranties-alidf related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor,and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. O p O. .O 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project o representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, O 1 9 9 7 A i A responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of,the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 .r WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. O construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 318. 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Paragraph 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Subparagraph 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers'compensation acts; disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT R 4.1 ARCHITECT 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred tort roughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term`Architect"means the=-A"Ohitect djJ 'the Architect's authorized representative. 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as rt Contract Documents shall not be restricted,modified or extended without writt� Owner,Contractor and Architect.Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated,the Owner shall eipliri .a nechitect. against whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose statusul7tr tTSttra Documents shall be that of the former Architect. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 'S 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as de i*d itt v, or1C Documents,and will be an Owner's representative(1)during construction, 1 final j i8tmeil is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the orie�`ear peed for correction of Work described in Paragraph 12.2.The Architect will have authoniyyfoon behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents,unlessotiibdified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. 4.2.2 The Architect,as a representative of the Owner,will visit the site at lritek onat to the stage of the Contractor's operations (1) to become generally familiar w t a Y� the; . Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work z) to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Wt1rk,and s " � in At! general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that:the Warky v f i fully completed,will be in accordance with the Contract Documents.Ho eye,the Archilgft&t. be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check ih quX or. quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over,,,or'charge of rhortie (I'I responsible for,the construction means,methods,techniques,sequences o 'procedures,or for,the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are,solefhe 0 o Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in �o o� Subparagraph 3.3.1. 0 © 19 9 7 A I A® 4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure:to perform the Work in ' AIA DOCUMENT A2014997 accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not-have GENERAL CONDITIONS control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION Subcontractors,or their agents or employees,or any other persons or entities performing portions I11>!11 of the Work. The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 4M am 3.13 USE OF SITE 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law,ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with a,,, materials or equipment. 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete w the Work or,to.make its parts fit together properly. 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting,patching or otherwise altering such construction,or by excavation.The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and AM of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting'.or otherwise altering the Work. awe 3.15 CLEANING:UP 3.15.1 The Contractor shah keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or-rubbish caused by operations under the Contract.At completion of the Work, .� the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials,rubbish,the Contractor's tools,construction equipment,machinery and surplus materials. Am 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so and the cost-thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees.The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof,but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design;process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract b-ocuments or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications 'or _other documents Prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required,design;process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such *"" information is promptly furnished to the Architect. 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law 'and td She extent claims, damages, losses or expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 11.3,the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,Architect,Architect's consultants,and agents and employees of any of them from and ao against claims,damages,losses and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys'fees,arising ��� out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or © 19 97 A I A expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 a■ tangible property(other than the Work itself),but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts GENERAL CONDITIONS or omissions of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed b them OF THE CONTRACT FOR or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,regardless of whether or not such claim,damage,loss CONSTRUCTION P Y party g The American Institute ..M or expense is caused in art b a art indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be 1 of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors.Submittals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action. 3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals,the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto,or will do so,and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents AR, require submittal and review of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that theIQ i tractotAall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract-`156cum66- the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar suh-7 un�t Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation,Av e t�d submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviaatic a change in the Work, or (z) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive h� n 1 authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility J'or errors o ..; . omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the At hitect' approval thereof. 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or:-on resubmitted Shdp Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals,to revisions other than theme xcest�cb the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such writteriK i"ce the Ai h>Ceet, approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. { 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which. constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifi y.*qut by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction{means, methods,techniques,sequences and procedures.The Contractor shall not be required tip< rovice - professional services in violation of applicable law.If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems,materials or equipment are specificaly l Ahe Contractor by the Contract Documents,the Owner and the Architect will specif ;altrloiae.. and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional;whose signatures }' shall appear on all drawings,calculations,specifications,certifications,Shop Drawings r submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals relat4`6 the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect, shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, °oo. o° certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided'the.Owner and is Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services © 19 9 i A I A® must satisfy.Pursuant to this Subparagraph 3.12.10,the Architect will review,approve or take other !► AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with GENERAL CONDITIONS information given and the design Concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Contractor OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent �* shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. 3.10 CONTRACT OR..S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3.10.1 The Contractot,°.promptly after being awarded the Contract,shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work.The �.. schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents,shall be revised at appropriate intervals_as'required by the conditions of the Work and Project,shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents,and shall provide for expeditious AM and practicable execution of the Work. 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current,for the Architect's approval,a schedule of am submittals which is coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time toreview submittals. 3.10.3 The Contractor shall`perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent Am schedules submitted to the.OWner-and Architect. 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE'- MW 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda,Change Orders ands other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record field changes and selections made during construction,and one record copy of ""` approved Shop Drawings;product Data;Samples and similar required submittals.These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered t 'the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS;'PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings,diagrams,schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate sortie portion of the Work. 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, �► brochures,diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. aim 3.12.3 Samples are physiea}examples which illustratematerials,equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples arid`similar submittals are not Contract Documents.The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for fill which submittals are required by the Contract Documents the way by which the Contractor .. proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.2.7. r_=II Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may ©19 9 7 A I A® ,� be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals which are not required by the Contract AI DOCUMENT A201-1997 Documents may he returned by the Architect without action. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and CONSTRUCTION .w submit to the Architect Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals required by The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly r approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance,improper operation,or normal wear and tear and normal usage.If required by the Architect,the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. 3.6 TAXES 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales,consumer,use and similar taxes for the Work provided br- ; the Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded; a, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES =` 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses aild inspecUpris necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarilp*securedfer execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received&negotiatiiikrs ' concluded. 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, o aes, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Z� 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract DlocufiteWnr& . accordance with applicable laws,statutes, ordinances,building codes,and rules regcal'on However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documth, a Ce therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and lawrte�(AAIM Mitriig� and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification ` k �M 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to lams,stahtes,o gall building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Archrtect.ane �vtier,2ihe .. Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and sfiA,,`bear the costs attributable to correction. 3.8 ALLOWANCES 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stat tray ' Documents.Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by suc�iptrsons' or entities as the Owner may direct,but the Contractor shall no t be required to emloFrsons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: .i allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equip'nent.ctelive ed' at the site and all required taxes,less applicable trade discounts; mph .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs; overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance arnounts shall . o o be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; oo. 00° .3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be r� adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect ©1 9 9 7 A I A o (t) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Clause 3.8.23 and AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 (2) changes in Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.2.2. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in sufficient time to avoid delay in the Work. The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. an% ow 3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions issued by the Architect in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall make Claims as AM provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.6 and 4.3.7. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2,the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations.The Contractor shall a" not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents or for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency,omission or difference and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. N 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,using the Contractor's best skill and "' attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means,methods,techniques,sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions am concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and,except as stated below,shall be fully and solely responsible for the AM jobsite safety of such means;;methods techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures may not be safe,the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the am Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any resulting loss or damage. 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Con- tractor's employees,Subcontractors and their agents and employees,and other persons or entities .w performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. .. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide and .a pay for labor, materials, equipment,tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work,whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. 3.4.2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order. III) 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's o .■,I employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit oC R5 o employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. C7 ©1997 AIA® 3.5 WARRANTY AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment GENERAL CONDITIONS furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or CONSTRUCTION CT FOR permitted by the Contract Documents,that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the � quality required or permitted,and that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated;however,the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity,except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence an(L-, promptness, the Owner may after such seven-day period give the Contractor a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a three-day period. If the Contractor within such !A three-day period after receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies,including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect.If payments thin or No thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts,the Contractor`shall pay.l. the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1 GENERAL 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is,referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term"Contractor"means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's' administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary, before starting each portion of the Work,the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished,by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.3,shall take field measurements of any existing Conditions' related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affectingit:These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however,any errors,inconsistencies or omissions discovered by the Contractor shall be reported o a promptly to the Architect as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. C;. o oo.�o0 G� 3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be © 1 9 9 7 A I A 0 reported promptly to the Architect,but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the "N AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise OF THE CONTRACT FOR specifically provided in the Contract Documents.The Contractor is not required to ascertain that CONSTRUCTION the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances,building The American Institute codes, and rules and regulations, but am, nonconformity discovered by or made known to the of Architects Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect. 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 ., WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. MW am the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants. sw Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants'copyrights or other reserved rights. ARTICLE 2 . OWNER 2.T; GENERAL 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Subparagraph 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the,Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written „request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien right' ' AM information shall include a correct statement of the record ""�` legal title to the property on which the Project is located,usually referred to as the site,and the Owner's interest therein. so 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 The Owner shall,at the written request of the Contractor,prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements AW have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract.Furnishing of such evidence shall be`a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work. After such evidence has been furnished, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees,including those required under Subparagraph 3.7.1,which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents,the Owner shall secure and "" pay for necessary approvals,easements,assessments and charges required for construction,use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. am The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics,legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project,and a legal description of the site.The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. 2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness.Any other information or services relevant Jo the Contractor's performance of the Work under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner after receipt from the Contractor of a written request for such information or services. 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor will be furnished, o D free of charge, such copies of Drawings and Project Nlanuals as are reasonably necessary for © 1 9 9 7 n i A execution of the Work. AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK OF THE CONTRACT FOR 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements CONSTRUCTION of the Contract Documents as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. complementary,and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all;performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions,sections and articles,and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. F 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-knowni'(k'I" technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance s= with such recognized meanings. 1.3 CAPITALIZATION 1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are (r) specifically defined,(2)the titles of numbered articles and identified references to Paragraphs,Subparagraphs and Clauses in the document or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. 1.4 INTERPRETATION 1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such`; as"all"and"any"and articles such as"the"and"an,"but the fact that a modifier or an artickrs,.; absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. 1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor. If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents,the Architect shall identlfy such unsigned Documents upon request. 1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site,become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS,.'.`. OF SERVICE 1.6.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic form, prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service 1 through' , which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described.The Contractor may retain one record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or, equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of them and VIII will retain all common law,statutory and other reserved rights,in addition to the copyrights.All copies of Instruments of Service,except the Contractor's record set,shall be returned or suitably o, o accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, °oo oo° Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants,and 0 copies thereof furnished to the Contractor,are for use solely with respect to this Project.They are Q 19 9 7 A I A O not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR Without the specific written consent of the Owner,Architect and the Architect's consultants.The CONSTRUCTION Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other The American Institute documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.s.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. o. .W ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor(hereinafter am the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract.A Modification MW is (i) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect.Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement,the Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor's bid or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements). ... 1.1.2, THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction.The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements,either written or oral.The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (i) between the Architect and Contractor,(2) between the Owner and a .rs Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and Architect or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor.The Architect shall,however,be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate .. performance of the Architect's duties. 1.1.3 THE WORK oft The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed,and includes all other labor,materials,equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. ..r 1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract am Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. r*. 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details,schedules and diagrams. 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written require- ments for materials,equipment,systems,standards and workmanship for the Work,and perfor- fill AM mance of related services. 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding © 19 9 7 A i A requirements,sample forms,Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 as. GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS OF THE CONTRACT FOR 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper CONSTRUCTION execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are The American institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright taws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. Substitution of Subcontractors Title to Work 5.2.3,5.2.4 9.3.2,9.3.3 Substitution of Architect UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 4.1.3 12 Substitutions of Materials Uncovering of Work 3.4.2 3.5.1 7.3.7 12.1 Sub-subcontractor,Definition of Unforeseen Conditions 5.1.2 4.3-4,8.3.1,10-3 Subsurface Conditions Unit Prices 4.3.4 4.3.9,7.3.3.2 Successors and Assigns Use of Documents 13.2 1.1.1,1.6,2.2-5,3.12.6,5.3 Superintendent Use of Site 3.9,10.2.6 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 Supervision and Construction Procedures Values,Schedule of 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3,6.2.4, 9.2,9.3.1 7.1.3,7.3.6,8.2,8.3.1,9.4.2,10,12,14 Waiver of Claims by the Architect Surety 13.4.2 4.4.7,5.4.1.2,9.8.5,9.10.2,9.10.3,14.2.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor Surety,Consent of 4.3.10,9.10.5,11.4.7,13.4.2 9.10.2,9.10.3 Waiver of Claims by the Owner Surveys 4.3.10,9.9-3,9.10-3,9-10-4,11-4.3,11-4.5,11-4.7, 2.2.3 12.2.2.1,13.4.2,14.2.4 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience Waiver of Consequential Damages 14.4 4.3.10,14.2.4 Suspension of the Work Waiver of Liens 5.4-2,14.3 9.10.2,9.10.4 Suspension or Termination of the Contract Waivers of Subrogation 4.3.6,5.4-1.1,11-4.9,14 6.1.1,11-4.5,11.4.7 Taxes Warranty 3.6,3.8.2.1,7.3.6.4 3.5,4.2.9,4.3.5.3,9.3-3,9.8-4,9.9.1,9.10.4,12.2.2, Termination by the Contractor 13.7.1.3 4.3.10,14.1 Weather Delays Termination by the Owner for Cause 4.3.7.2 4.3-10,5.4.1.1,14.2 Work,Definition of Termination of the Architect 1.1.3 413 Written Consent ► 1.6,3.4.2,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6.4,9.3.2, Termination of the Contractor 9.8-5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3,11-4.1,13.2,13-4.2 14.2.2 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT Written Interpretations 14 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 Tests and Inspections Written Notice 2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,4.3,4.4.8,4.6.5, 3.1.3,,10.3 4.2.2,4.2.6,.2.1,1 9.4.z,9.8.3,9.9.2, 5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10,10.2.2,10.3,11.1.3,11.4.6, 9.10.1,10.3.2,11.4.1.1,12.2.1,13.5 12.2.2,12.2-4,13.3,14 TIME Written Orders 8 1.1.1,2.3,3.9,4.3.6,7,8.2.2,11.4.9,12.1,12.2,13.5.2, Time,Delays and Extensions of 14-3.1 o. o° 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1, °oYLJA o° 7.4.1,7.5.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7.1,10.3.2,1o.6.1,14.3.2 C7 Time Limits ©1 9 9 7 A I A O 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1, 1 AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 4.2,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,5.2,5.3,5.4,6.2.4,7.3,7.4, GENERAL CONDITIONS 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9, OF THE CONTRACT FOR 9,10,11.1.3,11.4.1.5,11.4.6,11.4.10,12.2,13.5,13.7,14 CONSTRUCTION Time Limits on Claims F The American Institute 4-3.2,4.3.4,4-3.8,4.4,4.5,4.6 of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. am am Product Data,Definition of Safety of Persons and Property 3.12.2 10.2,10.6 Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings Safety Precautions and Programs r� 3-11,312,4.2.7 3.3.1,4.2.2,4.2.7,5.3-1,10.1,10.2,1o.6 Progress and Completion Samples,Definition of 4.2.2,4.3.3,8.2,9.8,9.9.1,14.1.4 3.12.3 Progress Payments 8 Y Samples,Shop Drawings, Product Data and 433.9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3,13.6,14.2.3 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 Pro)e 6h of the•' ' Samples at the Site,Documents and a iii 3.n � Project management Protective Liability Insurance Schedule of Values 11.3 9.2,9.3.1 Project-Manual,Definition of the Schedules,Construction 7:. 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 AMR Project,Manuals Separate Contracts and Contractors 2.2 1.1-4,3.12 .5,3.14.2,4.2.4,4.2.7,4.6.4,6,8.3-1,11-4.7, PC,je'i Representatives 12.1.2,12.2.5 4o Shop Drawings,Definition of Property I3LSUranCe 3.12.1 10.25, 4 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples AM PROTECY(ON F PERSONS AND PROPERTY 3-11,31.112,4.2.7 to - Site, Use of Regulat:M ItSx�ffid Laws 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 =3.6,37,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6, Site Inspections 9.6:4,8-9:1,10.2:2,11.1,11.4,13.1,13.4,13.5.1,13.5.2, 1.2.2,3.2.1,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.10.1,13.5 13.614 t Site Visits,Architect's Rejection of•Work 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1,13.5 w Special Inspections and Testing =,Rel'ease,5 artd Waivers of Liens 4.2.6,12.2.1,13.5 9102 Specifications,Definition of the RepFesentations�: 1.1.6 15=2,3.51,3•x•6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3-3,942,95-1, P 9 8.2,9.10.1 Specifications, The 1.1.6,1.1.7,1.2.2,1.6,3.11,3.12.10,3.17 Represntatives� 1.1, Statute of Limitations am 3• 3.9,4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.10,5.1.1,5.1-2,13.2-11 4.6-3,12.2.6,13.7 Resolution of Claims and Disputes 4 , 5;4 6 Stopping the Work `Res 2.3,4.3.6,9.7,10.3,14.1 a.. pcSnSblllijryfor,Those Performing the Work.. Stored Materials 3 3,21 .3;43.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2, 6.2.1,9.3.2,10.2.1.2,10.2.4,11.4.1.4 Retamage 9 3 t>96•x,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 Subcontractor,Definition of 5.1.1 Rev3ep.E Contract Documents and Field•' COncjltibul by Contractor SUBCONTRACTORS 151 3;2,3.7.3,3.12.7,6.1.3 S 11 �Review'of Contractor's Submittals by Owner Subcontractors,Work by w. and Architect 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.1,4.2.3,5.2.3,5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2,9.6.7 00.1,3.10.2,3.11,3.12,4.2,5.2,6.1.3,9.2,9.8.2 Subcontractual Relations Review of Shop Drawings,Product Data and 5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2,9.6,9.io 10.2.1,11.4.7,11.4.8,14.1, o c ,se Samples by Contractor 141.1,14.3.2 0• •o 3.12 Submittals C� Rights and Remedies 1.6,3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3 7.3.6,9.2,9.3 1.1.2,2. ,2. ,3.5.1,3.1 .2, 2.6, 9.8,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3,11.1.3 © 1997 AIA® Am 3 4 5 4• 4.3.4,4.5,4.6,5.3 AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 5.4,6.1,6-3,731,8.3,9.5-1,9-7)10.2.5,10.3,12.2.2: Subrogation,Waivers of GENERAL CONDITIONS 12-2.4,13.4,14 6.1.1,11.4.5,11.4.7 OF THE CONTRACT FOR Royalties,Patents and Copyrights Substantial Completion CONSTRUCTION 3.17 4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, Rules and Notices for Arbitration 9.10-4.2,12.2,13.7 The American Institute of Architects 4.6.2 Substantial Completion,Definition of 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. 9.8.1 Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.5.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. Mediation Owner's Loss of Use Insurance 4.4.1,4.4.5,4.4.6,4.4.8,4.5,4.6.1,4.6.2,8.3-1,10.5 11.4.3 Minor Changes in the Work Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.6,7.1,7.4 1.1.2,5.2,5.3,5.4,9.6.4,9.10.2,14.2.2 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work 13 2.4,12.2-4-14-2.2.2 Modifications,Definition of Owner's Right to Clean Up 1.1.1 6.3 Modifications to the Contract Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to 1.1.1,1.1.2,3.7.3,3.11,4.1.2,4.2.1,5.2.3,7,8.3.1,9.7, Award Separate Contracts 10-3.2,11-4.1 6.1 Mutual Responsibility Owner's Right to Stop the Work 6.2 2.3 4% Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of Owner's Right to Suspend the Work 9-6.6,9-9.3,12.3 14.3 Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Correction of Owner's Right to Terminate the Ccl**act 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.6,6.2.5,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.4, 14.2 µ 12.2.1,13.7.1.3 Ownership and Use of Drawmgst�pecifications Notice and Other Instruments of Service 2.2.1,2.3,2.4,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.7.2,3.7.4,3.12.9,4.3, 1.1.1,1.6,2.2.5,3.2.1,3.11.1,317 t,-4, 12{5.3 4.4.8,4.6.5,5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10,10.2.2,11.1.3, Partial Occupancy or Use 11.4.6,12.2.2,12.2.4,13.3,13.5.1,13.5.2,14.1,14.2 9.6.6,9.9,11.4-1-5 Notice,Written Patching,Cutting and 2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,4.3,4.4.8,4.6.5, 3.14,6.2.5 4 5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9-10,10.2.2,10.3,11-1.3,11-4.6, 12.2.2,12.2.4,13.3,14 Patents Notice of Testing and Inspections 3.17 1 Payment,Applications for.; 13-5.1,13-5.2 4.2-5,7.3.8,9.2,9.3,9.4,;9.5-1,9.,6.3,9.7.1,9.8.5, Notice to Proceed 9.10.1, 10.3,9.10.5,1 2 4 443 8.2.2 Payment,Certificates for Notices,Permits,Fees and 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9 61,90.6,9-7-1,9-10.1, 2.2.2,3.7>3.13,7.3.6.4,10.2.2 9.10.3,13.7,14.1-1.3,14.2.4 Observations,Contractor's Payment,Failure of 1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3,4.3.4 4.3.6,9.5-1.3,9.7,9.10.2i 1+1.1.3,14:2.1.2,13.6 Occupancy Payment,Final 2.2.2,9.6.6,9.8,11.4.1.5 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,910,111—f 4 11 .3,11.4.1, Orders,Written 11-4.5,12-3.1,13.7,14,2.4,14-4.3i 1.1.1,2-3,3-9,4-3.6v 7,8.2.2,11-4.9,12.1,12.2,13-5.2, Payment Bond,Performance Bond and 14.3.1 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3,11.4911rx:> ` OWNER Payments,Progress 2 4-3-3,93,9-6-9.,, 5- 6,14.2.3 Owner,Definition of PAYMENTS AND COMPL�TIO1N` 2.1 9 Owner,Information and Services Required of the Payments to Subcontractors 2.1.2,2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.10,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, 5.4.2,9-5-1-3,9.6.2,9.6'3,9.6-+9-6.7,11-4.8, 6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3,10.3.3, 14.2.1.2 11.2,11.4,13-5.1,13-5.2,14.1-1.4,14-1.4 PCB Owner's Authority 10.3.1 o. o° o•.- o .3, .4,3.4.23.8.1,3.12.10 3.14.2,4.1.2,1.6,2.1.1,2 Performance Bond and Payment Bond 4.1.3,4.2.4,4.2.9,4.3.6,4.4.7,5.2.1,5.2.4,5.4.1, 6.1,6.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,8.2.2,8.3.1,9.3.1,9.3.2,9.5.1, 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3,11.4.9,11.5 © 19 9 7 A i A® 9.9.1,9.10.2,10-3.2,11-1.3,11-3.1,11-4.3,11.4-10, Permits,Fees and Notices AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 12.2.2,12.3.1,13.2.2,14.3,14.4 2.2.2,3.7,3.13,7.3.6-4,10.2.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS Owner's Financial Capability PERSONS AND PROPERTY,PROTECTION OF OF THE CONTRACT FOR 2.2.1,13.2.2,14.1-1.5 10 CONSTRUCTION Owner's Liability Insurance Polychlorinated Biphenyl The American Institute 11.2 10.3.1 of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. am, am Faulty Work Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Occupancy (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) 9.9-1,11-4.1.5 Final Completion and Final Payment Insurance Companies,Settlement with 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10,11.1.2,11.1.3,11.4.1, 11.4.10 11.4.5,12.3.1,13.7,14.2.4,14.4.3 Intent of the Contract Documents Financial Arrangements,Owner's 1.2.1,4.2-7,4.2.12,4.2.13,7.4 2.2.1,13.2.2,14.1.1.5 Interest Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance 13,6 Interpretation GENERK pRQVISONS 1.2.3,1.4,4.1.1,4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2,8.1.4 , Interpretations,Written Governing,Law.. 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 13.1) Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required •..� Guarariees(fie Warranty) 4.6.4 Hazardous Materials Judgment on Final Award 4.6.6 s Identification oFC-oiltract Documents Labor and Materials,Equipment 1.5;1 1.1-3,1.1.6,3.4,3-5.1,3.8.2,3.8-3,3-12,3-13,3-15-11 IdentltfY of Stltoiitractors and Suppliers 42.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6,9.3.2,9-3-3,9-5.1 -3, 5.241 9.10.2,10.2.1,10.2-4,14.2.1.2 IndemniHcafion - Labor Disputes 3.17, 19.1o2r1P3>3>10.5,.11.4.1.2,11.4.7 8.3.1 Inform an Seances Required olthe Owner. Laws and Regulations 2.1:2 7 `3.21,3• .4,3.12,10,4-2.7,43-31 6`1.3, 1.6,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6, re 6.1.4,6 .5,93 ;9.6,1,9.6.4, 3 1� 3>.9.9.2,. .16. 9.6.4,9.9.1,10.2.2,11.1,11.4,13.1,13.4,13.5.1,13.5.2, 3 = 11.?}x.13.51,13 S 2,141,1:4;14:1,4. 13.6,14 Injury or Damage to,,Person or Property Liens 4.3.8 l0 2,i0.6 2.1.2,4.4.8,8.2.2,9.3.3,9.10 �I11SpectiQns Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder 3-3-3,3.7444 2.2 4.2.6,¢2.9,9.4.2,9.8.2, 4.6.4 3$•3 39.2, 1Qar 12:2.1,13.5 Limitations,Statutes of 4W Instructions to Bider"s 4.6.3,12.2.6,13.7 1'1'1• Limitations of Liability Instructions to the'`Uontcactor 2.3,3.2.1,3.5.1,3.7.3,3.12.8,3.12.10,3.17,3.18,4.2.6, 7 4• 3.2.3,3.3.1,3.8.1,4.2.8,5.2.1,7,12,8.2.2,13-5.2 4•2. 2.12,6.2.2,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.4,10.3.3, Insurance• 10.2.5,11.1.2,11.2.1,11.4.7,12.2.5,13.4.2 3.184,61 1,7.3.6;8.2.i,9.3-2,9.8-4,9-9.1,510.2, _ Limitations of Time 9.loiS 11 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1, am Insurance,Boiler:tnc Machinery 4•�-7,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,5.2,5.3,5.4,6.2.4,7.3,7.4, 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9, 9.10;11.1.3,11.4.1.5,11.4.6,11.4.10,12.2,13.5,13.7,14 Insurance Contraefor's Liability Loss of Use Insurance ••� 11.1 11.4.3 Insurance,Effective Date of Material Suppliers 8.2.2,11.1.2 1.6,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,5.2-1,9.3,9.4.2,9.6,9.10.5 Insurance,Loss of Use +� 11.4.3 Materials,Hazardous 10.2.4,10.3,10.5 Insurance, Owner's Liability fill 11.2 Materials,Labor,Equipment and 1.1.3,1.1.6,1.6.1,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.23,3.1213..131 Insurance,Project Management Protective Liability 3.15.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6,9.3.2,9'-3.3, 11.3 9.5.1.3,9.10.2,10.2.1,10.2.4,14.2.1.2 17�_ Insurance,Property Means,Methods,Techniques,Sequences and © 19 9 7 A I A 10.2-5,11.4 AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 �""` 5, Procedures of Construction Insurance,Stored Materials 3.3.1,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,9.4.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS 9.3.2,11.4-1.4 Mechanic's Lien OF THE CONTRACT FOR INSURANCE AND BONDS 4.4.8 CONSTRUCTION ,s 11 The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. M Contractor's Relationship with Separate Damages,Claims for Contractors and Owner's Forces 3.2-3,338,4.3.10,6.1.1,8.3-3,9.5.1,9.6-7,10-3.3, 3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2-4,6,11-4.7,12.1.2,12.2.4 11.1.1,11-4.5,11-4.7,14-1.3,14.2.4 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors Damages for Delay 1.2.2,3.3.2,338.1,3.18.2,5,9.6.2,9.6.7,9.10.2, 6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7,10-3.2 11.4.1.2,11.4.7,11.4.8 Date of Commencement of the Work,Definition of Contractor's Relationship with the Architect 8.1.2 1.1.2,1.6,3.1.3,3.2.1,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.4.2,3.5.1, Date of Substantial Completion,Definition of 3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,336,3.18,4.1.2,4.1.3,4.2,4.3.4, 8.1.3 4.4.1,4.4.7,5.2,6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9-4-5,9.7, 9.8,9.9,10.2.6,10.3,11.3,11-4.7,12,13-4.2,13.5 Day,Definition of 8.1.4 Contractor's Representations 1.5.2,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.8.2 Decisions of the Architect Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing 4.4.6'4.5,6 3,7.3,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.5, the Work 4.4.6,4.5,6.3>7.3.6,7.3.8,8a.3,8.3.17 9.2>9.4,9.5.1, 2 18, 2. 1 3 3 9.5• 9.8.4,9.9.1,13.5.2,14.2.2,14.2.4 3.3• ,3• 4• 3,4.3.8,5.3• ,6.1. ,6.2,6. , 1,to ; Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Decisions to Withhold Certification:- 9.4.1,9.5,9.7,14.1.1.3 1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3 40 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work Defective or Nonconforming Work;Acceptance, g P Rejection and Correction of 9.7 2.3,2.4,3.5-17 4.2.6,6.2.5,9 51,% 1.6.6,`9.8.2, Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 9.9.3,9.10.4,12.2.1,13.7-1.3 !' 4.3.10,14.1 Defective Work,Definition tsF Contractor's Submittals 3.5.1 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.6,9.2,9.3, Definitions 9.8.2,9.8-3,9.9.1,9.10,2,9.10.3,11-1.3,11.5.2 1.1,2.1.1,3.1,3.5.1,3.12.1,3 %,1#3 4.i•i,4.3.1,5.1, Contractor's Superintendent 6.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.3.6,8.1 Y 1,9$A 3.9,10.2.6 Delays and Extensions of Tia Contractor's Supervision and Construction 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4 5,5 2 72-1,7.3=1,74.1, Procedures 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3,6.2.4, s Disputes 7-1.3,7.3-4,7.3.6,8.2,10,12,14 4.1.4,4.3,4.4,4.5,4 6,6. ip.8 Contractual Liability Insurance Documents and Samples of 11e 11.1.1.8,11.2,11.3 3.11 Coordination and Correlation Drawings,Definition of 1.2,1.5.2,3.3.1,3.10,3.12.6,6.1.3,6.2.1 1.1.5 . Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications Drawings and Specifications;L1se od Ownership of 1.6,2.2.5,3.11 1.1.1,1-3,2.2-5,3-11,5-3 Copyrights Effective Date of Insurance 1.6,3.17 8.2.2,11.1.2 Correction of Work Emergencies _ 2.3,2.4,3.7.4,4.2.1,9.4.2,9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1,12.1.2, 4-3-5,110.6,14-11 12.2,13.7.1.3 Employees,Cont Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 3.3.2,3.4 3,3 8•i>3.9,38.2,4.2.3;4.2.6,10:2,10.3, 1.2 11.1.1,11-4.7,14.1,14.2.1.1 Cost,Definition of Equipment,Labor,Materials.and 7.3.6 1.1-3,1.1.6,34 3=51;41.&1'2,3&3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, Costs 4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,f 21,Z 3 6,9-3 2 9.3.3,9-5.1-3 2.4,3.2.3,3.7.4,3.8.2,3.15.2,4.3,5.4.2,6.1.1,6.2.3, 9.10.2,10.2.1,10:2.4,14.7.1:3 o. 7.3.3.3,7.3.6,7.3-7,7.3.8,9.10.2,10.3.2,10.5,11.3, Execution and Progress of the Work °o•.,-^ . o° 11.4,12.1,12.2.1,12.2.4,13.5,14 o 0 1.1.3,1.2.1,1.2.2,2.2.3,2.x-5,330-3,34,3-5,3.7, Cutting and Patching 3.10,3.12,3.14,4.2.2,4.2-3,4.3.3,6-2.2,17-1.3,7.3.4, ©1997 AIA® 6.2.5,3.14 8.2,9.5,9.9.1,10.2,10.3,12:2,14.2,14.3 AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 � Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Extensions of Time GENERAL CONDITIONS Contractors 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3,7.4.1, OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 3.14.2,6.2.4,9.2.1.5,10.2.1.2,10.2.5,10.6,11.1,11.4, 9.5.1,9-7.1,10-3.2,10.6.1,14.3.2 12.2.4 Failure of Payment The American Institute Damage to the Work 4.3.6,9.5-1.3,9.7,9.10.2,14.1.1.3,14.2.1.2,13.6 of Architects 3.14.2,9.9.1,10.2.1.2,10.2.5,10.6,11.4,12.2.4 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 j' WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 1, sm am Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval Conditions of the Contract 13.5.4 1.1.1,1.1.7,6.1.1,6.1.4 Certificates of Insurance Consent,Written 9.10.2,11-1.3 1.6,3.4.2,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6. MW 4,9.3.2, Change Orders 9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3,11.4.1,13.2,13.4.2 1.1.1,2.4.1,3.4.2,3.8.2.3,3.11.1,3.12.8,4•z•8,4.3.4, CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE 4.3.9,5.2.3,7.1,7.2,7.3,8.3.1,9.3.1.1,9.10.3,11.4.1.2, CONTRACTORS 11-4.4,11-4.9,12.1.2 1.1.4,6 %t 4ti. S Chang Construction Change Directive,Definition of $ Z 7.3.1 Oft Construction Change Directives 3.11,4.2.8,7,8.3.1,9.3.1.1,11.4.9 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.9,7.1,7.3,9.3.1.1 Claims"}3efiru >ac Construction Schedules,Contractor's 43.1 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 .., Claims and Disputes 5 z Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts • Ys 3 ,6.1.1,6-3,7.3-8,9-3-3,,%'X94, 5.4,14.2.2.2 Continuing Contract Performance Claims`animg Se rtion of Claims .. 4.3.3 46 fir:' Contract,Definition of C1 £cdi ost a1ms 1.1.2 323>' 4 6 611 j.3k�10.3.2 fi v# 3 CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE aims i,6� di'' CI Time 5.4-1.1,11-4.9,14 323x34,41 1 3'821032 #r> Contract Administration Clamis foDonce* or unknown Con Elihns 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 ,� 4 3`4' A �r :Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating Claims fclr llamas :k to 3 z 4.3 3-7.1,3-10,5.2,6.1,11-1.3,11-4.6,11.5.1 n.lii;1 5,114 >E43,14.2. x C ontract to(�7I)1tGatlon 1 Con'r'it Documents,The *4- ,4-5J,41 r; ;, A, Documents,Copies Furnished CIeaning U] n ad Use of 3 y° w 315,6 'a u, � 1.6,2.2.5>5.3 Comm ement o.'Statutory Limitation Perm 'Contract Documents,Definition of Commencement 4the Work, Contract Sum Conditions Iat g tq . 2211,3. 1 3.8,4.3.4,4.3.5,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2,7.3,7.4,9.1,9.4.2, ln3 lo.i,3.12 6 9.5-1.4,9.6 .7,9.7,10.3.2,11.4.1,14.2.4,14.3.2 523s 118.12x�F�r�2;83.1,>>.111�}S��i Contract Sum, Definition of Commencent Qrk,,De filutlun off, 91 $tr Con e}Tilzle Comml niw, }on -6hiating Contract.' X4=3M-, .7,4.4.5,5.2-3,7.2.1-3,7.3,7.4,8.1.1,8.2, Administration $ .5-1,9.7,10.3.2,12.1.1,14.3.2 rws Contract Time,Definition of Comp}etioris Condttns Relating to �x i. ;31 3.11 9, 9• 9 $.1.1 31514 2 2,4 2 .4 . $.2, ¢•2> 8, CE) fi C TOR .n 9.9.2;91o,1z13 >t41z . - COMPLETION,PAYMENTS AND 3 '. .9 - Contractor,Definition of Completion,Substantial 3.11 6.1.2 c. o 4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8:2.3;9.4.2,9-8,9.9.1,9.10.3 Contractor's Construction Schedules 9.10.4.2,12.2,13.7 1.4.1.z,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 Compliance with Laws 01997 A i A Contractor's Employees AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 1.6.1,3.2.2,3.6>3 7>3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1;4.4.8,4.6.4, 3-3.2,343,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2-3,4.2.6,10.2,10.3, GENERAL CONDITIONS 4.6.6,9.6.4,10.2.2,11.1,11-4,13.1,13.4,13-5.1, 11.1.1,11.4.7,14.1,14.2.1.1, OF THE CONTRACT FOR 13-5.2,13.6,14-1.1,14.2.1.3 Contractor's Liability Insurance CONSTRUCTION Concealed or Unknown Conditions 11.1 ... 4.3.4,8.3.1,10.3 The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. f�A INDEX Architect's Authority to Reject Work Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 3.5.1,4.2.6,12.1.2,12.2.1 9.6.6,9.9.3,12.3 Architect's Copyright Acceptance of Work 1.6 9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3,12.3 Architect's Decisions Access to Work 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.5, 3.16,6.2.13 12.1 4.4.6,4.5,6-3,7.3.6,7-3.8,8.1-3,8-3-13 9.2,949-5.1, 9.8.4,9.9.1,13.5.2,14.2.2,14.2.4 Accident Prevention Architect's Inspections 4.2-3,10 €� r' 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1,135 Acts and OmissionsA ' Architect's Instructions r 3_2,3-3.2,3-12.8,3A8,4.2.3,4.3.8,441,8.3.1,9.5.1, �>. 3.2.3,3.3.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.8,7.4.1,12.1,13.5.2 10.2.5,13.4.2,13.7,14.1 Addenda Architect's Interpretations 1.1.1,3.11 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 Additional Costs,Claims for Architect's Project Representative , 4.3.4,4.3.5,4.3.6,6.1.1,10.3 4.2.10 Additional Inspections and Testing Architect's Relationship with Co r 1.1.2,1.6,3a.3, .4. 3.2.1,3.2.2,3 2. 2, 9.8.3,12.2.1,13.5 3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18,�� ..3>4; Additional Time,Claims for 4.4.1,4.4.7,5.2,6.2.2,7,8.3.1,' .41 4.3.4,4.3.7,8.3.2 9.8,9.9,10.2.6,10.3,11.3,11A.7 1 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT Architect's Relationship wit111 dub rs 3.1.3,4,949.5 1.1.2,4.2-3,4.2-4,4.2.6, Advertisement or Invitation to Bid Architect's Representations 1.1.1 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 Aesthetic Effect Architect's Site Visits '"1* 4.2-13,4.5.1 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.2.9,4.3.4,9. A ±lk Allowances 13.5 a 3.8 Asbestos All-risk Insurance 10.3'1 11.4.1.1 Attorneys'Fees Applications for Payment 3.18.1,9.10.2,10-3.33 r 4.2.5,7.3.8,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3,9.7.1,9.8.5, Award of Separate Contracts 9.10,11-1.3,14.2-4,14-4.3 6.1.1,6.1.2 Approvals Award of Subcontracts an dt,CotlElta 2.4,3.1.3,3.5,3.10.2,3.12,4.2.7,9.3.2,13.4.2,13.5 for Portions of the Work s Arbitration 5.2 � h' 4.3.3,4.4,4.5.13 4.5.23 4.6, 8.3.1,9.7.1,11.4.9,11.4.10 Basic Definitions 4 Architect 4.1 Bidding Requirement-&, Architect,Definition of 1.1-1,1.1 5 2- 5 V, rtz . 4.1.1 Boiler and Machineryurance R Architect,Extent of Authority 11.4'2 �1 2-4,3.12-7,4-2,4 4.4,5.2,6.3,7.1.2,7.3.6,7.4, Bonds,Lien 9.2,9-3.1,9-4,9.5,9.8-3,9.10.1,9.10.3,12.1,12.2.1, 9.10.2 13.5.1,13.5.2,14.2.2,14.2.4 Bonds,Performance,an a ent 1 .. . 1111 Architect,Limitations of Authority and 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.Y 14 1>111.5 Responsibility Building Permit o. 0 2.1.1,3.3.3,3.12.4,3.12.8,3.12.10,4.1.2,4.2.1,4.2.2, 1 moo• o� 4.2.3,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.10,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.4,5.2.1, 3'T 7.4,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.6 Capitalization © 1 9 9 7 A I A O ,architect's Additional Services and Expenses 1.3 - AIA DOCUMENT A2014997 2.4 11.4.1.1,12.2.1,13.5.2,13.5.3,14.2-4 Certificate of Substantial Completion GENERAL CONDITIONS Architect's Administration of the Contract 9.8.3,9.8.4,9.8.5 OF THE CONTRACT FOR Certificates for Payment CONSTRUCTION 3.1.3,4-2,4.3.4,4.4,9.4,9.5 y Ij 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.31 9.4,9.51 9.6.1,9.6.6,_9.7.11,9.10a> Architect's Approvals I 9.10.3,13.71 14.1.1.3,14.2.4 The American Institute 2.4,3.1.3,3.5.1,3.10.2,4.2.7 of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 19 9 7 ED IT I ON w AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 General`C©n -ttions of the Contract for Construction This document has impor- TABLE OF ARTICLES tant legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS , with respect to its completion or modification. 2. OWNER This document has been approved and endorsed by 3. CONTRACTOR" The Associated General Contractors of America. 4. ADMINISTRATIOWOF THE CONTRACT S. SUBCONTRACTORS 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK' 8. TIME .w 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION, ,W 10, PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS gig,7111t,y!p" �i i�ri�• 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT ©1997 AIAO AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 a GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CAUTION: You should use an original AIA document with the AIA logo printed in red.An original assures that CONSTRUCTION aw changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced. The American Institute of Architects Copyright 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976,1987,01997 by The American Institute of Architect 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Fifteenth Edition,Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of s. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 1 1 Pill 8.1.6 The Addenda,if any,are as follows: Number Date Pages Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding requirements are also enumerated in this Article 8. 8.1.7 Other documents,if any,forming part of the Contract Documents are as follows: (List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents.AIA Document A201-1997 provides that bidding requirements such as advertisement or invitation to bid,Instructions to Bidders, sample forms and the Contractors bid are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. They should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.) I» do This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first written above and is executed in at least three original copies,of which one is to be delivered to the Contractor,one to the Architect for use in the administration of the Contract,and the remainder to the Owner. O W N E R(Signature) CON T R A C T O R(Signature) (Printed name and title) (Printed name and title) �`7�''� CAUTION:You should sign an original AIA document or a licensed reproduction.Originals contain the AIA logo printed in red;licensed reproductions are those produced in accordance with the Instructions to this document. © 1 9 9 7 A I A AIA DOCUMENT A101-1997 OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. ARTICLE 8 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 8.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement,are enumerated as follows: .ter. 8.1.1 The Agreement is this executed 1997 edition of the Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor,AIA Document A101-1997. 8.1.2 The General Conditions are the 1997 edition of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,AIA Document A201-1997• .w, 8.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the Project Manual dated and are as follows: Document Title Pages w 8.1.4 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated as in Subparagraph 8.1.3, ... and are as follows: (Either list the Specifications here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) am Section Title Pages am Am 8.1.5 The Drawings are as follows,and are dated unless a different date is shown below: (Either list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) an Number Title Date w� 0 0 00�.00 0 © 1997 A I A 0 AIA DOCUMENT A101-1997 OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 5.2.2 The Owner's final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 3o days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment,or as follows: ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 6.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201-1997. 6.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A2o1-1997• ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A201-1997 or another Contract Document,the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. 7.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below,or in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. (Insert rate of interest agreed upon,if any.) (Usury laws and requirements under the Federal Truth in Lending Act,similar state and local consumer credit laws and other regulations at the Owner's and Contractor's principal places of business, the location of the Project and elsewhere may affect the validity of this provision. Legal advice should be obtained with respect to deletions or modifications,and also regarding requirements such as written disclosures or waivers.) 7.3 The Owner's representative is: (Name,address and other information) 7.4 The Contractor's representative is: (Name,address and other information) 7.5 Neither the Owner's nor the Contractor's representative shall be changed without ten days' written notice to the other party. AMIw4 7.6 Other provisions: I I Z a o, b °oYiv"X�'o° D © 1997 AIAO AIA DOCUMENT A101-1997 OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. K Washington, D.C.20006-5292 x WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. 5.1.6 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents,the amount of each progress pay- ..� ment shall be computed as follows: .1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as deter- mined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of val- ues,less retainage of percent ( %). Pending final determi- nation of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute shall be *■* included as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.8 of AIA Document A201-1997; .2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction (or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing),less retainage of percent .s Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner;and .a Subtract amounts,if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate .. for Payment as provided in Paragraph 9.5 of AIA Document A201-1997. 5.1.7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Subparagraph 5.1.6 shall be further modified under the following circumstances: .1 Add,upon Substantial Completion of the Work,a sum sufficient to increase the total pay- ments to the full amount of the Contract Sum,less such amounts as the Architect shall r determine for incomplete Work,retainage applicable to such work and unsettled claims; and(Subparagraph 9.8.5 of AIA Document A201-1997 requires release of applicable retainage upon Substantial Completion of Work with consent of surety,if any.) ow .2 Add,if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor,any additional amounts payable in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.3 of AIA Document A201-1997. 5.1.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage,if any,shall be as follows: (If it is intended,prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work,to reduce or limit the retainage resulting from the percentages inserted in Clauses 5.1.6.1 and 5.1.6.2 above, and this is not explained elsewhere in the Contract Documents,insert here provisions for such reduction or limitation.) a ew 5.1.9 Except with the Owner's prior approval,the Contractor shall not make advance payments IIII to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site. o oo.�.00 5.2 FINAL PAYMENT O 5.2.1 Final payment,constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum,shall be made © 1 n E n by the Owner to the Contractor when: AIA DOO CUMENT A101-1997 ,mss OWNER-CONTRACTOR .1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor's responsNJ- AGREEMENT ity to correct Work as provided in Subparagraph 12.2.2 of AIA Document A201-1997,and to satisfy other requirements,if any,which extend beyond final payment;and The American Institute .2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect. of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor's performance of the Contract.The Contract Sum shall be Dollars($ ), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates,if any,which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: (State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates.If decisions on other alternates are to be made by the Owner subsequent to the execution of this Agreement,attach a schedule of such other alternates showing the amount for each and the date when that amount expires.) 4.3 Unit prices,if any,are as follows: 1 ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS 5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month,or as follows: X111► 5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month,the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor not later than the day of the month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above,pay- ment shall be made by the Owner not later than days after the Architect II�� receives the Application for Payment. o a c. .b oOo 5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submit- ted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall © 1 9 9 7 A I A O allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work.The schedule of values AIA DOCUMENT A101-1997 shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the OWNER-CONTRACTOR Architect may require. This schedule,unless objected to by the Architect,shall be used as a basis AGREEMENT for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. The American institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 4 ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS am The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement,other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued .w after execution of this Agreement;these form the Contract,and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representa- tions or agreements, either written or oral.An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than Modifications,appears in Article 8. 04 ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents,except to the extent specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION w 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. AM (Insert the date of commencement if it differs from the date of this Agreement or, if applicable, state that the date will be fixed in a notice to proceed.) AM If,prior to the commencement of the Work,the Owner requires time to file mortgages,mechan- ic's liens and other security interests,the Owner's time requirement shall be as follows: ow ON 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement. 3.3 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than AM days from the date of commencement,or as follows: (Insert number of calendar days.Alternatively,a calendar date may be used when coordinated with the date of commencement. Unless stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, insert any requirements for earlier Substantial Completion of certain portions of the Work.) subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. (Insert provisions,if any,for liquidated damages relating to failure to complete on time or for bonus payments for early completion of the Work.) AMs illy low 0 o. .o 0 © 1997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A101-1997 ,wa OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT The American Institute aw of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. 1 0 1997 EDITION AIA DOCUMENT A101-1997 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a STIPULATED SUM This document has impor- tant legal consequences. AGREEMENT made as of the day of Consultation with an in the year (In words,indicate day,month and year) attorney is encouraged with respect to its BETWEEN the Owner: completion or modification. (Name,address and other information) AIA Document A201-1997, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, is adopted in this document by reference. Do not use with other general conditions and the Contractor: unless this document is ! (Name,address and other information) modified. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. The Project is: (Name and location) The Architect is: — (Name,address and other information) \` ©1997 AIAO AIA DOCUMENT A101-1997 OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT The Owner and Contractor agree as follows. The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Copyright 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987,© 1997 by The American Institute of Washington,D.C. 20006 5292 Architects. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. Smith College Book Storage Facility ..w G. The sub-division of the proposed contract price is as follows: 1000 General Requirements ..,a 2000 Site Work 3000 Concrete 4000 Masonry w. 5000 Metals 6000 Wood and Plastics 7000 Thermal and Moisture Protection ., 8000 Doors and Windows 9000 Finishes 10000 Specialties 14000 Conveying Systems 15000 Mechanical Plumbing „M Fire Protection H VAC 16000 Electrical 17000 General Contractor OH/P Total: H.The undersigned hereby certifies that he is able to furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed on the work,and that he will comply fully with all applicable laws and regulations. I.The undersigned hereby certifies that this bid complies fully with all terms and conditions of the Contract Documents except for the following qualifications: .w Date: w Name of General Bidder: w Signature: End of Form for General Bid w Smith College Book Storage Facility Form for General Bid From the Undersigned: (company name) 40 Address: Phone/Fax number: PM To the Owner,Trustees of Smith College c/o Physical Plant 126 West Street Northampton,MA 01060 A. The undersigned hereby declares that he has carefully examined the Contract Documents,and the site at which the proposed work is to be performed. B. The undersigned further declares that in regard to the conditions affecting the work to be done and the labor and materials needed,this proposal is based solely on his own investigation and research and not in reliance upon any representations of any representatives of Thomas Douglas Architects,or its agents. C. The undersigned proposes to furnish all labor and materials for the Smith College Book Storage Facility in accordance with the accompanying plans and specifications prepared by Thomas Douglas Architects,for the contract price specified below,subject to additions and deductions according to the terms of the specifications. D. This bid includes addenda numbered: (fill in) E. The proposed contract price is dollars (total price in words) $ (in figures) F. For Alternate Number 1: Add $ am Smith College Book Storage Facility .. n. Obtaining Plans and Specifications:Bidders may obtain up to 3 complete sets of plans and Specifications at the office of the architect at any time after Friday,December 10,at 9AM. There will be a$50.00 deposit for each set of drawings and specifications.Deposits will be 004 refunded upon return of all documents in good condition. o. Addenda and interpretations: All questions by prospective bidders as to the interpretation of the Contract Documents must be addressed to the Architect,adequately in advance of the bid am, date to permit circulation of addenda. The architect will then mail or fax any necessary addenda to the bidders who have taken out plans at the address given by them before said date,containing interpretations of all questions .� so raised that in its opinion require interpretation.Oral interpretations given to prospective bidders will have no standing. It shall be the sole responsibility of Bidders to ascertain the existence of any and all addenda •.� issued by the architect whether or not the addenda are presented or mailed/faxed to or received by the Bidder. Any addenda forming a part of the documents or issued during the time of bidding shall be •�• acknowledged on the Bid Form,and shall be a part of the Contract. p. Contract Time: Substantial Completion date:Friday,May 1,2000 q. Work by Owner:Certain portions of the work will be contracted directly by the owner.See ► Section 01010,Summary of Work. End of Instructions to Bidders w on Smith College Book Storage Facility Instructions to Bidders These Instructions are part of the Contract Documents I. BIDDING INFORMATION a. Notice:Thomas Douglas Architects will receive sealed bids for a new book storage facility for Smith College,in accordance with plans and specifications prepared by Thomas Douglas Architects, 136 West Street,Northampton,MA,(413)585-0641 b. Project Location:In the General Stores Building,Smith College, 126 West Street, Northampton,Massachusetts. c. General Description: 10,000 square foot renovation of warehouse space into book storage and maintenance space,including access ramp,and elevator. d. Alternates: 1.Add Alternate:Demolition and construction of areas on second floor as shown in Contract Documents. e. Withdrawal of Bid:The Bidder may withdraw his Bid,either by written request or in person, prior to,but not after,the time set for the opening of the Bids.Bids submitted and opened must remain fixed and in force,as submitted,for thirty days immediately following the opening of Bids. f. Prebid Preparation: Before submitting a Bid,the Bidder shall visit the site of the proposed work to fully acquaint himself with all the existing conditions,facilities,difficulties,and restrictions:shall thoroughly examine and be familiar with the specifications and drawings: and shall include in the Bid a sum to cover the cost of all the items included in the Contract. g. Bid Understanding:By submitting a Bid,the Bidder agrees and assures that he has examined the site,drawings,and specifications,and that the drawings and specifications are adequate, and that the required results can be produced under the drawings and specifications.There will be a site walk-through for all contractors and their sub-contractors on Wednesday, December 15,at 9AM. h. Owners'right to reject Bids:The owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids and/or to waive informalities in bid documentation,if it believes it is in its own best interest to do so. i. Bid Date:Wednesday,December 29, 1999,3PM,at the office of the architect. j. Private Bid.This is a private bid.The owner reserves the right to keep the results of the bidding confidential. k. Bid Form:All bids shall be made in writing on the form provided in the Project Manual,with numbers stated both in words and in figures,shall be signed in longhand by the bidder,and give his business address. The completed form must be without alterations,erasures,or interlineations. 1. Late bids.Bids received after the specified time will not be accepted. m. Fax-ed bids:Faxed bid forms will be acceptable,if followed by original copies within 24 hours of the specified time. tlAt Smith College Book Storage Facility DIVISION 6 -WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DIVISION 7 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07270 FIRESTOPPING 07530 SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07900 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 8 -DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS ** 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08800 GLAZING DIVISION 9-FINISHES 09255 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09512 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09678 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09680 CARPET 09900 PAINTING oft DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10605 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS a DIVISION 15— MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15300 FIRE PROTECTION 15400 PLUMBING 15600 HVAC nw DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL 16100 ELECTRICAL .» Smith College Book Storage Facility TABLE OF CONTENTS Instructions to Bidders Form for General Bid Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor " General Conditions of the Contract for Construction DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 01027 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01030 ALTERNATES 01035 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01040 COORDINATION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01095 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS 01300 SUBMITTALS 01400 QUALITY CONTROL 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01631 SUBSTITUTIONS 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01740 WARRANTIES pro DIVISION 2- SITEWORK 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02160 EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEMS 02520 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03350 CONCRETE TOPPINGS DIVISION 4-MASONRY 04200 UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 5 -METALS 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL ! " 05310 STEEL DECK 05500 METAL STAIRS AND MISCELLANEOUS METALS Project Manual Book Storage Facility 126 West Street Northampton, Massachusetts December 6, 1999 Thomas Douglas Architects !" 136 West Street Northampton, Massachusetts (413) 585-0641 Fax: (413) 582-9882 s Mechanical Engineer: Lindgren & Sharples 96 Industry Avenue Springfield, Massachusetts (413) 732-4336 Fax: (413) 731-0786 Structural Engineer: Ryan S. Hellwig 28 Aldrich Street Northampton, Massachusetts (413) 584-4594 Fax: 584-4593 ~ -------------------------------- ------------------------------------ ipn 0 mill ~ -------------------- -::=:F---- - ---- --------- Li 70 v > log ba i shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Suns to hay the cost of purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage, and the Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner. 'fhe inininhum limits of liability purchased with such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits required for Contractor's Liability Insurance under Clauses 11.1.1.2 through 11.3.2 'lit the extent damages are covered by Project Nlanagenlenl Protective Liability insurance, the Owner,Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages,except such rights as they may.have to the proceeds of such insurance. 'fhe policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner, Architect or other persons or entities as additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under Paragraph 11.1. 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.4.1 Lhiless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder's risk"all-risk"or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others,comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall he maintained,unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance,until final payment has been made as provided in Paragraph 9.io or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Paragraph 11.4 to he covered,whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Project. 11.4.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an"all-risk"or equivalent policy form and shall include. without limitation,insurance against the perils of fire(with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse,earthquake, flood,windstorm, falsework,testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements,and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. 11.4.1.2 If tlhe Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above,the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to conl III e lice nhent of the`Fork.The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If tlhe Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in III) writing,then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. 0 0 o. .o 11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered °o because of such deductibles.. 0 19 A►A AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also GENERAL CONDITIONS portions of the Work in transit. OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9.9 shall not cc 111111 nee until the The American Institute insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial of Architects 1135 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying viotates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall he determined as provided in Paragraph 4.3 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: .1 claims under workers' compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed; .2 clams for damages because of bodily injury,occupational sickness or disease,or death of the Contractor's employees; .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;-• .s claims for damages,other than to the Work itself,because of injury to or destruction of tangible property,including loss of use resulting therefrom, i,- t .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or;property damage arising out of ownership,maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; .7 clams for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations;and .e clams involving contractual liability insurance applicable to-.,the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. 11.1.2 "I'he insurance required by Subparagraph I►.►.► shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law,whichever coverage is greater. Coverages,whether written on all occurrence or claims-made basis,shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be riled with the Owner prior to commencement of the \Vork. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph u.l shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are reasonably available,an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for payment as required by Subparagraph q.to.z. Information concerning re ILIC60ll of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief. c, o 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 00,00 11.2.1 The Owner shall he responsible for purchasing and maintaining the owner's usua C7 liability insurance. 01997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 11,3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE GENERAL CONDITIONS 11.3,1 Optionally, the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION Nianagennent I'rotectivr I.iahility insurance from the Contractor's usual sources as primary coverage for the Owner's, Contractor's and Architect's vicarious liability for construction The American Institute operations under the Contract.Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,the Owner of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006.5292 WARNING unlicensed photocopyusg violates U S copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of morgages,mechanic's liens and other security interests. 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. -,,,,DELAYS AND,EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect,or of an employee of either,or of a separate contractor A' employcd'by''thegOwner,or by changes ordered in the Work,or by labor disputes, fire, unusual .10delayin deliveries,unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control,or by n.delay:authorized by;the Owner pending mediation and arbitration,or by other causes which the J Architect determines►nay justify delay,then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order ' ;!for•suchre sortable time as the Architect may determine. Ar 4 3 2 dlCla►m, relating togime shall t made in accordance with applicable provisions of �t tParagraph 4. a j 3.3 F graph 8 3`doestnot°preclud tecovery of damages for delay by either party under � 8 Tl1is f 'otherprov►s►ons' 0 the Contract Documents.' k:• ARTICLE'S PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION «: *f� 91 F,,. CONTRACT.:SUM 9 t t lf The Contra. `Sum instated inilieAgreement and,including authorized adjustments,is the total'amount,par'. by;�ihe'O yn r�to tb'e Contractor for performance of the Work under the `Contract ocu_men _. SC1161JLE OF:VALUES . n 9 2.1° Before,the first Applicat►on'for Pinenl,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a sehedule�of'vidues ocaled to'vanous portions of the Work, prepared in such form and suppor ed liy+sue .data to.substantt5te its•aceuracy as the Architect may require.This schedule, `')"unless objected to by'tlie�Archiled;�sh�all be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applicattoynsf*or Payment APPtUGTIONSTOR PAYMENT }' 931' AIeasten 3d ys„Ief re the£date est blishe< fo-each progress payment, the Contractor r a ment for operations completed in `"shall`°submil`to the Architect an ►temned Application foi�P y accordance with'the Rhedule Hof Values. Such applieaUon shall be notarized, if required, and supported by4gcji.dataaubstanttatuig I Pe Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or r � A><rltitect may rt: t sticlI copies of requts Subcontractors and material suppliers, _��and reflecttitg. et ' ided for in e'- uments. iij� Y y'1��6: it i 7 3.1.1 As proms die 'in u paragraph F 3.8,�sucap app►cations may include requests for payment on o 0 account of 'an es' . the Work w,hieh n properly authorized by Construction Change co��.00 AM Directives,or by mtenm determinado of the itect,but not yet included in Change Orders. if J0, ."� 01997 AIA® u AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 s 9.312 Stich licalions;mma xot,include'requests for payment for portions of the Work for GENERAL CONDITIONS 70 the ontractor d�.not, tend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier,unless such OF THE CONTRACT FOR ' or aS�1lerfOCnled' others whom the Contractor intends to pay. CONSTRUCTION w ;.r The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 f,liyP ♦ i.' ��'. t.� Yi�. WARNING Unikensed tes U phl000pying r.a S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal Prosecution. 1 .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work;and .s additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. 7.3.7. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the-Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions arc - involved in a change,the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of ne increase,if any,with respect to that change. 7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner,amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties' agreement with part or all of such costs. For any portion of such cost that remains in dispute, the Archite�cwill make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for th costs.1hat , determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Ch a rder, bject tQ z' to the right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with Articl ' 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination niiid<" concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Timis or e area agreement upon.the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective imp atelyan h recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work of i 10;1 ing ad�ust- ment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inc on istr�n with the ntent x . of the Contract Documents.Such changes shall be effected by written o and shall,bindin on the Owner and Contractor.The Contractor shall carry out such writlers promptly. ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS period of time, in 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the ,, � b adjustments,allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completionot ork �, 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the dale established in the greement. .- •, 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certifi the Architect?' dance� with Paragraph 9.8. �. R 8.1.4 The term "day as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calciiiiar da otherwise specifically defined. III 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION y' r 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of L essence o h4Contra o. o° executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time►$a eason�able penod for performing the Work. Na �� !< t ` 'dI• mil. 01997 AIA® nk v_ V;? AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly,except by agreement or►nstructionoE-the Owner in GENERAL CONDITIONS writing,prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effecctiv date' o. OF THE CONTRACT FOR insurance reduired by Article a to be furnished by the Contractor and Ownerhe�dat�e CONSTRUCTION commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such►ness . The American Institute the date of commencement is established by the Contract Documents or a notice to proceed given of Architects 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. ` Y Washington,D.C.20006-5292 the violator to legal prosecution WARNING:unlicensed photocopying violates u3.copyright laws and will subject 4 e r� SNIITH COLLEGE CENTRAL STORES—BOOK STORAGE FACILITY ADDENDUM NO.2 December 30,1999 2. Re: Page 15600-31,paragraph 2.22.F. 8 change to read as follows: a. Refrigerant Piping: 1. All refrigerant piping: 1 in. b. Hot Water-Chilled Water/Dual Temperature Water: 1. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1 1/2 in. 2. Runouts 1 in. and less: 1 1/2 in. 3. Runouts 1-1/4 in. to 2 in.: 1 1/2 in. 4. Runouts 2-1/2 in. to 4 in.: 1 1/2 in. Note all chilled and dual temperature insulated with Armaflex shall be insulated 1 inch c. Condensate Drains: 1. All piping: 3/4 in. d. Equipment: 1. Hot/Chilled water pumps and chilled barrel: 3/4 in. Armaflex. 2. Hot/Chilled water expansion tanks: 3/4 in. Armaflex. 3. Air separator: 3/4-in. Armaflex. e. Steam and condensate return: All piping: 2 in. thick fiberglass. Page 6 of 6 SMITH COLLEGE CENTRAL STORES—BOOK STORAGE FACILITY ADDENDUM NO.2 December 30,1999 MECHANICAU/ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS DRAWINGS Drawing FP-2 1. Defer to attached partial basement plan Drawing 847-SK-FP-1 for revised piping in existing shops area. Drawing FP-3 1. Refer to attached partial first floor plan Drawing 847-SK-FP-2 for revised piping in existing warehouse to reconnect existing piping. SPECIFICATIONS Section 15300-Fire Protection 1. Re: Page 15300-22, paragraph K.; change water inlet heater to water inlet header and change single interlock to double interlock. 2. Re: Page 15300-22, paragraph O.; Delete reference to metered by- pass on new back flow preventor. Section 15600 HVAC 1. Re: Page 15600-30, paragraph 2.221.7 change to read as follows: All steam, condensate return hot water, chilled water, condensate drains, refrigerant piping, and make up water piping, cold water, dual and chilled water, and condensate drain piping shall be insulated with Armaflex, closed cell pipe insulation, or approved equal. The insulation shall have an average thermal conductivity not to exceed 25 BTU in. per sq. ft. per F. per hour at a mean temperature of 75° F. Thickness of insulation shall be as scheduled. The insulation shall be applied over clean dry pipe with all joints firmly together. Longitudinal jacket laps and the butt strips shall be smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. Note: All refrigerant piping run outdoors shall be covered with an aluminum jacket and secured with stainless steel bands. Page 5 of 6 SMITH COLLEGE CENTRAL STORES—BOOK STORAGE FACILITY ADDENDUM NO. 2 December 30,1999 Schedule#3 —Rooms 103,201, 202, 203, 204,205,207, 208, 209 • 1 off white color for trim and wall. Sheen: eggshell. • 1 off white color for windows and doors. . Sheen: gloss Schedule#4—Rooms ST-1, ST-2, ST-3 • 1 off white color for trim and wall. Sheen: eggshell. • 1 off white color for ceiling . Sheen: flat • 1 dark color for metal stair components and railings. . Sheen: gloss (Add) 1.2 G Exterior Painting Schedule: • 1 dark color for metal railing and panels. Sheen: gloss (Add) 1.2 H Paint shall be: Interior: • Wood for opaque finish: 1 coat Alkyd enamel undercoat; 2 coats alkyd enamel. • Drywall: 1 coat Acrylic latex primer; 2 coats acrylic latex(eggshell). • Plaster: 1 coat Alkyd Enamel underbody primer sealer; 2 coats acrylic latex (eggshell) • Ferrous metal: 1 coat Alkyd metal primer; 2 coats alkyd enamel. (gloss) • Concrete, stucco and masonry: 1 coat Benjamin Moore"Regal, Fresh Start"Interior/exterior Acrylic latex primer or equal, 2 coats Acrylic latex finish(eggshell). Finish coats should have a perm rating greater than 1, i.e. they should not create a vapor barrier. • Concrete masonry units: 1 coat Block filler; 2 coats acry lic latex finish Exterior: • Galvanized metal (high performance): 1 coat Epoxy primer; 1 coat catalyzed urethane • Ferrous metal (high performance): 1 coat Zinc rich primer, epoxy, 1 coat; catalyzed urethane Page 4 of 6 SNIITH COLLEGE CENTRAL STORES—BOOK STORAGE FACILITY ADDENDUM NO. 2 December 30,1999 Section 08410—Aluminum Entrances and Storefront (Add) 1.2 W—Aluminum Finish to be bronze anodized. Section 09512—Acoustical Tile Ceiling (Add) 1.2 B Typical Tile: 24"x24"with Reveal Edge. (Add) 1.2 E Tee size— 15/16" Section 09680—Carnet (Delete) 1.3 H Direct Glue-Down Installation—Carpet to be stretch—installation with pad. Section 09900 -Painting (Add) 1.2 F Interior Paint Schedule: Note: All areas where walls are to be patched or filled in with new construction are to be painted. Schedule# 1 —Rooms 001, 004, 005,006,008, 009, 010, 102, 105, 206 • 1 off white color for trim and wall. Sheen: eggshell. • 1 off white color for doors and trim. Sheen: gloss • 1 off white color for ceiling . Sheen: flat • 1 dark color for metal cage wall . Sheen: gloss Note: Paint all exposed mechanical systems (pipe,conduit and duct) in rooms#001, 002. 009, and 010 Schedule#2—Rooms 002, 003 See architectural drawings for paint colors and locations. • Sheen @ trim and wall: eggshell • Sheen @ doors: gloss • Sheen @ ceiling: flat • 1 stain color for millwork. Apply clear polyurethane finish. (stain shall be 2 colors applied separately to achieve final color) Page 3 of 6 SMITH COLLEGE CENTRAL STORES-BOOK STORAGE FACILITY ADDENDUM NO. 2 December 30,1999 SPECIFICATIONS Instructions to Bidders (Revise) I. Bidding Information Bid Date: Wednesday,January 5,2000, 3 PM at the office of the architect. (Add) R. Smith College is exempt from Federal Excise Taxes and Massachusetts Sales Tax. Form for General Bid (Add) E. If bonding is required add$ to the contract sum. (Add) J. Provide the name of at least(3)references for whom you have completed similar or equivalent projects. Include the project description, date of completion and approximate costs. (Add) K. List any and all subcontractors that you plan to use on this job. Include company name and address, contact person and description of work to be performed. AIA Document A 101-1997 (Add) 5.1.6—Retainage is 10% AIA Document A201-1997 (Add) Pages 28-29 and 36-37. These pages were missing from the specification, they are now included as an attachment to this addendum. Section 01010—Summary of Work (Revise) 1.1B—Contract documents are dated December 6, 1999 (Add) 1.lI—Keys: The college will provide the contractor with the necessary keys if needed for the project. The contractor will sign a key form stating what key or keys are issued to them. It is the responsibility of the contractor to return the keys to the college's project manager. The contractor will receive a copy of the key form, signed by the college that states that the keys have been returned. Failure to comply with said terms will result in a charge of$250.00 per key. The college reserves the right to deduct this amount from the final invoice. Page 2 of 6 SN1ITH COLLEGE CENTRAL STORES—BOOK STORAGE FACILITY ADDENDUM NO. 2 December 30,1999 The attention of bidders submitting proposal for the above mentioned project is called to the following addenda to the specifications and drawings. The items set forth herein, whether of omissions, additions, substitutions, deletions, or clarifications are all to be included in and form a part of each proposal. Correction to Addendum#1: Hardware Set #12 should be designated with an "L". Hardware set #13 should be designated with an"M". ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS DRAWINGS Drawing A-2 1. Provide solid wood transition sill at intersection of new and existing floor areas—sill to slope 1:12 or greater. Drawing A-7 1. Clarification: All"Mill Finish" aluminum should have a clean smooth surface finish,with a satin or brushed appearance. 1. All plywood shelves and supports to be stained and clear coated. Drawing-A-9 1. "-T.B.D."(To be determined)hardware sets are listed in Addendum#1. Drawing A-10 1. Finish Schedule: "Rm. 207 -Corridor"is not part of Alt. #1. All Finish Work in this area should be included in the base bid. Page 1 of 6 AIR FLOW 4 DDC CONTROL VALVE AIR VENT WATER COIL I q BALANCING VALVE E4 I r, "I III, y" STRAINER BALL VALVE PIPE CONDENSATE RETURN GA! HCS&R PIPING TO DRAIN NOTE: ALL VALVES AND FITTINGS SHOWN ABOVE MUST FIT WITHIN THE FAN COIL ENCLOSURE. UNINSULATED PIPE AND VALVES SHALL BE OVER EXTENDED DRAIN PAN. TYPICAL FAN COIL PIPING DETAIL NOT TO SCALE SCALE: NODE FAN COIL PIPING DETAIL ADQAMN7.I �INDGREN&SHARPLES,P.C. DATE: i2•2o a4 °* 0ONSLU G ENGEEES DRAM 66 GENERAL STORES SK PHONE:(413)7=43M FAX-(413)73110785 CHECKED A6 SMf H COLLEGE S 9594DJSTRYAVENUE SPRNGFW:M MA01104 WORM 847 NORTHAMPTON,MASSACHUSETTS H-1 ENAI:UNDWE/W01OQ�R00M 1 . HARDWARE SET#12 DOOR 103 1. 3 each Hinges FBB 179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 UD26D 2. 1 each Latch set ML 2210 NSM US26D 3. 1 each Stop 441 US26D 4. 3 each Silencers 20 L. HARDWARE SET#13 DOOR 109 1. 1 each Lockset CL3451 NSD US26D ARCHIECTURAL DRAWINGS Drawing A-9 Door Schedule Door#108 remarks should read: Reuse existing hardware 6. G. HARDWARE SET#7 DOORS#010, 213 1. 6 each Hinges FBB 168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D 2. 1 each Lockset MR ML 2242 NSM 26D 3. 2 each Closer 4111 Alum. 4. 2 each Auto Flush Bolts 359 B26D 5. 1 each Coordinator 469 1/2 B26D 6. 1 each Astragal 158 NA 7. 2 each Kick Plate 8 x 34 US26D (213) 8 x 28 (010) 8. 2 each Stop 441 US26D 9. 2 each Silencers 20 H. HARDWARE SET#8 DOORS# 011, 106, 107, 111,206,207 1. 3 each Hinges FBB 168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D 2. 1 each Latchset ML2210 NSM 26D 3. 1 each Closer 4011 Alum. 4. 1 each Stop 441 US26D 5. 3 each Silencers 20 I. HARDWARE SET#9 DOORS#014, 015 1. 1 each Cylinder 2. 1 each Von Duprin 99NL OP/3000-US26D 3. Balance of Hardware by Gate manufacturer I HARDWARE SET#10 DOORS # 101, 105 1. 1 set Hinges FBB 223 5x4.5 US32D 2. 1 each Exit Device CD 99NL OP US26D 3. 1 each Cylinder 3000 US26D 4. 1 each Cylinder 1000-118-A02-626 5. 1 each Closer 411 CUSH Alum.. 6. 1 each Kickplate 8 X 34 US26D 7. leach Sweep 18100 CP 36 - 8. 1 set W.S. 45041 CP 36 X 80 9. 1 each Threshold 271 AK K. HARDWARE SET#11 DOORS 104, 205, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212 1. 3 each Hinges FBB 179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D 2. 1 each Lockset MRML 2251 NSM US26D 3. 1 each Stop 441 US26D 4. 3 each Silencers 20 C. HARDWARE SET#3 DOOR#003 1. 3 each Hinges FBB168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D 2 1 each Lockset MR ML 2251 NSM 26D 3. 1 each Closer 4011 Alum. 4. 1 each Stop 441 US26D 5. 3 each Silencers 20 6. 1 each Electric Strike 1003 US26D D. HARDWARE SET#4 DOOR#004 1. 6 each Hinges FBB168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D 2. 1 each Lockset MR ML 2242 NSM 26D 3. 2 each Flush Bolts 458 B US26D 4. 1 each Astragal 158 NA 5. 2 each Stop 441 US26D 6. 2 each Silencers 20 E. HARDWARE SET#5 DOORS # 005, 110 1. 3 each Hinges FBB179 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D 2. 1 each Lockset MR ML 2251 NSM 26D 3. 1 each Closer 4011 Alum. 4. 1 each Kick Plate 8 x 34 US26D 5. 1 each Stop 441 US26D 6. 3 each Silencers 20 F. HARDWARE SET#6 DOORS#006, 009, 102, 201,202, 203 1. 3 each Hinges FBB 168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D NRP 2. 1 each Lockset MR ML 2242 NSM 26D 3. 1 each Closer 4111 Alum. 4. 1 each Kick Plate 8 x 34 US26D 5. 3 each Silencers 20 6. 1 each Electromagnet 997 24VDC Alum(Door#202, 203 only) 4. required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The FIRE PROTECTION Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the FIRE PROTECTION Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. ARCHIECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS Section 08710- Door Hardware 1.2-B Add the following:No substitutions for specified products allowed. 1.2-P Furnish all cylinders key to like. Furnish 12 keys. 1.3-E Add the following: Return all existing hardware to the college. Replace Hardware Specifications with the following: HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS: A. HARDWARE SET# 1 DOORS#001, 013 1. 3 each Hinges FBB 168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D NRP 2. 1 each Exit Device 99EO US26D 3. 1 each Closer 4111 CUSH Alum. _ 4. 1 each Kick Plate 8 x 34 US26D 5. 1 each Stop 441 US26D 6. 3 each Silencers 20 B. HARDWARE SET#2 DOORS# 002, 007, 008, 012, 112 1. 3 each Hinges FBB179 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D 2. 1 each Lockset MR ML 2251 NSM 26D 3. 1 each Stop 441 US26D 4. 3 each Silencers 20 3. Drawing.E-7 1. Note for elevator disconnect switch;revise to read: Reuse exisitng elevator disconnect switch. Provide new fuses. Provide new feeder to new elevator location. See riser Drawing E-4. Drawing E-9 1. Panelboard Schedule: for panel "MRP" revise active from (2) to (3) for 20A-1P breakers. Drawing H-6 1. Fan coil unit schedule—Fan coil unit No. FC-5 is part of the Base Bid. 2. Add fan coil piping detail as detailed on the enclosed sketch 847 SK H-1- SPECIFICATIONS Fire 15300-Fire Protection A. 15300-2 1.02 B.2—Delete in its entirety. B. 15300- 11 —Add a new paragraph 1.19 Cutting and Patching. 1.19 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of plumbing in the building shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Gutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Engineer. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the FIRE PROTECTION Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the FIRE PROTECTION Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching 2 . SMITH COLLEGE CENTRAL STORES—BOOK STORAGE MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ADDENDUM NO. 1 December 20, 1999 The attention of bidders submitting proposal for the above mentioned project is called to the following addenda to the specifications and drawings. The items set forth herein, whether of omissions, additions, substitutions, deletions, or clarifications are all to be included in and form a part of each proposal. DRAWINGS Drawing P-3 1. Existing 4" roof drain is to be removed. Connect 4"D to new roof drain in location shown on Drawings. Drawing H-3 1. Extend new 12x6-exhaust duct up from below and connect to new louver above exterior door. Duct shall be in a chase shown on Drawing A-2. Drawing E-3 1. Service Area — Add (3) type "L" and (1) type "Ll" cove lites at north side of corridor above stair #3 as shown on Drawing A6. Wire with other cove lites, circuit BSP-30 Drawing E-4 - 1. Stair No. 2 (ST2)—at exterior entrance add(1)recessed downlight, similar to type "M" except with prismatic lens. See note #4 for circuiting. Drawing E-6 1. Elevator Machine Room 005 —Add circuit "MRP-29" for elevator controller power. 7C7 � m m 0 -n cn --------___-- --- ---Q------------_______ Eta ---i qo D � Rg _._____------ ---fl---------------------- � Z r 70 r ----------=------------------ ----- ,---------------------------------- �- N - ----------------- --- --- ---------------------- tij� ------------- ---- - -- ---- Cf) m > x Q7 Id ------------------ --------------- ----------------- --------------- > v v Vr Cf) v -V -n -------------------------------------- --------- ---- m - --------- ----- 0 All ss y 0 -------------------------------------------- I ------------------------------------------t= m ----------------I --------------F�---------------- ------------------ ------------------------------------------- I-V ------------------------ -------- o II ----------- La shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage, and the Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner. 'fhe nhininhum limits of liability purchased with such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits required for Contractor's Liability Insurance under Clauses 11.1.1.2 through ll.►.1.5. 11.3.2 'lit the extent damages are covered by Project Rlanagenient Protective Liability insurance, the Owner,Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages,except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance. The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner, Architect or other persons or entities as additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability insurance coverage under Paragraph ll.►. 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.4.1 LLhless otherwise provided, tlhe Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder's risk"all-risk"or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others,comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained,unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance,until final payment has been made as provided in Paragraph 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the (honer has an insurable interest in the property required by this Paragraph 11.4 to be covered,whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Project. 11.4.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an"all-risk" or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation,insurance against the perils of fire(with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse,earthquake, flood,windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. 11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above,the Owner shall so inform _ the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work.The Contractor nlay then effect _ insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors.in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cult thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing,then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs Properly attributable thereto. 0 0 d. .o 11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles.• - O 1991 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also GENERAL CONDITIONS portions of the Work in transit. OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9.9 shall not commence until the The American Institute insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial of Architects 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington,D.C.20006.5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in paragraph 4.3 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: .1 clainns under workers' compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed; .2 claims for claniages because of bodily injury,occupational sickness or disease,or death of the Contractor's employees; .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; .• claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; .5 claims for damages,other than to the Work itself,because of injury to or destruction Of tangible property,including loss of use resulting therefrom, ., .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or.property damage arising out of ownership,maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; .7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations;and .a claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to;,the Contractor's obligations under paragraph 3.18. 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph ►1.►.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law,whichever coverage is greater. Coverages,whether written on an occurrence or claims-nnade basis,shall be maintained without interruption front date of conulnencentent of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to contutnencennent of the Work. 'I'hese certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph 11.► shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the, policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are reasonably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be suhntitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.►o.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's infornna►ion and belief. u. a 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 The Owner shall he responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Uwner's usual O liability insurance. 0 199 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 11,3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE GENERAL CONDITIONS 11.3.1 Optionally, the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project OF THE CONTRACT FOR front the Contractor's usual Sources as primary CONSTRUCTION Management I,rolective l.iahility insurance coverage for the Owner's, Contractor's and Architect's vicarious liability for construction The American Institute operations under the Contract.Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,the Owner of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006.5292 WARNING unlicensed photocopying violate%u S copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution I by the Owner,the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of morgages,mechanic's liens and other security interests. 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. ,,,-8.3,1t;it.DELAYSAND,EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect,or of an employee of either,or of a separate contractor employed'by''the�Ow'ner,or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire,unusual vej delay in deliveries*, casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control,or by n"_delay.authorized bathe Owner pending mediation and arbitration,or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay,then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order i f," such r as nable time as the Architect may determine. i'i 3 2'ft.Claiin_ relating to,rtime shaW*be ,made in accordance with applicable provisions of �'r laagraph 4. ` xA X83.3 is�arajyrrlaph 8 3 does notpreclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under "^other<provis►onso the' Document`s: ARTICLE'S "PAYMENTS;AND COMPLETION r 9.1 K,,,,KONTRACT SUM < 911 f The Contra. Sum instated to theAgreement and,including authorized adjustments,is the > total amount:;�ar�,M by.the'O�vner to`tbe Contractor for performance of the Work under the ` ' } Contract omen A SCHEDULE OF,VALUES04 $r s ' `-9 21 Morerethe fiiit#Application fo`r�'Pa�menl,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a -,-;0l'schedule of'values ocated to 1,Wh9us portions of the Work, prepared in such form and k supporAcd byauch data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require.This schedule, unl ss objected to by `the Architect;shalltbe used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's ;q}�, � ';.Applications fo"r Payment. 93 M2)'j�APPLICATI0NSTOR PAYMENT x *'931' Atleasn days fefoce theme`datet`establisheo ,each progress payment, the Contractor 3 -.N ,rte Mx V . }4 cl "r'+tJ.ri,�,r ,,kV ff thy+ e shall'submit to the Architect an itemized ApplieaUon forI'ayment for operations completed in accordance with?the4schedule of values. Such ap a ion shall be notarized, if required, and rYj,��iupportid by ch,.clata,siLWanUating tOContractor's right to payment as the Owner or At,, ,`Architect may tore ch as copies of requis Subcontractors and material suppliers, �._ and reflectuig. et ' rovidcd for in the umcnts. (lj' ' 931,1 As provide 'in u paragraph 7.3.8,such applications may include requests for payment on o e ' account of anthe (ork wkiieh`lia en properly authorized by Construction Change oopoo D � :m -sue, •�Sv: irectives,or by intenm determinatio o itect,but not yet included in Change Orders. 01997 AIA® `Y AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 93.1.2 Such a lications ma noL include°requests for payment for portions of the Work for ti P' o Y^ GENERAL CONDITIONS Wh1C .1 e.COntraCtor deesznot- tend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier,unless such OF THE CONTRACT FOR o k: as� enerformed. o ers hom the Contractor intends to pay. CONSTRUCTION The American Institute of Architects } 1135 New York Avenue,N.W. N, S3s„ :{��,•° }x .��A t ,: Y•� Washington,D.C.20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed phohoopyhta violates US.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work;and .s additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. 7.3.7. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the-Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of ne1,17 increase,if any,with respect to that change. 7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner,amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties' agreement with part or all of such costs. For any portion of such cost that remains in dispute, the Architccwill make_an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for=,th costs. at determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Ch ngeOrder, b�j- t to the right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with Article 4. : 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made b+ > e 'feet concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time.'or e reach _ agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective in' atelydan recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. , 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work of Vol,in ing adjust- ,; ment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and n co riot innsistenwith the intent Er*rra# �.ty�-r ' �t► .:ter: 4 " of the Contract Documents.Such changes shall be effected by written ode.`and shallbe.b,nding �a = on the Owner and Contractor.The Contractor shall carry out such writteorders promptly. �yf n � ARTICLE 8 TIME F1' 8.1 DEFINITIONS T 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time;}in g"'authtirized fi " adjustments,allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion oEe World 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the greement 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified:bFA, a Arc hitec'".' CO cw. , with Paragraph 9.8. "A 8.1.4 "The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean ealendac,da ess - otherwise specifically defined. ,. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION „t 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the esseiieetof theyContra y o. o° executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a,;easonable period for performing the Work. ,'" N `' w O 1 9 9 7 A I A® 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly,except by agreement or instruWon ole the Owner in AIA DOCUMENT A2014997 GENERAL CONDITIONS writing,prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effeetive:date of OF THE CONTRACT FOR insurance required by Article li to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner T he date 0 e>,- CONSTRUCTION commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such inuran eUnless The American Institute the date of commencement is established by the Contract Documents or a notice to proceed given of Architects ,- 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates Us.copyright laws and will subject the violstor to legal prosecution. a ti' SMITH COLLEGE CENTRAL STORES—BOOK STORAGE FACILITY ADDENDUM NO.2 December 30,1999 2. Re: Page 15600-31,paragraph 2.22.F. 8 change to read as follows: a. Refrigerant Piping: 1. All refrigerant piping: 1 in. b. Hot Water-Chilled Water/Dual Temperature Water: 1. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1 1/2 in. 2. Runouts 1 in. and less: 11/2 in. 3. Runouts 1-1/4 in.to 2 in.: 1 1/2 in. 4. Runouts 2-1/2 in.to 4 in.: 1 1/2 in. Note all chilled and dual temperature insulated with Armaflex shall be insulated 1 inch c. Condensate Drains: 1. All piping: 3/4 in. d. Equipment: 1. Hot/Chilled water pumps and chilled barrel: 3/4 in. Armaflex. 2. Hot/Chilled water expansion tanks: 3/4 in. Armaflex. 3. Air separator: 3/4-in. Armaflex. e. Steam and condensate return: All piping: 2 in. thick fiberglass. Page 6 of 6 SMITH COLLEGE CENTRAL STORES-BOOK STORAGE FACILITY ADDENDUM NO.2 December 30,1999 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS DRAWINGS Drawing FP-2 1. Defer to attached partial basement plan Drawing 847-SK-FP-1 for revised piping in existing shops area. Drawing FP-3 1. Refer to attached partial first floor plan Drawing 847-SK-FP-2 for revised piping in existing warehouse to reconnect existing piping. SPECIFICATIONS Section 15300-Fire Protection 1. Re: Page 15300-22, paragraph K.; change water inlet heater to water inlet header and change single interlock to double interlock. 2. Re: Page 15300-22, paragraph O.; Delete reference to metered by- pass on new back flow preventor. Section 15600 HVAC 1. Re: Page 15600-30, paragraph 2.221.7 change to read as follows: All steam, condensate return hot water, chilled water, condensate drains, refrigerant piping, and make up water piping, cold water, dual and chilled water, and condensate drain piping shall be insulated with Armaflex, closed cell pipe insulation, or approved equal. The insulation shall have an average thermal conductivity not to exceed 25 BTU in. per sq. ft. per F. per hour at a mean temperature of 75° F. Thickness of insulation shall be as scheduled. The insulation shall be applied over clean dry pipe with all joints firmly together. Longitudinal jacket laps and the butt strips shall be smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. Note: All refrigerant piping run outdoors shall be covered with an aluminum jacket and secured with stainless steel bands. Page 5 of 6 SMITH COLLEGE CENTRAL STORES—BOOK STORAGE FACILITY ADDENDUM NO.2 December 30,1999 Schedule#3 —Rooms 103,201,202, 203,204,205, 207,208, 209 • 1 off white color for trim and wall. Sheen: eggshell. • 1 off white color for windows and doors. . Sheen: gloss Schedule#4—Rooms ST-1, ST-2, ST-3 • 1 off white color for trim and wall. Sheen: eggshell. • 1 off white color for ceiling . Sheen: flat • 1 dark color for metal stair components and railings. . Sheen: gloss (Add) 1.2 G Exterior Painting Schedule: • 1 dark color for metal railing and panels. Sheen: gloss (Add) 1.2 H Paint shall be: Interior: • Wood for opaque finish: 1 coat Alkyd enamel undercoat; 2 coats alkyd enamel. • Drywall: 1 coat Acrylic latex primer; 2 coats acrylic latex(eggshell). • Plaster: 1 coat Alkyd Enamel underbody primer sealer; 2 coats acrylic latex (eggshell) • Ferrous metal: 1 coat Alkyd metal primer; 2 coats alkyd enamel. (gloss) • Concrete, stucco and masonry: 1 coat Benjamin Moore"Regal,Fresh Start'Interior/exterior Acrylic latex primer or equal, 2 coats Acrylic latex finish(eggshell). Finish coats should have a perm rating greater than 1,i.e. they should not create a vapor barrier. • Concrete masonry units: 1 coat Block filler; 2 coats acrylic latex finish Exterior: • Galvanized metal (high performance): 1 coat Epoxy primer; 1 coat catalyzed urethane • Ferrous metal (high performance): 1 coat Zinc rich primer, epoxy, 1 coat; catalyzed urethane Page 4 of 6 SMITH COLLEGE CENTRAL STORES—BOOK STORAGE FACILITY ADDENDUM NO. 2 December 30,1999 Section 08410—Aluminum Entrances and Storefront (Add) 1.2 W—Aluminum Finish to be bronze anodized. Section 09512—Acoustical Tile Ceiling (Add) 1.2 B Typical Tile: 24"x24"with Reveal Edge. (Add) 1.2 E Tee size— 15/16" Section 09680—Carpet (Delete) 1.3 H Direct Glue-Down Installation—Carpet to be stretch—installation with pad. Section 09900 -Painting- (Add) 1.2 F Interior Paint Schedule: Note: All areas where walls are to be patched or filled in with new construction are to be painted. Schedule# 1 —Rooms 001, 004,005, 006, 008, 009, 010, 102, 105, 206 • 1 off white color for trim and wall. Sheen: eggshell. • 1 off white color for doors and trim. Sheen: gloss • 1 off white color for ceiling . Sheen: flat 0 1 dark color for metal cage wall . Sheen: gloss Note: Paint all exposed mechanical systems (pipe, conduit and duct) in rooms#001, 002. 009, and 010 Schedule#2—Rooms 002, 003 See architectural drawings for paint colors and locations. • Sheen @ trim and wall: eggshell • Sheen @ doors: gloss • Sheen @ ceiling: flat • 1 stain color for millwork. Apply clear polyurethane finish. (stain shall be 2 colors applied separately to achieve final color) Page 3 of 6 SMITH COLLEGE CENTRAL STORES—BOOK STORAGE FACILITY ADDENDUM NO. 2 December 30,1999 SPECIFICATIONS Instructions to Bidders (Revise) I. Bidding Information Bid Date: Wednesday,January 5, 2000, 3 PM at the office of the architect. (Add) R. Smith College is exempt from Federal Excise Taxes and Massachusetts Sales Tax. Form for General Bid (Add) E. If bonding is required add$ to the contract sum. (Add) J. Provide the name of at least(3)references for whom you have completed similar or equivalent projects. Include the project description, date of completion and approximate costs. (Add) K. List any and all subcontractors that you plan to use on this job. Include company name and address, contact person and description of work to be performed. AIA Document A101-1997 (Add) 5.1.6—Retainage is 10% AIA Document A201-1997 (Add) Pages 28-29 and 36-37. These pages were missing from the specification, they are now included as an attachment to this addendum. Section 01010—Summary of Work (Revise) 1.1B—Contract documents are dated December 6, 1999 (Add) 1.1I—Keys: The college will provide the contractor with the necessary keys if needed for the project.The contractor will sign a key form stating what key or keys are issued to them. It is the responsibility of the contractor to return the keys to the college's project manager. The contractor will receive a copy of the key form, signed by the college that states that the keys have been returned. Failure to comply with said terms will result in a charge of$250.00 per key. The college reserves the right to deduct this amount from the final invoice. Page 2 of 6 SMITH COLLEGE CENTRAL STORES—BOOK STORAGE FACILITY ADDENDUM NO. 2 December 30,1999 The attention of bidders submitting proposal for the above mentioned project is called to the following addenda to the specifications and drawings. The items set forth herein, whether of omissions, additions, substitutions, deletions, or clarifications are all to be included in and form a part of each proposal. Correction to Addendum#1: Hardware Set #12 should be designated with an "L". Hardware set #13 should be designated with an"M". ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS DRAWINGS Drawing A-2 1. Provide solid wood transition sill at intersection of new and existing floor areas—sill to slope 1:12 or greater. Drawing A-7 1. Clarification: All"Mill Finish" aluminum should have a clean smooth surface finish,with a satin or brushed appearance. 1. All plywood shelves and supports to be stained and clear coated. Drawing,A-9 1. "T.B.D." (To be determined)hardware sets are listed in Addendum#1. Drawing_A-10 1. Finish Schedule: "Rm. 207-Corridor"is not part of Alt. #1. All Finish Work in this area should be included in the base bid. Page 1 of 6 AIR FLOW 4 DDC CONTROL VALVE AIR VENT WATER COIL I BALANCING VALVE oilIII �~ STRAINER BALL VALVE .9- E , PIPE CONDENSATE RETURN GPI HCS&R PIPING TO DRAIN NOTE: ALL VALVES AND FITTINGS SHOWN ABOVE MUST FIT WITHIN THE FAN COIL ENCLOSURE. UNINSULATED PIPE AND VALVES SHALL BE OVER EXTENDED DRAIN PAN. TYPICAL FAN COIL PIPING DETAIL NOT TO SCALE Sr E: NONE FAN COIL PIPING DETAIL AD$47.1 LINDGREN&S WIPLES,P.C. DATE: 12.20.99 CONSLU GENalE68 Ae GENERA�LSTO�/R�ES SK PHONE:(4133)73&318 FAX(413)73110780 C�QED; ke SMfTH COLLEGE �7f\ OD INDLSWAVENIE SPR1OREM.►NO1104 PROECF. 947 NORTHAMPTON,MASSACHUSETTS H-1 E►NL:LDCOFE wrnorlEROOM I . L HARDWARE SET#12 DOOR 103 1. 3 each Hinges FBB 179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 UD26D 2. leach Latch set ML 2210 NSM US26D 3. 1 each Stop 441 US26D 4. 3 each Silencers 20 jN HARDWARE SET#13 DOOR 109 1. 1 each Lockset CL3451 NSD US26D ARCHIECTURAL DRAWINGS Drawing A-9 Door Schedule Door#108 remarks should read: Reuse existing hardware 6. G. HARDWARE SET#7 DOORS# 010,213 1. 6 each Hinges FBB 168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D 2. 1 each Lockset MR ML 2242 NSM 26D 3. 2 each Closer 4111 Alum. 4. 2 each Auto Flush Bolts 359 B26D 5. 1 each Coordinator 469 1/2 B26D 6. 1 each Astragal 158 NA 7. 2 each Kick Plate 8 x 34 US26D (213) 8 x 28 (010) 8. 2 each Stop 441 US26D 9. 2 each Silencers 20 H. HARDWARE SET#8 DOORS #011, 106, 107, 111, 206, 207 1. 3 each Hinges FBB 168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D 2. 1 each Latchset ML2210 NSM 26D 3. 1 each Closer 4011 Alum. 4. 1 each Stop 441 US26D 5. 3 each Silencers 20 I. HARDWARE SET#9 DOORS#014,015 1. 1 each Cylinder 2. 1 each Von Duprin 99NL OP/3000-US26D 3. Balance of Hardware by Gate manufacturer J. HARDWARE SET#10 DOORS # 101, 105 1. 1 set Hinges FBB 223 5x4.5 US32D 2. 1 each Exit Device CD 99NL OP US26D 3. 1 each Cylinder 3000 US26D 4. 1 each Cylinder 1000-118-A02-626 5. 1 each Closer 411 CUSH Alum.. 6. 1 each Kickplate 8 X 34 US26D 7. 1 each Sweep 18100 CP 36 8. 1 set W.S. 45041 CP 36 X 80 9. 1 each Threshold 271 AK K. HARDWARE SET#11 DOORS 104, 205,208, 209, 210, 211, 212 1. 3 each Hinges FBB 179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D 2. 1 each Lockset MRML 2251 NSM US26D 3. 1 each Stop 441 US26D 4. 3 each Silencers 20 C. HARDWARE SET#3 DOOR# 003 1. 3 each Hinges FBB168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D 2 1 each Lockset MR ML 2251 NSM 26D 3. 1 each Closer 4011 Alum. 4. 1 each Stop 441 US26D 5. 3 each Silencers 20 6. 1 each Electric Strike 1003 US26D D. HARDWARE SET#4 DOOR#004 1. 6 each Hinges FBB168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D 2. 1 each Lockset MR ML 2242 NSM 26D 3. 2 each Flush Bolts 458 B US26D 4. 1 each Astragal 158 NA 5. 2 each Stop 441 US26D 6. 2 each Silencers 20 E. HARDWARE SET#5 DOORS# 005, 110 1. 3 each Hinges FBB179 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D 2. 1 each Lockset MR ML 2251 NSM 26D 3. 1 each Closer 4011 Alum. 4. 1 each Kick Plate 8 x 34 US26D 5. 1 each Stop 441 US26D 6. 3 each Silencers 20 F. HARDWARE SET#6 DOORS#006, 009, 102, 201, 202, 203 1. 3 each Hinges FBB 168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D NRP 2. 1 each Lockset MR ML 2242 NSM 26D 3. 1 each Closer 4111 Alum. 4. 1 each Kick Plate 8 x 34 US26D 5. 3 each Silencers 20 6. 1 each Electromagnet 997 24VDC Alum(Door#202, 203 only) 4. required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The FIRE PROTECTION Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the FIRE PROTECTION Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. ARCHIECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS Section 08710- Door Hardware 1.2-B Add the following:No substitutions for specked products allowed. 1.2-P Furnish all cylinders key to like. Furnish 12 keys. 1.3-E Add the following: Return all existing hardware to the college. Replace Hardware Specifications with the following: HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS: A. HARDWARE SET# 1 DOORS#001, 013 1. 3 each Hinges FBB 168 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D NRP 2. 1 each Exit Device 99EO US26D 3. 1 each Closer 4111 CUSH Alum. 4. 1 each Kick Plate 8 x 34 US26D 5. 1 each Stop 441 US26D 6. 3 each Silencers 20 B. HARDWARE SET#2 DOORS #002, 007, 008, 012, 112 1. 3 each Hinges FBB 179 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"US26D 2. 1 each Lockset MR ML 2251 NSM 26D 3. 1 each Stop 441 US26D 4. 3 each Silencers 20 3. Drawing E-7 1. Note for elevator disconnect switch;revise to read: Reuse exisitng elevator disconnect switch. Provide new fuses. Provide new feeder to new elevator location. See riser Drawing E4. Drawing_E-9 1. Panelboard Schedule: for panel "MRP" revise active from (2) to (3) for 20A-lP breakers. Drawing H-6 1. Fan coil unit schedule—Fan coil unit No. FC-5 is part of the Base Bid. 2. Add fan coil piping detail as detailed on the enclosed sketch 847 SK H-1- SPECIFICATIONS Fire 15300-Fire Protection A. 15300-2 1.02 B.2 —Delete in its entirety. B. 15300- 11 —Add anew paragraph 1.19 Cutting and Patching. 1.19 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of plumbing in the building shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by-the Engineer. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the FIRE PROTECTION Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the FIRE PROTECTION Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching 2 . SMITH COLLEGE CENTRAL STORES—BOOK STORAGE MECHANICAUELECTRICAL ADDENDUM NO. 1 December 20, 1999 The attention of bidders submitting proposal for the above mentioned project is called to the following addenda to the specifications and drawings. The items set forth herein, whether of omissions, additions, substitutions, deletions, or clarifications are all to be included in and form a part of each proposal. DRAWINGS Drawing P-3 1. Existing 4"roof drain is to be removed. Connect 4"D to new roof drain in location shown on Drawings. Drawing H-3 1. Extend new 12x6-exhaust duct up from below and connect to new louver above exterior door. Duct shall be in a chase shown on Drawing A-2. Drawing E-3 1. Service Area — Add (3) type "L" and (1) type "L1" cove lites at north side of corridor above stair #3 as shown on Drawing A6. Wire with other cove lites, circuit BSP-30 Drawing E-4 1. Stair No. 2 (ST2)—at exterior entrance add(1)recessed downlight, similar to type "M" except with prismatic lens. See note #4 for circuiting. Drawing E-6 1. Elevator Machine Room 005 —Add circuit "MRP-29" for elevator controller power. -'1 P4 c 17EFt.RThtEh"T OF )3;)ILD!XG 1N5?ECT'IONS r INSp4CTOR 21:Main Street ! Municipal Built_'ing Nartltwpum,MR 0 L - i i i l SECONDARY CONSTRUCTION CONTROL DOCUNIV4 T i (for Professional EngineerslArc}titccts responsible for only portion of a conuol:ed pro,,ect) i Prttject Tide:Smith College Book Datc: February 10, 2_QnD_,_, I Storage Facility Ptgject Location; 126 west St Map: parcel: Zone:_ Scope or PMJeet: Renovation of basement space for book i In aecordwice with the sixth edition Massachusetts State Ilailding Code,780 CMR SF TON 116-0: 11 _. Charles- P. S b a r p l P 5 pp Mass.Registration Number 2 8 9LtQ,__ j Being a registered professional Engineet/Ardtitec t hereby CIERTUFY that I have prepared or directly sups wised the prep=tiiou of au design plans.eomputatiord and speei$cations concerning: iXJ Fire protection [j Architectural (J Swcnual Ij MmhartiCal (;Biectrical I 1 tither(specif)'? for the above named project and that to the best of my kmwiedge,such plaer,computations and specifienliorts meet the applicable provisions of the Massachusetts State Building Cede,all acceptable engineering practices and all applicable law for the proposed project. 1 Furthermore,I understand and AGREE that I shall perform the-accessary pza&—"ional services to d,=nine that the above mentioned portioAs of the work proceed in ac oordartee with the documents approvtd for the bultding pernih. i - Upon o0:npletion cf the cork,I shall submit s Deal report as to the satisfactory con,pletion of 11 r-above- _ mentioned portior,of the work I Signature and Seal of registered professional: AA :.:.DES o Sri.'-�?°tES i ,p 2894JQ F4/STE¢� AL i i j Fax 413-687-1272 -phone 413.587-12.10 i i p. c Ug of Xorthimptcm t i D£PtiZTrtt:NT OF OJII.a!>\G INS?EC]'lONS j INSKCIOR 212 Main Street i ? ttnklpal Bull�lr�g � Northampr:a,MA 0110W i i ! SECONDARY CONSTRUCTION CONTROL DOCUNMXT (for Professional EnginxrsmA.rchitects mponsble far only ponion of a controLsd prn ecx) i Pr*ctTide:Smith College Book Dats:_February 10, ?nnn; ' Store e Facility j png ed I,ocauon: 126 west St Map: Parcel: zone: i ! Scope of Project. Renovation of- basement space for b6ok Storage i I In accordatice with the sigh edition Massachusetts State Building Code,780 CMR SFt.MON 116.0: j I, Evert 0. Lindgren, Jr—_ Mass.Reistradon Number. 2,2 4 2 ____ i Being a registered professional EngineevArchitec t hereby CERITFX that I ha,a prepared or directly supervised the preparation of all&stgn plans.computations and speci$cadons eonc errdDg: i ()Fft protxtion (J Architectural ()Structural ))Mechanical i BlectAcal I ()tither(spent)) ! i for the sbo a mined project and that to the best of my knowWge;such plane,computations and specifu`»ions meet the applicable prmis!oas of the Massachusetts State Building Code,all acceptable engineering practices and all applicable law-for the proposed project. Fur'ihemwro,i understand and AGREE that!shall perform tic necessary professional services to dccmnine that tho aboN t mentioned portioAS of the work proceed in acootdanc a with the documents approved for the building permit. Upon oompietion cf the work;I shall subunit a final report as to the satisfactory completion of the above- _ mentioned portlor of the work I Signature and Scvl of re&P-red pfofessianal: tN OF bgss9�yG EVERT 0. LINDGREN, 1 1R., P.E. y ,p No. 22425 O SS NAL I i Fax 413-681-1272 -phone 413-$87-12-Z i FE$-10-00 09 :45 AM TEAGNOCONSTRUCTION 41s09y:bGo nov one so 03131F 3 Chi# of �xtl}��t� t �att>t�[1�u��tb 1 1 pBPARTMBKT OF IVILDIX13 tNSPWrIONS ;1 INSPECTOR 212 hiaip strett 0 MUnlcilmt Building , , 4 Nonhvnpran,MA DIM i Sz=4DARY CONSTRUCTION CONTROL DOCUNMKT (for professional Engineers/kchitecta tosporoible,for only ponlon of It eonuollod project} prof=Title,. C � ✓ i ._Dam prglect Location: Scope os'Project. W 6k'6'-fA I In scoordatice.with the sixth edition Massachusetts State Building Code 780 CMR SEC."RON 116.0: Mon.ltegisoatlon Nu.1rbtr 5T '✓1 Being a r4steted pr*.saioaal Bngirm/AroNtaot hereby CtRTIIrY that I Wo pitpsred or directly +4 supervised dw preparntiott of oA&Ap plans,eoraputatlasts Gild specification cotiosraing: 4 �Stnunual , for the above naiW project and that to thobcst of say kr4wta4e,such plans,oomputations and speeillcations meet the applicable provisions of the Massachusetts State Building Code,ell acceptable engineering prnaices and all applicable laws for the proposed project. Fu t' snore,I understand aid AGUE that 1 shall portorM the accessary profes3ioiul services to detorrnine that the above mentioned portions of the work proceed in accotdame with the docutne is approved for the building permit. Upon completion of the work,I that submit a final report as to the satisfactory completion or the abm- ntentioacd portion Cabe work E Signature and Seat of resisured praessionw: OF �O RYAN S. ti I g HELLWIG STRUCWR No.37300 Fax 413481-1272 •phone 413-$87-1240 �o� RFC/STER�� FSS/ANAL FEB 1 5 2" j better Of Transmittal rp7 OF F!' TC1 Teagno Construction Incorpdrated P.O.Box 2054,Amherst,MA 01004-2054 Phone:1-413-549-0803 Fax:1-413-549-2628 To: City Of Northampton Building Inspector Project ID: SCB j Dater 14-Feb-00 212 Main Street Project Name:i,Smith College Book Storage Facility Northampton, MA 01060 Location: 126 West Street Northampton, MA 01060- Attn: Tony Patillo We are sending you: Copies Dated Number Description 1 02/10/00 01109.009 Original Secondary Construction Control Documents from Lindgren&Sharpies,Mechanical Engineers Ryan S. Hellwig, PE,Structural Engineer 2 12/20/99 01109.009 LAddendum#1 (2 sets) These are transmitted as checked: (X For Approval r For Your Use fX—�As Requested I—For review and comment Approved as submitted Approved as noted Returned for corrections Remarks ,Dear Mr. Patillo: Enclosed please find the above listed documents to be filed with our building ,permit application for the Smith College Book Storage Facility project. If you have any questions, please call our office. Thank you very much. Signed: File: 36570.6373 Page 1 of 1 00e FEB OR Project Manual 9 Smith College Book Storage Facility 126 West Street Northampton, Massachusetts December 6, 1999 0 Thomas Douglas Architects 136 West Street Northampton,Massachusetts (413) 585-0641 Fax: (413) 582-9882